2011 GMC Acadia Owners PDF

GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-55 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-31
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-35
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-56
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-39 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Vehicle Data Recording and
Recommended Fluids, Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Introduction iii
This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because Propriétaires Canadiens
they are options that you did A French language copy of this
not purchase or due to changes manual can be obtained from your
subsequent to the printing of this dealer or from:
owner manual. Please refer to the
The names, logos, emblems, purchase documentation relating On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, to your specific vehicle to confirm ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing each of the features found on your concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not vehicle. For vehicles first sold in suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, Canada, substitute the name
the GMC Truck Emblem, ACADIA, Helm, Incorporated
“General Motors of Canada Limited” P.O. Box 07130
and DENALI are trademarks and/or for GMC wherever it appears in this
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
manual.
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20759681 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation
manual and the page number or information relating to a specific
where it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it
hazard that could result in injury or is a safety symbol which means
death. “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart + : Fuses

Here are some additional symbols 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
that may be found on the vehicle Changer
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer j : LATCH System Child
to the Index. Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
# : Air Conditioning : : Oil Pressure
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Tow/Haul Mode
O : Exterior Lamps d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
# : Fog Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
. : Fuel Gauge
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
1-19
Sensing System for Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-19
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Instrument Panel Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance
Initial Drive Information StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Tire Sealant and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Driving for Better Fuel
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roadside Assistance
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18
Heated and Ventilated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑12. J. Data Link Connector (DLC) S. Cupholders on page 4‑1.
B. Windshield Wiper/Washer on (Out of View). See Malfunction T. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
page 5‑5. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.
U. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
C. Instrument Cluster on K. Cruise Control on page 9‑33. page 5‑6.
page 5‑12. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Traction Control System
D. Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 5‑2. (TCS) Disable Button.
page 5‑33 (If Equipped). M. Horn on page 5‑4. See StabiliTrak® System on
E. Instrument Panel Storage on N. Steering Wheel Controls on page 9‑31.
page 4‑1. page 5‑2. Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped).
USB Port (Inside IP Storage). O. Driver Information Center See Tow/Haul Mode on
See Auxiliary Devices on (DIC) Buttons (If Equipped). page 9‑28.
page 7‑37. See Driver Information Center Power Liftgate Button
F. Infotainment on page 7‑1. (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on (If Equipped). See Liftgate on
page 5‑25 or Driver Information page 2‑10.
Navigation/Radio System Center (DIC) (Without DIC
(If Equipped). See Navigation V. Heated and Ventilated
Buttons) on page 5‑30. Front Seats on page 3‑9
System manual.
P. Dual Automatic Climate Control (If Equipped).
G. Exterior Lamp Controls on System on page 8‑4.
page 6‑1. W. Passenger Airbag Status
Q. Console Shift Lever Indicator on page 5‑16
H. Hood Release. See Hood on (If Equipped). See “Console (If Equipped).
page 10‑5. Shift Lever” under Shifting X. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
I. Instrument Panel Illumination Into Park on page 9‑21.
Control on page 6‑5. R. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑3.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors.

Information Entry (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can be
The RKE transmitter is used to personalized.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the remotely lock and unlock the doors To open or close the liftgate, press
important features that may from up to 60 m (195 feet) away and hold & until the liftgate
or may not be on your specific from the vehicle. begins to move.
vehicle.
Press L and release to locate the
For more detailed information, refer vehicle.
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. Press L and hold for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five seconds
to unlock all remaining doors.
In Brief 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks

Starting the Vehicle To cancel a remote start: On vehicles with power door locks,
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the controls are located on the
With this feature the engine can be front doors.
the vehicle and press and
started from outside of the vehicle.
hold / until the parking K: Press to unlock the doors.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
lamps turn off. Q: Press to lock the doors.
. Turn on the hazard warning See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8.
2. Press Q. flashers.
3. Immediately after completing . Turn the ignition switch on and Liftgate
Step 2, press and hold / until then off. To open the liftgate the vehicle must
the parking lamps flash. See Remote Vehicle Start on be in P (Park). Press the touchpad
When the vehicle starts, the parking page 2‑5. under the liftgate handle. To close
lamps will turn on and remain on the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
as long as the engine is running. Door Locks strap as an aid.
The doors will be locked and the
To lock or unlock a door manually:
climate control system may
come on. . From the inside use the door
lock knob on the window sill.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a . From the outside turn the key
10-minute time extension. Remote toward the front or rear of the
start can be extended only once. vehicle, or press the Q or K
button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
1-6 In Brief
Power Liftgate Windows Seat Adjustment

On vehicles with a power liftgate, Manual Seats
the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
operate it.
. Press and hold the liftgate
button & on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
On vehicles with power windows,

the switches are on the doors. A. Seat Adjustment Handle
Press the switch to lower the B. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
window. Pull the switch up to Lever
raise it.
C. Seatback Lever
For more information, see Power
. Press the liftgate button on the Windows on page 2‑20. To adjust a manual seat:
center console. 1. Lift the handle (A) under the seat
. Press the touchpad switch on to unlock it.
the outside liftgate handle. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
For more information see Liftgate on position, and then release the
page 2‑10. handle.
In Brief 1-7
3. Try to move the seat back and To adjust a power seat, if equipped: Memory Features
forth to be sure it is locked in . Move the seat forward or
place. rearward by sliding the
Move the lever (B) up or down to control (A) forward or rearward.
raise or lower the seat. . Raise or lower the entire seat
Use the lever (C) to adjust the by moving the control (A) up
seatback. or down.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 . Adjust the seatback by tilting the
and Reclining Seatbacks on top of the control (B) forward or
page 3‑7 for more information. rearward.
Power Seats See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑7.
. Increase or decrease lumbar
support by pressing the front On vehicles with the memory
or rear of the control (C). feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall
See Lumbar Adjustment on memory settings for the driver seat
page 3‑6. and outside mirrors.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4 for more information.
A. Seat Adjustment Control

B. Seatback Control
C. Lumbar Control
1-8 In Brief
Storing Memory Positions See “Memory Seat and Second Row Seats
To save into memory: Mirrors” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 and
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
recliner, and both outside Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more
mirrors. information.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑17 Easy Exit Driver Seat
for more information.
This feature can move the seat
Not all vehicles will have the rearward to allow extra room to
ability to save and recall the exit the vehicle.
mirror positions.
S : Press to recall the easy exit
2. Press and hold “1” until seat position. The vehicle must be
two beeps sound. in P (Park).
3. Repeat for a second driver See “Memory Seat and The second row seat can be folded
position using “2.” Mirrors” under Power Seat to access the third row. Pull the
To recall, press and release “1” Adjustment on page 3‑4 and sliding seat lever forward, the seat
or “2.” The vehicle must be in Vehicle Personalization (With DIC cushion folds, and the seat slides
P (Park). A single beep will sound. Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more forward.
The seat and outside mirrors will information.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑10.
move to the position previously
stored for the identified driver.
In Brief 1-9
Third Row Seats Heated and Ventilated Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
The third row seatbacks can be Seats the button, the seat will change to
folded forward, and the seats can the next lower setting, and then to
be removed. the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑9 for more
information.
Heated and Ventilated Head Restraint

Seat Buttons Shown, Adjustment
Heated Seat Buttons Similar Do not drive until the head restraints
If available, the buttons are on the for all occupants are installed and
center console. To operate, the adjusted properly.
engine must be running. To achieve a comfortable seating
Pull up on the release lever on
I: If available, press to heat the position, change the seatback
the back of the seat and push the
seatback only. recline angle as little as necessary
seatback forward to fold.
while keeping the seat and the
See Third Row Seats on page 3‑13 H : If available, press to ventilate head restraint height in the proper
for more information. the entire seat. position.
J: Press to heat the seat and For more information see Head
seatback. Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
1-10 In Brief
Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

indicator will be visible on the
Passenger Airbag instrument panel when the vehicle
is started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑41 for more
information.
Mirror Adjustment
United States
Exterior Mirrors
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly. Canada and Mexico
. Safety Belts on page 3‑16. The passenger sensing system will
. How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the right front passenger
Properly on page 3‑19. frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑25. seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for and roof‐rail airbags are not affected Controls for the outside power
Children (LATCH System) on by the passenger sensing system. mirrors are on the driver door.
page 3‑57.
In Brief 1-11
To adjust each mirror: For vehicles with manual folding Steering Wheel
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
Adjustment
mirror.
to its original position.
2. Press on the control pad to
adjust the mirror. Interior Mirror
3. Press (A) or (B) again to The automatic dimming rearview
deselect the mirror. mirror reduces the glare from other
vehicles headlamps. Each time the
Folding Mirrors vehicle is started, the dimming
To adjust each mirror: feature comes on.
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out See Automatic Dimming Rearview
to the driving position. Mirror on page 2‑19.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
1-12 In Brief
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Dome Lamp Override An indicator light on the button
closer or away from you. comes on to show that the dome
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the lamps are off. Press near the bottom
steering wheel in place. of the button so the dome lamps
come on when a door is opened.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. Reading Lamps
Press the button near each lamp to
Interior Lighting turn them on or off.
Dome Lamps For more information, see:
The dome lamps are located in the . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.
overhead console and above the . Instrument Panel Illumination
rear seat passengers. Control on page 6‑5.
The dome lamps come on when a The dome lamp override button is
door is opened, unless the dome next to the exterior lamps control.
lamp override button is pressed in.
E DOME OFF: Press the top of
To manually turn them on, turn the the button in and the dome lamps
instrument panel brightness control remain off when a door is opened.
clockwise to the farthest position.
In Brief 1-13
Exterior Lighting AUTO : Automatic operation of the Windshield Wiper/Washer

headlamps at normal brightness and
other exterior lamps. The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the left side of the
; : Manual operation of the steering column.
parking lamps and other exterior
lamps.
5 : Manual operation of the
headlamps and other exterior
lamps.
# : Use to turn on or off the fog
lamps (if equipped).
For more information, see: Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
The exterior lamps control is located page 6‑1. 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.
on the instrument panel, to the left 9 : Turns the wipers off.
of the steering wheel.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System on 6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the
O : Turns the automatic light page 6‑3. band up for more frequent wipes or
control on or off. down for less frequent wipes.
. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
1-14 In Brief
Windshield Washer Climate Controls

J: Press the button at the end
of the turn signal/lane change
lever to spray washer fluid on
the windshield.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is located on the instrument panel
below the climate control system.
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the
rear wiper on and off. The wiper
speed cannot be changed.
Y (Wash): Press to spray
washer fluid on the rear window. A. Fan Control E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
The window wiper will also
B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation
come on.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/ D. Air Conditioning
Washer on page 5‑6.
In Brief 1-15
or Rear Climate Control System

(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)
on page 8‑11.
Transmission
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving down hill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic
Dual Automatic Climate Control J. Rear Window Defogger shift position indicator within the
System instrument panel cluster. When
K. Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control using the ERS Mode a number will
L. PASS (Passenger) display next to the L, indicating the
B. AUTO (Auto Operation) current gear that has been selected.
M. Passenger Side Temperature
C. Defrost Control To use this feature:
D. Air Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic
2. Press the plus/minus button
Climate Control System on page 8‑4
F. Air Delivery Mode Control located on the shift lever, to
(If Equipped). For more information
increase or decrease the gear
G. Driver Side Temperature Control about the rear climate control, see
range available.
Rear Climate Control System (Rear
H. Display Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 See Manual Mode on page 9‑27.
I. Power (On/Off)
1-16 In Brief
Vehicle Features © ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display between
Radio(s) the radio station frequency and the
time, if equipped. While the ignition
is off, press 4 to display the time.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑2.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment System (RSE) and
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA),
see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑39 and Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) System on
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port
O : Press to turn the system BAND: Press to choose between

on and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.
In Brief 1-17
Storing a Favorite Station 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, XM Satellite Radio Service
A maximum of 36 stations can be MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, XM is a satellite radio service
stored as favorites using the six month, day, and year). based in the 48 contiguous
softkeys located below the radio 3. Press the pushbutton located United States and 10 Canadian
station frequency tabs and by using under any one of the labels to provinces. XM Satellite Radio has
the radio FAV button. Press FAV be changed. a wide variety of programming and
to go through up to six pages of commercial-free music, coast to
favorites, each having six favorite 4. To increase or decrease the time coast, and in digital-quality sound.
stations available per page. Each or date, turn f clockwise or A fee is required to receive the XM
page of favorites can contain any counter‐clockwise. service.
combination of AM, FM, or XM For detailed instructions on setting For more information refer to:
stations. the clock for the vehicles specific . www.xmradio.com or call
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. audio system, see Clock on
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
page 5‑8.
Setting the Clock . www.xmradio.ca or call
To set the time and date for the Satellite Radio 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: For more information, see Satellite
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
1. Turn the ignition key to Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, Radio subscription can receive XM
then press O, to turn the programming.
radio on.
1-18 In Brief
Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls b g : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
the sound on. Press and hold longer
input located on the radio faceplate
than two seconds to interact with
and a USB port located in the center
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems.
console. External devices such
as iPod®, laptop computers, MP3 + e − e : Increases or decreases
players, CD changers, USB storage volume.
device, etc. can be connected to
the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm c x : Press to reject an
(1/8 in) input jack or the USB port incoming call, or to end a call.
depending on the audio system. SRCE : Press to switch between
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑37. the radio, CD, and for vehicles with,
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear
auxiliary.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users w/cx: Press to change ¨ : Press to seek the next radio
favorite radio stations, select tracks station, the next track or chapter
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone while sourced to the CD or DVD
to make and receive hands-free on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks
or folders on an iPod® or USB slot, or to select tracks and folders
calls using the vehicle audio on an iPod® or USB device.
system, microphone, and controls. device.
For more information, see Steering
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑50.
In Brief 1-19
Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise Storage Compartments

control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑33.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
Navigation System Manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major For vehicles with a second
T: Press to turn cruise control freeways and roads. After a row center console, press the
on and off. The indicator comes on destination has been set, the buttons (B) or (C) to access
when cruise control is on. system provides turn-by-turn storage areas.
+ RES: Press briefly to make the instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system Lift up on (A) for additional
vehicle resume to a previously storage area.
set speed, or press and hold to can help locate a variety of points
accelerate. of interest (POIs), such as banks, See Floor Console Storage on
airports, restaurants, and more. page 4‑2.
SET– : Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or to make See the Navigation System Manual
the vehicle decelerate. for more information.
1-20 In Brief
Power Outlets Performance and

The vehicle has three 12‐volt Maintenance
accessory power outlets which
can be used to plug in electrical
equipment, such as a cell phone
StabiliTrak® System
or MP3 player. The traction control system limits
The switch to operate the front wheel spin and the StabiliTrak
The power outlets are located: sunroof is on the headliner above system assists with directional
. On the instrument panel below the rearview mirror. control of the vehicle in difficult
the climate controls. Vent: Press the front or rear of the driving conditions. Both systems
. At the rear of the center floor switch to vent or close the sunroof. turn on automatically every time
console. the vehicle is started.
Express-open/Express-close:
. In the rear cargo area. From the closed position, press . To turn off the traction control
and release the rear or front of part of StabiliTrak, press and
To use the outlets, remove the the switch to express-open or release 5 located on the
cover. express-close the sunroof. instrument panel and the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. For more information see Sunroof appropriate DIC message
on page 2‑22. is displayed. See Vehicle
Sunroof Messages on page 5‑37.
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or . The StabiliTrak system
ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the remains on.
sunroof and power sunshade. See For more information, see
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑31.
on page 9‑21.
In Brief 1-21
Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are Engine Oil Life System
getting low and the tires need to be
This vehicle may have a Tire inflated to the proper pressure. The engine oil life system calculates
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). engine oil life based on vehicle use
The TPMS does not replace normal and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
monthly tire maintenance. It is the OIL SOON message when it is time
driver’s responsibility to maintain to change the engine oil and filter.
correct tire pressures. The oil life system should be reset
See Tire Pressure Monitor System to 100% only following an oil
on page 10‑47. change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
The TPMS warning light alerts you Tire Sealant and
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
to a significant loss in pressure of Compressor Kit with the engine off.
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as This vehicle may come with a jack 2. If the vehicle has Driver
soon as possible and inflate the and spare tire or a tire sealant and Information Center (DIC)
tires to the recommended pressure compressor kit. The kit can be used buttons: Press the vehicle
shown on the Tire and Loading to temporarily seal small punctures information button until
Information label. See Vehicle Load in the tread area of the tire. OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
Limits on page 9‑12. The warning See Tire Sealant and Compressor If the vehicle does not have
light will remain on until the tire Kit on page 10‑63 for complete Driver Information Center (DIC)
pressure is corrected. operating information. buttons: The vehicle must be in
During cooler conditions, the low tire If the vehicle came with a jack and P (Park) to access this display.
pressure warning light may appear spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on Press the trip odometer reset
when the vehicle is first started and page 10‑61. stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING
then turn off. This may be an early displays.
1-22 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
3. If the vehicle has Driver Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
Information Center (DIC)
buttons: Press and hold the
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
set/reset button until “100%” is Driving habits can affect fuel near the size.
displayed. Three chimes sound mileage. Here are some driving . Follow recommended scheduled
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL tips to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
SOON message goes off. possible.
If the vehicle does not have . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance
Driver Information Center (DIC) smoothly. Program
buttons: Press and hold the . Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782
trip odometer reset stem until
abrupt stops. (1‐800‐462-8782)
OIL LIFE REMAINING shows
“100%.” Three chimes sound . Avoid idling the engine for long TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL periods of time.
SOON message goes off. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
. When road and weather
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. conditions are appropriate, Mexico: 01-800-466-0801
use cruise control. As the owner of a new GMC, you
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑11. . Always follow posted speed are automatically enrolled in the
limits or drive more slowly when Roadside Assistance program.
conditions require. See Roadside Assistance Program
. Keep vehicle tires properly (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
inflated. or Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
. Combine several trips into a information.
single trip.
In Brief 1-23
Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

(U.S. and Canada)
Q : Push this blue button to
If you have an active OnStar connect to a specially trained
subscription, press the Q button OnStar Advisor to verify your
and the current GPS location will account information and to
be sent to an OnStar advisor who answer questions.
will assess your problem, contact ] : Push this red emergency
Roadside Assistance, and relay button to get priority help from
your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar Emergency
you need. subscription, OnStar uses several Advisors.
Online Owner Center innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for hands‐free,
(U.S. and Canada) Advisors to provide a wide range voice‐activated calling and to give
of safety, security, navigation, voice commands for Hands‐Free
The Online Owner Center is a diagnostics, and calling services.
complimentary service that includes Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
online service reminders, vehicle Automatic Crash Response Navigation.
maintenance tips, online owner In a crash, built‐in sensors can
manual, special privileges, automatically alert an OnStar
and more. Advisor who is immediately
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to
www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.) see if you need help.
or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-24 In Brief
Automatic Crash Response, OnStar service requires wireless OnStar service may not work if the
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, communication networks and the OnStar equipment isn’t properly
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Global Positioning System (GPS) installed or you haven’t maintained
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, satellite network. Not all OnStar it and the vehicle is in good working
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn services are available everywhere order and in compliance with all
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling or on all vehicles at all times. government regulations. If you
are available on most vehicles. OnStar service can’t work unless try to add, connect, or modify
Not all OnStar services are the vehicle is in a place where any equipment or software in the
available on all vehicles. For more OnStar has an agreement with vehicle, OnStar service may not
information, see the OnStar Owner's a wireless service provider for work. Other problems OnStar can’t
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) service in that area, and the control may prevent service to you,
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); wireless service provider has such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR coverage, network capacity, weather, electrical system design
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY reception, and technology and architecture of the vehicle,
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the Q compatible with OnStar service. damage to important parts of the
button to speak with an OnStar Service involving location vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days information about the vehicle network congestion or jamming.
a week. can’t work unless GPS signals See Radio Frequency Statement on
For a full description of OnStar are available, unobstructed, page 13‑20 for information
services and system limitations, and compatible with the OnStar regarding Part 15 of the Federal
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in hardware. The vehicle has to have Communications Commission
the glove box. a working electrical system and (FCC) rules and Industry Canada
adequate battery power for the Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
In Brief 1-25
OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Controls Increase the volume of the radio
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
button that can be used to interact heard.
with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may
page 5‑2 for more information. not be functioning properly.
On some vehicles, the Talk button Push the Q button and request a
can be used to dial numbers into vehicle diagnostic check. If the light
voice mail systems, or to dial phone appears clear (no light appears),
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's your OnStar subscription has
Guide for more information. expired and all services have been
deactivated. Push the Q button to
confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
1-26 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-18
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

key or additional key is needed.
Keys Notice: If the keys get locked
in the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
{ WARNING carry a spare key.
Leaving children in a vehicle with If locked out of the vehicle, call
the ignition key is dangerous for Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
many reasons. Children or others Assistance Program (U.S. and
could be badly injured or even Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
killed. They could operate the Assistance Program (Mexico) on
power windows or other controls page 13‑10.
The key is used for the ignition and
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks. Remote Keyless Entry
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag (RKE) System
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith
can use to make new keys. Store See Radio Frequency Statement on
if caught in the path of a closing
this information in a safe place, page 13‑20 for information
window. Do not leave the keys in regarding Part 15 of the Federal
a vehicle with children. not in the vehicle.
Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start):
operating range: For vehicles with this feature, see
(RKE) System Operation
. Check the distance. Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5
The transmitter may be The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for additional information.
transmitter functions work up to
too far from the vehicle.
60 m (195 feet) away from the Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
. Check the location. Other vehicle. doors.
vehicles or objects may be If enabled through the Driver
blocking the signal. There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the
. Check the transmitter's battery. transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to
See “Battery Replacement” Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. indicate locking has occurred.
later in this section. If enabled through the DIC,
. If the transmitter is still not the horn sounds when Q is
working correctly, see your pressed again within five seconds.
dealer or a qualified technician See Vehicle Personalization
for service. (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47
for additional information.
Pressing Q may arm the
content theft‐deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑13.
With Remote Start and Power

Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
K (Unlock): Press once to L (Vehicle Locator/Panic recalled when using the transmitter
unlock only the driver door. If K is Alarm): Press and release to labeled "1", if enabled through
locate the vehicle. The parking the vehicle personalization.
pressed again within five seconds,
lamps flash and the horn sounds See “Memory Seat and Mirrors”
all remaining doors unlock. The
three times. under Power Seat Adjustment on
interior lamps come on and stay on
page 3‑4 and “Memory Seat Recall”
for 20 seconds or until the ignition Press and hold L for more than under Vehicle Personalization (With
is turned on. two seconds to activate the panic DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more
If enabled through the DIC, the alarm. The parking lamps flash information.
parking lamps flash twice to indicate and the horn sounds repeatedly
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle for 30 seconds. The alarm turns Programming Transmitters to
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) off when the ignition is moved to the Vehicle
on page 5‑47. ON/RUN or L is pressed again. Only RKE transmitters
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF programmed to this vehicle
for the panic alarm to work. will work. If a transmitter is lost
disarms the content theft‐deterrent
or stolen, a replacement can be
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm The vehicle comes with two
purchased and programmed through
System on page 2‑13. transmitters. Each transmitter will
your dealer. When the replacement
& (Power Liftgate): Press and have a number on it, "1" or "2".
transmitter is programmed to this
hold until the liftgate begins to These numbers correspond
vehicle, all remaining transmitters
move to open or close the liftgate. to the driver of the vehicle.
must also be reprogrammed.
The taillamps flash and a chime For example, the memory
sounds to indicate when the liftgate seat position for driver 1 will be
is opening or closing.
Any lost or stolen transmitters 3. Insert the new battery, positive

will no longer work once the side facing down. Replace with a
new transmitter is programmed. CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Each vehicle can have up to eight 4. Snap the transmitter back
transmitters programmed to it. together.
See your dealer to program
transmitters to this vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Battery Replacement This vehicle may have a remote
Replace the battery if the REPLACE starting feature that starts the
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY engine from outside of the vehicle.
message displays in the DIC. / (Remote Start): This button is
Notice: When replacing the 1. Separate the transmitter with a located on the RKE transmitter if
battery, do not touch any of the flat, thin object, such as a flat the vehicle has remote start.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static head screwdriver.
Laws in some communities
from your body could damage the . Carefully insert the tool may restrict the use of remote
transmitter. into the notch located starters. For example, some laws
along the parting line of the may require a person using the
transmitter. Do not insert remote start to have the vehicle in
the tool too far. Stop as view when doing so. Check local
soon as resistance is felt. regulations for any requirements
. Twist the tool until the on remote starting of vehicles.
transmitter is separated. Do not use the remote start
2. Remove the old battery. Do not feature if the vehicle is low on fuel.
use a metal object. The vehicle could run out of fuel.
If the vehicle has the remote When the vehicle starts the parking The rear window defogger and
start feature, the RKE transmitter lamps will turn on and remain on heated mirrors, if the vehicle has
functions have an increased range as long as the engine is running. them, turn on during colder outside
of operation. However, the range The doors will be locked and the temperatures and turn off when the
may be less while the vehicle is climate control system will operate key is turned to ON/RUN.
running. automatically if the vehicle has the After entering the vehicle during a
There are other conditions which automatic system, or at the same remote start, insert and turn the key
can affect the performance of the setting as when the vehicle was to the ON/RUN position to drive the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless last turned off. vehicle.
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 If the vehicle has an automatic If the vehicle is left running it
for additional information. climate control system and heated automatically shuts off after
seats, the heated seats turn on 10 minutes unless a time
Starting the Engine Using during colder outside temperatures
Remote Start extension has been done.
and shut off when the key is turned
To start the vehicle: to ON/RUN. See Heated and
Ventilated Front Seats on page 3‑9
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the for more information.
vehicle.
2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash. If the
vehicle's lights can not be seen,
press and hold / for at least
four seconds.
Extending Engine Run Time For example, if the lock button and Shutting the Engine Off After a
then the remote start buttons are Remote Start
To extend the engine run time by
pressed again after the vehicle
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3 To manually shut off a remote start:
has been running for five minutes,
while the engine is still running.
10 minutes are added, allowing . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
The engine run time can only be
the engine to run for a total of vehicle and press / until the
extended if it is the first remote start
15 minutes. parking lamps turn off.
since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended A maximum of two remote starts or . Turn on the hazard warning
one time. remote start attempts are allowed flashers.
between ignition cycles.
If the remote start procedure is used . Turn the ignition switch on and
again before the first 10 minute After the vehicle's engine has been then off.
time frame has ended, the first started two times using the remote
10 minutes will immediately expire start button, the ignition must be Conditions in Which the
and the second 10 minute time turned on and then back off before Remote Start Will Not Work
frame will start. the remote start procedure can be
The vehicle cannot be started using
used again.
the remote start feature if the key is
in the ignition, the hood is open, or if
there is an emission control system
malfunction.
The engine turns off during a remote
start if the coolant temperature gets
too high or if the oil pressure
gets low.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are
{ WARNING . Young children who get into located on the front doors.
unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
dangerous. doors.
be overcome by extreme heat
. Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent Q (Lock): Remove the key from
children, can easily open injuries or even death from the ignition and press to lock the
the doors and fall out of a heat stroke. Always lock the doors.
moving vehicle. When a door vehicle whenever leaving it.
is locked, the handle will not Delayed Locking
. Outsiders can easily enter
open it. The chance of being When locking the doors with the
through an unlocked door
thrown out of the vehicle in power lock switch and a door or the
when you slow down or stop
a crash is increased if the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
the vehicle. Locking the doors
doors are not locked. So, all five seconds after the last door is
can help prevent this from
passengers should wear closed. You will hear three chimes
happening.
safety belts properly and to signal that the delayed locking
the doors should be locked feature is in use.
whenever the vehicle is To lock or unlock a door, use the
driven. key from the outside or the door Pressing the power lock switch
lock from the inside. twice or the lock button on the
(Continued)
RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the Lockout Protection

key is in the ignition.
This feature protects you from
This feature can be programmed by locking the key in the vehicle when
using the Driver Information Center the key is in the ignition and a front
(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” door is open.
under Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47. If the driver side power door lock
switch is pressed when the driver's
Automatic Door Locks door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
Vehicles with an automatic then the driver door will unlock.
lock/unlock feature enable you
If the passenger side power door
to program the vehicle's power
lock switch is pressed when the Open the rear doors to access the
door locks. This feature can
front passenger door is open and security locks on the inside edge of
be programmed through the
the key is in the ignition, all of the each door.
Driver Information Center (DIC).
doors will lock and then the front To set the locks, insert a key into
See Vehicle Personalization
passenger door will unlock. the slot and turn it to the horizontal
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47
for more information. position. The door can only be
Safety Locks opened from the outside with the
The vehicle has rear door security door unlocked. To return the door to
locks to prevent passengers from normal operation, turn the slot to the
opening the rear doors from the vertical position.
inside.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad under the liftgate handle.
The vehicle must be in P (Park)
Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control to open the liftgate. To close the
system to a setting that liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
Manual Liftgate Operation brings in only outside air strap as an aid.
and set the fan speed to the
{ WARNING highest setting. See Climate The liftgate will not open if the
battery is disconnected or has low
Control System in the Index.
Exhaust gases can enter the voltage. The liftgate will resume
. If the vehicle is equipped with operation when the battery is
vehicle if it is driven with the a power liftgate, disable the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or reconnected and charged.
power liftgate function.
with any objects that pass If the battery is properly connected
through the seal between the For more information about and has adequate voltage, and the
body and the trunk/hatch or carbon monoxide, see Engine liftgate still will not function, the
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains Exhaust on page 9‑24. vehicle should be taken to a dealer
carbon monoxide (CO) which for service.
cannot be seen or smelled. To unlock the liftgate, use the
It can cause unconsciousness power door lock switch or press
and even death. the door unlock button on the
If the vehicle must be driven with RKE transmitter twice. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
Operation on page 2‑3.
. Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation The power liftgate can be Pressing the buttons or touchpad
power opened and closed a second time while the liftgate is
The vehicle may have a power
in the following ways: moving reverses the direction.
liftgate. The vehicle must be in
P (Park) to use this feature. . Press and hold the power liftgate
button on the RKE transmitter.
The taillamps will flash and a chime
See Remote Keyless Entry
will sound when the power liftgate
(RKE) System Operation on
is used.
{ WARNING
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Power Liftgate Button near
Liftgate Latch
Notice: If you open the liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed by
without checking for overhead
pressing the power liftgate button
obstructions such as a garage
next to the liftgate latch. Press the
door, you could damage the
button a second time during liftgate
liftgate or the liftgate glass. . Press the liftgate button on the operation to reverse that operation.
Always check to make sure center console.
the area above and behind the
. Press the touchpad on the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
outside liftgate handle.
The power liftgate may be Obstacle Detection Features (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30
temporarily disabled under extreme A warning chime will sound and the for more information. After removing
temperatures or under low battery liftgate will automatically reverse the obstructions, manually open the
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate direction to the full closed or open liftgate to the full open position or
can still be operated manually. position if the liftgate encounters close the liftgate to the fully closed
If the transmission is shifted out of an obstacle during a power open and latched position. The liftgate
P (Park) while the power function or close cycle. After removing the resumes normal power operation.
is in progress, the liftgate power obstruction, the power liftgate The vehicle has pinch sensors
function will continue to completion. operation can be used again. located on the side edges of the
If the transmission is shifted out of If the liftgate comes across more liftgate. If an object is caught
P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates obstacles on the same power cycle, between the liftgate and the body
before the power liftgate latches the power function deactivates, and presses against this sensor,
closed, the liftgate may reverse to and you must manually open or the liftgate will reverse direction and
the open position. Cargo could fall close the liftgate. A message open fully. The liftgate will remain
out of the vehicle. Always make displays, LIFTGATE OPEN, to open until it is activated again or
sure the power liftgate is closed indicate that the liftgate is open. closed manually. Do not force the
and latched before you drive away. See Driver Information Center (DIC) liftgate open or closed during a
If you power open the liftgate and (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑25 power cycle.
the liftgate support struts have lost or Driver Information Center (DIC)
pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will
stay open temporarily, then slowly
close. See your dealer for service
before using the liftgate if this
occurs.
Manual Operation of Power With the power liftgate disabled and Vehicle Security
Liftgate all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
can be manually opened and This vehicle has theft-deterrent
closed. features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate and lift the Anti-Theft Alarm System
gate open. To close the liftgate, On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm
use the pull cup to lower the liftgate system, to activate the system:
and close. The liftgate latch will
power close. Always close the . Press Q on the Remote Keyless
liftgate before driving. Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
power door lock switch when
If the RKE button or the power close
any door is open.
button on the liftgate is pressed
while power operation is disabled,
To change the liftgate to manual the lights will flash three times,
operation, press the switch on the but the liftgate will not move.
center console to the OFF position.
It is not recommended that
A message displays, POWER
you drive with the liftgate open.
LIFTGATE OFF, to indicate that the
However, if you must drive with
liftgate is manual operation mode.
the liftgate open, the liftgate should The security light flashes.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
be set to manual operation by
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑25
pressing the OFF switch on the
or Driver Information Center (DIC)
center console.
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30
When the door is closed, the If the key is not placed in the Testing the Alarm
security light stops flashing and ignition and turned to START or the
To test the alarm:
stays on solid for approximately door is not unlocked by pressing Q
30 seconds. The content theft during the ten second pre-alarm, 1. From inside the vehicle, lower
deterrent alarm is not armed the alarm goes off. The headlamps the driver side window and open
until the security light goes off. flash and the horn sounds for the driver door.
If the delayed locking feature is about 30 seconds, then turns 2. Press Q.
active, the alarm is not activated off to save the battery power.
until all doors are closed and the 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
The vehicle can be started with the door and wait for the security
security light goes off. correct ignition key if the alarm has light to go out.
. Press Q when the driver door been set off.
4. Then reach in through the
is closed. The security light To avoid setting off the alarm by window, unlock the door with
comes on solid for approximately accident: the manual door lock and open
30 seconds and then goes off. . Lock the vehicle with the door the door. This should set off
The content theft deterrent alarm key after the doors are closed. the alarm.
is not armed until the security
light goes off. . Unlock the door with the RKE If the alarm does not sound when it
transmitter. Unlocking a door should, but the vehicle's headlamps
The theft-deterrent system will not any other way sets off the alarm flash, check to see if the horn
activate if the doors are locked with if the system has been armed. works. The horn fuse may be blown.
the vehicle's key or the manual To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
door lock. Press K or place the key in the Circuit Breakers on page 10‑32.
If a locked door is opened without ignition and turn it to START to
turn off the alarm. If the alarm does not sound or the
using the RKE transmitter, a vehicle's headlamps do not flash,
ten second pre-alarm occurs. see your dealer for service.
The horn chirps and the lights flash.
Immobilizer The security light comes on if can service the PASS-Key® III+
there is a problem with arming to have a new key made. In an
See Radio Frequency Statement on or disarming the theft-deterrent emergency, contact Roadside
page 13‑20 for information system. Assistance. See Roadside
regarding Part 15 of the Federal Assistance Program (U.S. and
Communications Commission When the PASS-Key® III+ system
senses an incorrect key, the vehicle Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada Assistance Program (Mexico) on
Standards RSS-210/220/310. does not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the page 13‑10.
Immobilizer Operation vehicle will be discouraged because It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+
of the high number of electrical key decoder to learn the transponder
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ codes. value of a new or replacement key.
(Personalized Automotive Security Up to 10 keys may be programmed
If the engine does not start and
System) theft-deterrent system. to the vehicle. The following
the security light on the instrument
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive procedure is for programming
panel comes on when trying to start
theft-deterrent system. additional keys only. If all the
the vehicle, there may be a problem
The system is automatically armed with your theft-deterrent system. currently programmed keys are
when the key is removed from the Turn the ignition off and try again. lost or do not operate, you must
ignition. see your dealer or a locksmith who
If the engine still does not start, can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
The system is automatically and the key appears to be keys made and programmed to the
disarmed when the key is turned undamaged, try another ignition system.
to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY key and check the fuses. See Fuses
or START from the LOCK/OFF and Circuit Breakers on page 10‑32 See your dealer or a locksmith who
position. for additional information. If the can service PASS-Key® III+ to get a
engine still does not start with the new key blank that is cut exactly as
You do not have to manually arm or the ignition key that operates the
disarm the system. other key, the vehicle needs service.
If the vehicle does start, the first key system.
may be faulty. See your dealer who
To program the new additional key: If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost Exterior Mirrors
1. Verify that the new key has or damaged, see your dealer or a
locksmith to have a new key made.
a 1 stamped on it. Convex Mirrors
The SERVICE THEFT
2. Insert the already programmed DETERRENT SYSTEM message
key in the ignition and start the displays on the Driver Information { WARNING
engine. If the engine does not Center (DIC) when there is a
start, see your dealer for service. A convex mirror can make things,
problem with the theft-deterrent like other vehicles, look farther
3. After the engine has started, system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
away than they really are. If you
turn the key to LOCK/OFF, System Messages on page 5‑43
cut too sharply into the right lane,
and remove the key. for additional information.
you could hit a vehicle on the
4. Insert the key to be programmed Do not leave the key or device that right. Check the inside mirror or
and turn it to the ON/RUN disarms or deactivates the theft glance over your shoulder before
position within five seconds of deterrent system in the vehicle. changing lanes.
the original key being turned to
the LOCK/OFF position.
The passenger side mirror is convex
The security light turns off once shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
the key has been programmed. curved so more can be seen from
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if the driver seat.
additional keys are to be
programmed.
Power Mirrors To adjust each mirror: For vehicles with outside power
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the foldaway mirrors:
mirror.
2. Press on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
3. Press (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
Folding Mirrors
For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
to its original position.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the The controls for power foldaway
driver door. mirrors are located on the
driver door.
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Heated Mirrors Park Tilt Mirrors

Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors: If the vehicle has the memory
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: package, the outside mirrors have
< (Rear Window Defogger): a park tilt feature. This feature tilts
. The mirrors are accidentally Press to heat the mirrors.
obstructed while folding. the outside mirrors to a preselected
See “Rear Window Defogger” under position when the vehicle is in
. They are accidentally manually Dual Automatic Climate Control R (Reverse). This allows the driver
folded/unfolded. System on page 8‑4 for more to view the curb for parallel parking.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal information.
The passenger and/or driver mirror
driving speeds. returns to its original position
Automatic Dimming when the vehicle is shifted out
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
using the mirror controls to reset Mirror of R (Reverse), or the ignition is
them to their normal position. If the vehicle has the automatic turned off or to OFF/LOCK.
A popping noise may be heard dimming mirror, the driver outside This feature can be turned on or
during the resetting of the power mirror automatically adjusts for the off through the Driver Information
foldaway mirrors. This sound is glare of headlamps behind you. Center (DIC). See Vehicle
normal after a manual folding This feature is controlled by the Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
operation. on and off setting on the inside on page 5‑47 for more information.
rearview mirror. See Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror on
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming If the vehicle has RVC, the O button
Rearview Mirror for turning the dimming feature on or
Manual Rearview Mirror off will not be available.
The vehicle may have an automatic
Adjust the inside rearview mirror dimming inside rearview mirror. Vehicles with OnStar have three
for a clear view of the area behind additional control buttons for the
Automatic dimming reduces the OnStar system. See your dealer
your vehicle. To avoid glare of the glare from the headlamps of the
headlamps from behind, move the for more information about OnStar
vehicle behind you. The dimming and how to subscribe to it. See
lever to the right for nighttime use feature comes on and the indicator
and to the center for daytime use. the OnStar Owner Guide for more
light illuminates each time the information about the services
Vehicles with OnStar® have three ignition is turned to start. OnStar provides.
additional control buttons located at O (On/Off): Press to turn the
the bottom of the mirror. See your Cleaning the Mirror
dimming feature on or off.
dealer for more information about Do not spray glass cleaner directly
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. The vehicle may also have a Rear
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
dampened with water.
more information about the services Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑37
OnStar provides. for more information.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by be badly injured or even killed.
the extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or
from heat stroke. Never leave a even make the vehicle move.
child, a helpless adult, or a pet The windows will function and
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are they could be seriously injured or
designed to improve fuel economy killed if caught in the path of a
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a closing window. Do not leave
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear keys in a vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the

Windows window switch until the window
is fully open.
A window with the express‐up/down
feature allows it to be raised or 3. Pull up and hold the window
lowered without holding the switch. switch to close the window.
Press or pull the window switch Continue to hold it briefly after
fully and release it to activate the the window is fully closed.
express feature. The express mode 4. Repeat for each window that has
can be canceled by pressing or the express-up feature.
pulling the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Programming the Power
Uplevel shown, base similar Windows The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
The power window controls are If the battery on the vehicle has feature. If an object is in the way of
located on each of the side doors. been recharged, disconnected, the window as it is express-closing,
The driver door also has switches or replaced, windows with the or in certain weather conditions
that control the passenger express-up feature need to be like severe icing, the window will
and rear windows. The power reprogrammed for this feature to stop and open to a factory preset
windows work with the ignition in work. To program the window: position. The window functions
ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or 1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is
when Retained Accessory Power in the ACC/ACCESSORY, removed.
(RAP) is active. See Retained ON/RUN position, or
Accessory Power (RAP) on when Retained Accessory
page 9‑21. Power (RAP) is active.
Press the switch to lower the See Retained Accessory
window. Pull up on the front edge Power (RAP) on page 9‑21.
of the switch to raise the window.
Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is located with the Sunroof
power window switches on the
driver door armrest. This feature The ignition must be in ON/RUN
prevents the rear windows from or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate
being operated, except from the the sunroof and power sunshade.
driver position. Press the switch to See Retained Accessory Power
turn the lockout feature on or off. (RAP) on page 9‑21.
An indicator light will come on to The vehicle may have a sunroof
show the lockout feature is on. over the front seats and a rear
sunroof over the second row seats.
The rear sunroof does not open.
The switch to operate the front
Pull the sun visor down to block sunroof is on the headliner above
glare. Detach the sun visor from the rearview mirror.
the center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
Manual Sunshades
On a vehicle with only manual
sunshades, press the button on the
sunshade handle to release it and
guide it back. Pull the sunshade
forward until it latches to close it.
Vent: From the closed position, Rear Power Sunshade
press and hold the front of the On vehicles with a rear power
switch to vent the sunroof. Press sunshade, the switch is on the
and hold the rear of the switch to headliner above the rearview mirror.
close the sunroof.
Do not keep the sunroof open Express-open/Express-close:
for long periods of time while the From the closed position, press
vehicle is not in use. Dirt and debris and release the rear of the switch
may collect on the sunroof seal or to express-open the sunroof. Press
in the tracks that could cause an and release the front of the switch
issue with sunroof operation, noise to express-close the sunroof.
Notice: The rear sunshade could
or plug the water drainage system. The front sunshade must be opened be damaged if you attempt to
Periodically open the sunroof and and closed manually. Push up on open or close it manually. Do not
remove any obstacles or loose the sunshade handle to open the manually open or close the rear
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal sunshade. sunshade.
and roof sealing area using a
clean cloth, mild soap, and water. To open the rear sunshade, located
Do not remove grease from sunroof. over the second row seats, press
and release the rear of the switch.
Press and release the front of the
switch to close the sunshade.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-46
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
3-31
3-31
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-47
Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Child Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Front Seats Airbag System Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-35 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-53
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 When Should an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-55
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag for Children
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
How Does an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 What Will You See After an Securing Child Restraints
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 (Right Front
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to
Do not drive until the head top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head
restraints for all occupants are height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release
installed and adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint Front Seats

after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place. Seat Adjustment
The vehicle's second‐row seats
have head restraints in the outboard { WARNING
seating positions that cannot be You can lose control of the
adjusted. vehicle if you try to adjust a
The vehicle's third‐row seats have manual driver seat while the
headrests in the outboard seating vehicle is moving. The sudden
positions that cannot be adjusted. movement could startle and
The vehicle's head restraints and confuse you, or make you push A. Seat Adjustment Handle
headrests are not designed to be a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when B. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
removed.
Lever
the vehicle is not moving.
C. Seatback Lever
To adjust a manual seat: Power Seat Adjustment To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
1. Lift the handle (A) under the seat . Move the seat forward or
to unlock it. rearward by sliding the
2. Slide the seat to the desired control (A) forward or rearward.
position, and then release the . Raise or lower the entire seat
handle. by moving the control (A) up
3. Try to move the seat back and or down.
forth to be sure it is locked in . Adjust the seatback by tilting the
place. top of the control (B) forward or
Move the lever (B) up or down to rearward.
raise or lower the seat. See Reclining Seatbacks on
Use the lever (C) to adjust the page 3‑7.
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks . Increase or decrease lumbar
A. Seat Adjustment Control
on page 3‑7. support by pressing the front
B. Seatback Control or rear of the control (C).
C. Lumbar Control See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑6.
Memory Seat and Mirrors Storing Memory Positions Memory Remote Recall
To save into memory: The memory feature can recall the
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback driver seat and outside mirrors to
recliner, and both outside stored positions when entering the
mirrors. vehicle.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑17 To activate, unlock the driver

for more information. door with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
Not all vehicles will have the seat and outside mirrors will move
ability to save and recall the to the memory position associated
mirror positions. with the transmitter used to unlock
2. Press and hold “1” until the vehicle.
two beeps sound. This feature is turned on or off using
On vehicles with the memory 3. Repeat for a second driver the vehicle personalization menu.
feature, the controls on the driver position using “2.” See “Memory Seat Recall” under
door are used to program and recall Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
To recall, press and release “1” Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more
memory settings for the driver seat or “2.” The vehicle must be in
and outside mirrors. information.
P (Park). A single beep will sound.
The seat and outside mirrors will To stop recall movement, press one
move to the position previously of the power seat controls, memory
stored for the identified driver. buttons, or the power mirror buttons.
If something has blocked the A single beep sounds. The driver Lumbar Adjustment
driver seat while recalling a seat moves back approximately
memory position, the recall may 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back Manual Lumbar
stop. Remove the obstruction; then farther, press the easy exit seat
press and hold the appropriate button again until the seat is all
manual control for the memory item the way back.
that is not recalling for two seconds. If something has blocked the driver
Try recalling the memory position seat while recalling the exit position,
again by pressing the appropriate the recall may stop. Remove the
memory button. If the memory obstruction; then press and hold
position is still not recalling, the power seat control rearward for
see your dealer for service. two seconds. Try recalling the exit
Easy Exit Driver Seat position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer
This feature can move the seat for service.
rearward to allow extra room to
exit the vehicle. See “Easy Exit Seat” under Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) If available, move the handle
S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press on page 5‑47 for more information. forward or rearward to increase
to recall the easy exit seat position. or decrease lumbar support.
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
If the easy exit seat feature is
programmed on in the vehicle
personalization menu, automatic
seat movement occurs when the
ignition key is removed.
Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
Sitting in a reclined position when seatback upright. Then sit well
the vehicle is in motion can be back in the seat and wear the
dangerous. Even when buckled safety belt properly.
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
If available, press and hold the go into it, receiving neck or other
front or rear of control to increase injuries.
or decrease lumbar support. The lap belt cannot do its job
Release the control when the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback reaches the desired go up over your abdomen.
level of lumbar support. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal Do not have a seatback reclined if
injuries. the vehicle is moving.
(Continued)
Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
{ WARNING If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
You can lose control of the
stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle if you try to adjust a
injury to the person sitting there.
manual driver seat while the
Always push and pull on the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
seatbacks to be sure they are
movement could startle and
locked.
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright Heated and Ventilated

position:
Front Seats
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
{ WARNING
will return to the upright position. If you cannot feel temperature
2. Push and pull on the seatback to change or pain to the skin, the
make sure it is locked. seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. Heated and Ventilated
Power Reclining Seatbacks To reduce the risk of burns, Seat Buttons Shown,
people with such a condition Heated Seat Buttons Similar
should use care when using
If available, the buttons are on the
the seat heater, especially for
center console. To operate, the
long periods of time. Do not engine must be running.
place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such I (Heated Seatback): If available,
as a blanket, cushion, cover, press to heat the seatback only.
or similar item. This may cause H (Ventilated Seat): If available,
the seat heater to overheat. press to ventilate the entire seat.
An overheated seat heater may
To adjust a power seatback, cause a burn or may damage
if equipped: the seat.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Remote Start Heated Seats Rear Seats
Press to heat the seat and When it is cold outside, the heated
seatback. seats may turn on automatically
Press the button once for the during a remote vehicle start.
highest setting. With each press of The heated seats will be canceled
the button, the seat will change to when the ignition is turned on.
the next lower setting, and then to Press the desired heated seat
the off setting. The lights indicate button to use the heated seats
three for the highest setting and after the vehicle is started.
one for the lowest. The heated seat button lights will
The passenger heated seat may not turn on during a remote start.
take longer to heat up. The temperature of an unoccupied
The heated and/or ventilated seats seat may be reduced.
are canceled after the ignition is See Remote Vehicle Start on A. Seat Adjustment Handle
turned off. page 2‑5 for more information.
B. Reclining Seatback Strap
C. Sliding Seat Lever
Entering and Exiting the 2. Move the front center console

Third Row armrest completely forward.
See Center Console Storage on
page 4‑2.
{ WARNING
3. Place the folding armrests in the
Using the third row seating upright position.
position while the second row is
4. Make sure that the safety belt is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
unfastened and in the stowed
could cause injury in a sudden position.
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)
position. Push and pull on the forward and move the seatback
seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: forward. The seat cushion will
place. fold, and the entire seat will slide
1. Remove objects on the floor in forward. The head restraints will
front of or on the second row fold out of the way automatically.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on
the safety belts still fastened may the floor.
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Returning the Seat to the 4. Return the head restraint to Reclining the Seatbacks
Seating Position the upright position by reaching
To recline the seatback:
behind the seat and pulling the
To return the second row seat to its head restraint forward until it 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull
normal seating position: locks into place. the reclining seatback strap (B).
1. Remove objects on the floor Push and pull on the head 2. Move the seatback to the
behind the second row seat or restraint to make sure that it desired position, and then
in the seat tracks on the floor. is locked. release the strap to lock the
2. Pull the seatback rearward until seatback in place.
5. Push down on the rear of the
it is locked in place. seat cushion until it is locked 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
3. Slide the seat rearward by in place. make sure it is locked.
pushing on the seatback until 6. Push and pull on the seatback
it is locked into place.
Folding the Seatback
and seat cushion to make sure
they are locked in place. To fold the second row seatbacks:
7. Check that the safety belt is not 1. Remove anything on or under

under the seat cushion. the seat.
2. Place the armrest in the upright
position, and unfasten the
safety belt.
3. Pull forward on the reclining Third Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:
seatback strap (B) and push 1. Remove anything on or under
down on the seatback.
The head restraint will fold down
{ WARNING the seat.
automatically. Using the third row seating

To return the seatback to the position while the second row
seating position, lift the upper is folded, or pushed forward in
corner of the seatback and push the entry position, could cause
it rearward until it locks into place. injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Push and pull on the seatback to Be sure to return the seat to the
make sure it is locked. Pull up on passenger seating position. Push
the head restraint to return it to the and pull on the seat to make sure
upright, locked position. it is locked into place.
Adjusting the Seats
Folding the Seatback
To adjust the second row seats,
pull outward on the seat adjustment Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt
handle (A). Slide the seat forward the safety belts still fastened may mini-latch using a key in the
or rearward to the desired position. cause damage to the seat or the slot on the mini-buckle, and let
Release the handle, and push and safety belts. Always unbuckle the the belt retract into the headliner.
pull on the seat to make sure it is safety belts and return them to Stow the mini-latch in the holder
locked. their normal stowed position in the headliner.
before folding a rear seat.
Returning the Seat to the

Seating Position { WARNING
To return the seatback to the A safety belt that is improperly
seating position: routed, not properly attached,
1. From the rear of the vehicle, or twisted will not provide the
raise the seatback to the upright protection needed in a crash.
position using the pullstrap on The person wearing the belt could
the back of the third row seat, be seriously injured. After raising
or lift the seatback and push the rear seatback, always check
it into place from inside the to be sure that the safety belts
vehicle. are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
3. Pull up on the release lever on
the back of the seat. { WARNING
3. Reconnect the center safety belt
4. Push the seatback forward to If either seatback is not locked, it mini-latch to the mini-buckle.
lay flat. could move forward in a sudden Do not let it twist.
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there. 4. Pull on the safety belt to be sure
Always push and pull on the the mini-latch is secure.
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to

make sure it is locked in place.
Removing the Third Row Seats 5. Remove the seat by tilting it 2. Place the seat on the vehicle
slightly upward, and then pulling floor so that the front seat hooks
To remove a third row seat:
it out of the rear of the vehicle in are on the vehicle bars.
1. Remove the cargo one motion. 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to
management system,
6. Replace the bolts in the floor 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
if available and installed.
holes for storage. seat to make sure it is locked in
See Cargo Management
place.
System on page 4‑3. Installing the Third Row Seats
4. Raise the seatback to the
2. Remove anything on or under To reinstall a third row seat: upright position. Push and pull
the seat.
1. Before installing the seat on the seatback to make sure it
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the seatback must be folded is locked into place.
the safety belts still fastened may forward. See “Folding the 5. Reconnect the center safety belt
cause damage to the seat or the Seatback” earlier in this section. mini-latch to the mini-buckle.
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
The seats must be placed in Do not let it twist.
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position the proper locations to attach
before folding a rear seat. correctly. The wider seat must
be installed on the driver side
3. Fold the seatback down. and the narrower seat on the
See “Folding the Seatback” passenger side. Remove the
earlier in this section. bolts from the holes in the floor
4. Remove the rear bolts on the before installing the seats.
floor on each side of the seat.
Safety Belts { WARNING

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people a crash. If you do have a crash,
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that even
a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
properly. In a crash, if you or safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
your passenger(s) are not the vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
wearing safety belts, the injuries a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
can be much worse. You can hit sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
things inside the vehicle harder This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
or be ejected from the vehicle. reminder to buckle the safety belts.
You and your passenger(s) can See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
be seriously injured or killed. page 5‑15 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In the same crash, you might In most crashes buckling up does
not be, if you are buckled up. matter ... a lot!
Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down
vehicle, it could be the windshield... as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? This section is only for people of
after a crash if I am wearing a adult size.
safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
A: You could be — whether you one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
are wearing a safety belt or and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
not. But your chance of being hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
conscious during and after an not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in
accident, so you can unbuckle beyond your control, such the vehicle, see Older Children on
and get out, is much greater if as bad drivers. page 3‑48 or Infants and Young
you are belted. And you can Children on page 3‑51. Follow
unbuckle a safety belt, even if Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 mi) of home. those rules for everyone's
you are upside down. protection.
And the greatest number of
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why serious injuries and deaths It is very important for all occupants
should I have to wear safety occur at speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that
belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often
A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are
systems only; so they work wearing safety belts.
with safety belts — not instead
of them. Whether or not an
airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Occupants who are not buckled up worn low and snug on the hips, Q: What is wrong with this?
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a just touching the thighs. In a crash,
crash. And they can strike others in this applies force to the strong
the vehicle who are wearing safety pelvic bones and you would be
belts. less likely to slide under the lap
First, before you or your belt. If you slid under it, the belt
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, would apply force on your abdomen.
there is important information you This could cause serious or even
should know. fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash. A: The shoulder belt is too
loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep

your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap
too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your
injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause
snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose.

It will not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
the belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle the belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest.

buckle.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured
the belt goes over an armrest like if you wear the shoulder belt
this. The belt would be much too under your arm. In a crash,
high. In a crash, you can slide your body would move too far
under the belt. The belt force forward, which would increase the
would then be applied on the chance of head and neck injury.
abdomen, not on the pelvic Also, the belt would apply too
bones, and that could cause much force to the ribs, which are
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure not as strong as shoulder bones.
the belt goes under the armrests. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
A: The shoulder belt is worn under spleen. The shoulder belt should
the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across
the shoulder at all times. the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right
on the abdomen. That could
A: The belt is behind the body. cause serious or fatal injuries. A: The belt is twisted across
The shoulder belt should go the body.
over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
{ WARNING
All seating positions in the vehicle
You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt.
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
If you are using a rear seating
not have the full width of the belt
position with a detachable safety
to spread impact forces. If a belt belt and the safety belt is not
is twisted, make it straight so it attached, see “Returning the
can work properly, or ask your Seat to the Seating Position” under
dealer to fix it. Third Row Seats on page 3‑13
for instruction on reconnecting
the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it
properly. get twisted.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a 4. Pull up on the latch plate to

passenger belt is pulled out make sure it is secure. If the belt
all the way, the child restraint is not long enough, see Safety
locking feature may be engaged. Belt Extender on page 3‑31.
If this happens, let the belt go Position the release button on
back all the way and start again. the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjuster” later in this section 6. To make the lap part tight, pull
for instructions on use and up on the shoulder belt.
important safety information. It may be necessary to pull
the stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the
shoulder but not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to but
not contacting the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How To move it down, push down on
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on the release button (A) and move
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3‑19. the height adjuster to the desired
the latch plate up the safety belt position. You can move the height
webbing when the safety belt is not adjuster up by pushing up on the
in use. The latch plate should rest shoulder belt guide.
on the stitching on the safety belt, After the adjuster is set to the
near the guide loop on the side wall. desired position, try to move it down
Before a door is closed, be sure without pushing the release button
the safety belt is out of the way. to make sure it has locked into
If a door is slammed against a position.
safety belt, damage can occur to
both the safety belt and the vehicle.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort Here is how to install a comfort
Guides guide to the safety belt:
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder
occupants. Although the safety belt comfort guides. If not, they
belt pretensioners cannot be seen, are available through your dealer.
they are part of the safety belt The guides may provide added
assembly. They can help tighten safety belt comfort for older children
the safety belts during the early who have outgrown booster seats
stages of a moderate to severe and for some adults. When installed
frontal, near frontal, or rear crash and properly adjusted, the comfort
if the threshold conditions for guide positions the shoulder belt
pretensioner activation are met. away from the neck and head.
And, for vehicles with side impact
airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in Outboard Positions
a side crash or a rollover event.
1. For the outboard positions,
Pretensioners work only once. remove the guide from its
If the pretensioners activate in a storage clip on the interior body.
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for For the third row center position,
the vehicle's safety belt system. locate the comfort guide which
See Replacing Safety Belt System is located in a storage pocket,
Parts After a Crash on page 3‑32. at the top of the seat, under
the headrest on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
To access the comfort guide,

you will first need to move the
headrest forward by pulling on
the handle behind the seatback.
The comfort guide will now be
accessible.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is
and insert the two edges of the not twisted and it lies flat.
belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.
Third Row Center Position

Pull the comfort guide out of
its storage location and then
return the headrest to its upright
position.
To remove and store the comfort

{ WARNING guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
A safety belt that is not properly can be removed from the guide.
worn may not provide the Slide the guide into its storage
protection needed in a crash. location or on its storage clip.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder Safety Belt Use During
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts Pregnancy
of the body are best able to take Safety belts work for everyone,
belt restraining forces. including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
4. Buckle, position, and release be seriously injured if they do not
the safety belt as described wear safety belts.
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Safety Belt Extender Safety System Check

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten Now and then, check that the safety
around you, you should use it. belt reminder light, safety belts,
But if a safety belt is not long buckles, latch plates, retractors,
enough, your dealer will order you and anchorages are working
an extender. When you go in to properly. Look for any other loose
order it, take the heaviest coat you or damaged safety belt system parts
will wear, so the extender will be that might keep a safety belt system
long enough for you. To help avoid from doing its job. See your dealer
personal injury, do not let someone to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
else use it, and use it only for the safety belts may not protect you in
seat it is made to fit. The extender a crash. They can rip apart under
A pregnant woman should wear impact forces. If a belt is torn or
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. frayed, get a new one right away.
portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding, To wear it, attach it to the regular Make sure the safety belt reminder
throughout the pregnancy. safety belt. For more information, light is working. See Safety Belt
see the instruction sheet that Reminders on page 5‑15 for more
The best way to protect the fetus is comes with the extender. information.
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely Keep safety belts clean and dry.
that the fetus will not be hurt in a See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑32.
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. A crash can damage the safety replaced.
In a crash, they might not be able belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
to provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in
Have the safety belt pretensioners
a crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑15.
possible.
Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not
passenger. part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel wearing a safety belt — even if
. A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger. the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
airbag for the driver. are designed to work with safety
With seat-mounted side impact
. A seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
airbag for the right front Also, airbags are not designed to
appear on the side of the seatback
passenger. closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are the only
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver, With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an
passenger seated directly AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑36.
behind the driver, and the headliner or trim.
third row outboard passenger Wearing a safety belt during a
position. Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance
the protection provided by safety
. A roof-rail airbag for the right of hitting things inside the vehicle
belts. Even though today's airbags
front passenger, passenger or being ejected from it. Airbags
are also designed to help reduce
seated directly behind the the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to
right front passenger, and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in the
third row outboard passenger very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
position. properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol.
close to any airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt The system checks the airbag
of the seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system electrical system for malfunctions.
Safety belts help keep you in is designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
position before and during a children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
crash. Always wear a safety belt, protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑15
even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always for more information.
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in
while still maintaining control of the vehicle. To read how, see
the vehicle. Older Children on page 3‑48 or
Occupants should not lean on or Infants and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 3‑51.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown,

airbag is in the instrument panel on Passenger Side similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
When Should an Airbag

{ WARNING Inflate?
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed
occupant and an airbag, the to inflate in moderate to severe
airbag might not inflate properly frontal or near frontal crashes to
or it might force the object help reduce the potential for severe
into that person causing severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
injury or even death. The path front passenger's head and chest.
of an inflating airbag must be However, they are only designed
kept clear. Do not put anything to inflate if the impact exceeds
between an occupant and an a predetermined deployment
Driver Side shown, airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds
Passenger Side similar anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain
right front passenger, passengers the occupants.
behind the driver and right front Do not use seat accessories
passenger, and the third row that block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will
outboard passengers are in the seat-mounted side impact airbag. or should deploy is not based on
ceiling above the side windows. how fast the vehicle is traveling.
Never secure anything to the It depends largely on what you hit,
roof of a vehicle with roof-rail the direction of the impact, and how
airbags by routing a rope or tie quickly the vehicle slows down.
down through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Frontal airbags may inflate Thresholds can also vary with inflate in moderate to severe side
at different crash speeds. specific vehicle design. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
For example: Frontal airbags are not intended to airbags are intended to inflate
. If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear during a rollover or in a severe
object, the airbags could inflate impacts, or in many side impacts. frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
at a different crash speed than if impact and roof-rail airbags will
In addition, the vehicle has inflate if the crash severity is above
the vehicle hits a moving object. dual-stage frontal airbags. the system's designed threshold
. If the vehicle hits an object Dual-stage airbags adjust the level. The threshold level can vary
that deforms, the airbags could restraint according to crash with specific vehicle design.
inflate at a different crash speed severity. The vehicle has electronic
than if the vehicle hits an object frontal sensors, which help Seat-mounted side impact airbags
that does not deform. the sensing system distinguish are not intended to inflate in frontal
between a moderate frontal impact impacts, near frontal impacts,
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
(like a pole), the airbags could and a more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts, airbags are not intended to inflate in
inflate at a different crash speed rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
than if the vehicle hits a wide dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment. impact airbag is intended to deploy
object (like a wall). on the side of the vehicle that is
For more severe frontal impacts,
. If the vehicle goes into an object full deployment occurs. struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
at an angle, the airbags could deploy when either side of the
inflate at a different crash speed The vehicle has seat-mounted vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
than if the vehicle goes straight side impact and roof-rail airbags. system predicts that the vehicle is
into the object. See Airbag System on page 3‑33. about to roll over, or in a severe
Seat-mounted side impact and frontal impact.
roof-rail airbags are intended to
In any particular crash, no one What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of the
Inflate? Restrain?
damage to a vehicle or because In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
of what the repair costs were. system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted
For frontal airbags, inflation is triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering
determined by what the vehicle inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel.
hits, the angle of the impact, and airbag causing the bag to break out In moderate to severe side
how quickly the vehicle slows down. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, collisions, even belted occupants
For seat-mounted side impact and the airbag, and related hardware are can contact the inside of the
roof-rail airbags, deployment is all part of the airbag module. vehicle.
determined by the location and
Frontal airbag modules are located Airbags supplement the protection
severity of the side impact. In a
inside the steering wheel and provided by safety belts. Frontal
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
instrument panel. For vehicles with airbags distribute the force of
deployment is determined by
seat-mounted side impact airbags, the impact more evenly over the
the direction of the roll.
there are airbag modules in the side occupant's upper body, stopping
of the front seatbacks closest to the occupant more gradually.
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail Seat‐mounted side impact and
airbags, there are airbag modules in roof-rail airbags distribute the force
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the of the impact more evenly over
side windows that have occupant the occupant's upper body.
seating positions.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After

are designed to help contain the
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING
head and chest of occupants in
the outboard seating positions After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
in the first and second rows. seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust
The rollover capable roof-rail inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems
airbags are designed to help reduce quickly that some people may not for people with a history of
the risk of full or partial ejection in even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble.
rollover events, although no system Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the
can prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon
they deploy. Some components of as it is safe to do so. If you have
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot
because the occupant's motion several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an
is not toward those airbags. airbag modules, see What Makes airbag inflates, then get fresh air
See When Should an Airbag an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑38. by opening a window or a door.
Inflate? on page 3‑36 for more The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing
information. into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek
Airbags should never be regarded
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention.
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts. from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out automatically unlock the doors, turn
of the windshield or being able to on the interior lamps and hazard
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the
people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the In many crashes severe enough
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
interior lamps and hazard warning to inflate the airbag, windshields and diagnostic module which
flashers by using the controls for are broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
those features. Additional windshield breakage crash. See Vehicle Data
may also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑18 and Event Data
{ WARNING passenger airbag.
Recorders on page 13‑18.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some work on the airbag systems.
damaged important functions new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
in the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work
system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another service.
appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include
moderate crash, there may be airbag modules and possibly
concealed damage that could other parts. The service manual
make it difficult to safely operate for your vehicle covers the need
the vehicle. to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Passenger Sensing The words ON and OFF, or the The sensors are designed to detect
symbol for on and off, are visible the presence of a properly-seated
System during the system check. If you occupant and determine if the
The vehicle has a passenger are using remote start, if equipped, right front passenger frontal airbag
sensing system for the right front to start the vehicle from a distance, should be enabled (may inflate)
passenger position. The passenger you may not see the system or not.
airbag status indicator will be visible check. When the system check is According to accident statistics,
on the instrument panel when the complete, either the word ON or children are safer when properly
vehicle is started. OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will secured in a rear seat in the correct
be visible. See Passenger Airbag child restraint for their weight
Status Indicator on page 5‑16. and size.
The passenger sensing system We recommend that children
turns off the right front passenger be secured in a rear seat, including:
frontal airbag under certain an infant or a child riding in a
conditions. The driver airbag, rear-facing child restraint; a child
United States seat‐mounted side impact airbags riding in a forward-facing child seat;
and the roof-rail airbags are not an older child riding in a booster
affected by the passenger sensing seat; and children, who are large
system. enough, using safety belts.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
Canada and Mexico
A label on the sun visor says,

. A right front passenger takes
“Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) his/her weight off of the seat for
in the front.” This is because the risk a period of time.
to the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual . Or, if there is a critical problem
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the
with the airbag system or the
airbag is turned off.
passenger sensing system.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child When the passenger sensing
restraints in a rear seat, even if system has turned off the right front
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a passenger frontal airbag, the off
restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in indicator will light and stay lit to
injured or killed if the right the right front seat, always move remind you that the airbag is off.
front passenger airbag inflates. the front passenger seat as far See Passenger Airbag Status
This is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to Indicator on page 5‑16.
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating The passenger sensing system is
rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
child restraint can be seriously
The passenger sensing system is anytime the system senses that
injured or killed if the right front
designed to turn off the right front a person of adult size is sitting
passenger airbag inflates and the properly in the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
passenger seat is in a forward passenger seat.
. The right front passenger seat is
position.
unoccupied. When the passenger sensing
Even if the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
system has turned off the right
. The system determines that
be enabled, the on indicator will
front passenger frontal airbag, an infant is present in a child
light and stay lit to remind you
no system is fail-safe. No one can restraint.
that the airbag is active.
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
For some children, including If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is
sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed still lit, turn the vehicle off.
turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: Then slightly recline the vehicle
frontal airbag, depending upon 1. Turn the vehicle off. seatback and adjust the seat
the person’s seating posture cushion, if adjustable, to make
2. Remove the child restraint from
and body build. Everyone in the sure that the vehicle seatback
the vehicle.
vehicle who has outgrown child is not pushing the child restraint
restraints should wear a safety 3. Remove any additional items into the seat cushion.
belt properly — whether or not from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
there is an airbag for that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under
heaters, or seat massagers.
the vehicle head restraint.
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint If this happens, adjust the head
following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints
If the airbag readiness light ever provided by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to
that something may be wrong 6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
with the airbag system. To help Seat) on page 3‑65 or Securing The passenger sensing system
avoid injury to yourself or others, Child Restraints (Right Front may or may not turn off the
have the vehicle serviced right Passenger Seat) on page 3‑67. airbag for a child in a child
away. See Airbag Readiness restraint depending upon the
Light on page 5‑15 for more child’s seating posture and body
information, including important build. It is better to secure the
safety information. child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting
Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and System Operation
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
1. Turn the vehicle off. seat during vehicle maneuvers
2. Remove any additional material and braking, which helps the
from the seat, such as blankets, passenger sensing system maintain
cushions, seat covers, seat the passenger airbag status.
heaters, or seat massagers. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
3. Place the seatback in the fully additional information about the
upright position. importance of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material,
the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion,
cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such
If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. as seat covers, seat heaters, and
the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the seat massagers can affect how
the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for well the passenger sensing system
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit. you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑46 for more information
about modifications that can
affect how the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if Your dealer and the service manual
performance of the passenger an object, such as a briefcase, have information about servicing
sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or the vehicle and the airbag system.
. The passenger sensing system other electronic device, is put on To purchase a service manual,
may turn off the passenger an unoccupied seat. If this is not see Service Publications Ordering
airbag when liquid is soaked desired remove the object from Information on page 13‑15.
into the seat. If this happens, the seat.
the off indicator will be lit, and { WARNING
the airbag readiness light on the { WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the
instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the ignition is turned off and the
. Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the battery is disconnected, an airbag
has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and can still inflate during improper
more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the service. You can be injured if you
sensing system will enable (turn proper operation of the passenger are close to an airbag when it
on) the passenger airbag while a
sensing system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger They are probably part of the
airbag is turned on, the on airbag system. Be sure to follow
Servicing the proper service procedures, and
indicator will be lit.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle make sure the person performing
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry work for you is qualified to do so.
the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
readiness light is lit, do not install should be serviced. There are
a child restraint or allow anyone parts of the airbag system in
to occupy the seat. See Airbag several places around the vehicle.
Readiness Light on page 5‑15
for important safety information.
Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle has a If you have questions,
passenger sensing system call Customer Assistance.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for the right front passenger The phone numbers and
Q: Is there anything I might add position, which includes addresses for Customer
to or change about the vehicle sensors that are part of the Assistance are in Step Two
that could keep the airbags passenger seat. The passenger of the Customer Satisfaction
from working properly? sensing system may not operate Procedure in this manual.
properly if the original seat trim See Customer Satisfaction
A: Yes. If you add things that
is replaced with non-GM covers, Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on
change the vehicle's frame,
upholstery or trim, or with page 13‑1 or Customer
bumper system, height, front end
GM covers, upholstery or Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
or side sheet metal, they may
trim designed for a different on page 13‑3.
keep the airbag system from
vehicle. Any object, such as If the vehicle has rollover
working properly. Changing or
an aftermarket seat heater or roof-rail airbags, see Different
moving any parts of the front
a comfort enhancing pad or Size Tires and Wheels on
seats, safety belts, the airbag
device, installed under or on page 10‑56 for additional
sensing and diagnostic module,
top of the seat fabric, could important information.
steering wheel, instrument
also interfere with the operation
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
of the passenger sensing
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
system. This could either
trim, overhead console, front
prevent proper deployment
sensors, side impact sensors,
of the passenger airbag(s) or
or airbag wiring can affect the
prevent the passenger sensing
operation of the airbag system.
system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑41.
Q: Because I have a disability, In addition, the dealer and the Notice: If an airbag covering is
I have to get my vehicle service manual have information damaged, opened, or broken,
modified. How can I find out about the location of the airbag the airbag may not work properly.
whether this will affect my sensors, sensing and diagnostic Do not open or break the airbag
airbag system? module and airbag wiring. coverings. If there are any
A: If you have questions, opened or broken airbag covers,
call Customer Assistance. Airbag System Check have the airbag covering and/or
The phone numbers and airbag module replaced. For the
The airbag system does not need location of the airbag modules,
addresses for Customer regularly scheduled maintenance
Assistance are in Step Two see What Makes an Airbag
or replacement. Make sure the Inflate? on page 3‑38.
of the Customer Satisfaction airbag readiness light is working.
Procedure in this manual. See your dealer for service.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
See Customer Satisfaction page 5‑15 for more information.
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑1 or Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
on page 13‑3.
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need Child Restraints
to replace airbag system parts.
Parts After a Crash See your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly.
A damaged airbag system Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
may not work properly and
on page 5‑15 for more information.
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon Older children who have outgrown
as possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that

. Does the lap belt fit low and Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
come with the booster seat state the snug on the hips, touching the Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
weight and height limitations for that thighs? If yes, continue. If no, page 3‑25.
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
lap-shoulder belt until the child . Can proper safety belt fit be children and infants are safer
passes the fit test below: maintained for the length of the when properly restrained in a child
. Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, restraint system or infant restraint
Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating
edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to position.
return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? In a crash, children who are not
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a buckled up can strike other people
Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the who are buckled up, or can be
the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face properly.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” or neck. The lap belt should fit
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just
page 3‑25 for more information. touching the top of the thighs.
If the shoulder belt still does not This applies belt force to the
rest on the shoulder, then return child's pelvic bones in a crash.
to the booster seat. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. forward increasing the chance of
Never allow two children to wear head and neck injury. The child
the same safety belt. The safety might also slide under the lap
belt can not properly spread the belt. The belt force would then
impact forces. In a crash, the two be applied right on the abdomen.
children can be crushed together That could cause serious or fatal
and seriously injured. A safety injuries. The shoulder belt should
belt must be used by only one go over the shoulder and across
person at a time. the chest.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts

WARNING (Continued)
offer protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag infant will suddenly become a
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride arms. An infant should be
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the secured in an appropriate
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate restraint.
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt Never hold an infant or a child
is wrapped around their neck while riding in a vehicle. Due to
and the safety belt continues crash forces, an infant or a child
to tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. (Continued)
For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available.
Never do this. When purchasing a child
Children who are up against, restraint, be sure it is designed
or very close to, any airbag when to be used in a motor vehicle.
it inflates can be seriously injured If it is, the restraint will have a
or killed. Never put a rear-facing label saying that it meets federal
child restraint in the right front motor vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back special needs.
owner, are available in four
as it will go. basic types. Selection of a
particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the
child's weight, height, and age
but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible
with the motor vehicle in
which it will be used.
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, so small that the vehicle's regular
infants need complete support. safety belt may not remain low
This is because an infant's neck on the hip bones, as it should.
is not fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a
an infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of in this manual.
body with the harness. the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury,
child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers In some areas, Certified Child Where to Put the
for Children (LATCH System) on Passenger Safety Technicians
page 3‑57 for more information. (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Restraint
Children can be endangered in a and demonstrate how to correctly According to accident statistics,
crash if the child restraint is not use and install child restraints. children and infants are safer
properly secured in the vehicle. In the U.S., refer to the National when properly restrained in a child
When securing an add-on child Highway Traffic Safety restraint system or infant restraint
restraint, refer to the instructions Administration (NHTSA) website system secured in a rear seating
that come with the restraint which to locate the nearest child safety position.
may be on the restraint itself or in a seat inspection station. For CPST
We recommend that children and
booklet, or both, and to this manual. availability in Canada, check with
child restraints be secured in a rear
The child restraint instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial
seat, including: an infant or a child
are important, so if they are not Ministry of Transportation office.
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
available, obtain a replacement Securing the Child within the a child riding in a forward-facing
copy from the manufacturer. Child Restraint child seat; an older child riding in a
Keep in mind that an unsecured booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
{ WARNING
people in the vehicle. Be sure to A child can be seriously injured
properly secure any child restraint in or killed in a crash if the child
the vehicle — even when no child is is not properly secured in the
in it. child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
A label on the sun visor says, Child restraints and booster seats
“Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) vary considerably in size, and some
restraint in the front.” This is may fit in certain seating positions
because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not better than others. Always make
child is so great if the airbag deploy under some unusual sure the child restraint is properly
deploys. circumstance, even though secured.
it is turned off.
Depending on where you place the
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child child restraint and the size of the
restraints in a rear seat, even if child restraint you may not be able
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a to access adjacent safety belt
restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in assemblies or LATCH anchors
injured or killed if the right the right front seat, always move for additional passengers or
front passenger airbag inflates. the front passenger seat as far child restraints. Adjacent seating
This is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to positions should not be used if the
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a child restraint prevents access to
be very close to the inflating rear seat. or interferes with the routing of the
airbag. A child in a forward-facing safety belt.
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑41 for additional Wherever a child restraint is
injured or killed if the right front installed, be sure to secure the
passenger airbag inflates and the information.
child restraint properly.
passenger seat is in a forward
position. When securing a child restraint in Keep in mind that an unsecured
a rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
Even if the passenger sensing collision or sudden stop and injure
instructions that came with the
system has turned off the right people in the vehicle. Be sure to
child restraint to make sure it is
front passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
system is fail-safe. No one can the vehicle — even when no child is
(Continued) in it.
Lower Anchors and with a top tether, you must also Lower Anchors
use either the lower anchors or the
Tethers for Children safety belts to properly secure the
(LATCH System) child restraint. A child restraint must
The LATCH system holds a child never be attached using only the top
restraint during driving or in a crash. tether and anchor.
This system is designed to make In order to use the LATCH system
installation of a child restraint easier. in your vehicle, you need a
The LATCH system uses anchors in child restraint that has LATCH
the vehicle and attachments on the attachments. The child restraint
child restraint that are made for use manufacturer will provide you
with the LATCH system. with instructions on how to use the Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
child restraint and its attachments. built into the vehicle. There are
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
The following explains how to two lower anchors for each
child restraint is properly installed
attach a child restraint with these LATCH seating position that will
using the anchors, or use the
attachments in your vehicle. accommodate a child restraint
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
with lower attachments (B).
restraint, following the instructions Not all vehicle seating positions or
that came with that restraint, and child restraints have lower anchors
also the instructions in this manual. and attachments or top tether
When installing a child restraint anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether
a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built be attached. Be sure to read and
into the vehicle. The top tether follow the instructions for your child
attachment (B) on the child restraint Second Row — Bucket
restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
in the vehicle in order to reduce the positions with top tether anchors.
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
in a crash.
To assist you in locating the lower

anchors, each second row anchor
position has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating the top

tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover,
if equipped, or near the anchor.
The top tether anchors are located
at the bottom rear of the seatback
for each seating position in the Second Row — Bucket Shown, Second Row — Bucket Shown,
second row. Bench Similar Bench Similar
Some vehicles have top tether Some vehicles have exposed top
anchors with a cover. Open the tether anchors.
cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint

position without a top tether anchor Designed for the LATCH
if a national or local law requires System
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether { WARNING
must be attached. If a LATCH-type child restraint is
According to accident statistics, not attached to anchors, the child
children and infants are safer restraint will not be able to protect
when properly restrained in a child the child correctly. In a crash, the
restraint system or infant restraint child could be seriously injured
system secured in a rear seating or killed. Install a LATCH-type
Third Row position. See Where to Put the child restraint properly using the
The third row has one top tether Restraint on page 3‑55 for anchors, or use the vehicle safety
anchor located at the bottom rear of additional information. belts to secure the restraint,
the center seatback. This anchor following the instructions that
should be used for the center came with the child restraint and
seating position only. Never install the instructions in this manual.
two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
attachments or the desired

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
Do not attach more than one Pull the shoulder belt all the way restraint with the top tether and
child restraint to a single anchor. out of the retractor to set the lock, the safety belts. Refer to your
Attaching more than one child if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint manufacturer
restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. instructions and the instructions
cause the anchor or attachment in this manual.
to come loose or even break
Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1.1. Find the lower anchors
during a crash. A child or others
attachments rub against the for the desired seating
could be injured. To reduce the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may position.
risk of serious or fatal injuries
damage these parts. If necessary, 1.2. Recline the seatback to the
during a crash, attach only one
move buckled safety belts to full reclined position.
child restraint per anchor.
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments. Make sure the second
row bench seatbacks are
Do not fold the empty rear aligned at the same angle
{ WARNING seat with a safety belt buckled. before placing the child
This could damage the safety restraint on the seat. Make
Children can be seriously injured belt or the seat. Unbuckle and sure the third row bench
or strangled if a shoulder belt return the safety belt to its seatbacks are both upright
is wrapped around their neck stowed position, before folding before placing the child
and the safety belt continues to the seat. restraint on the seat.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
1. Attach and tighten the
belts behind the child restraint
lower attachments to the
so children cannot reach them. lower anchors. If the child
(Continued) restraint does not have lower
1.3. Put the child restraint on 2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the seat. the top tether according
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower to your child restraint
attachments on the child instructions and the
restraint to the lower following instructions:
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten If the position you are using
the top tether to the top tether does not have a headrest
anchor, if the vehicle has one. or head restraint and you
Refer to the child restraint are using a dual tether,
instructions and the following route the tether over the
steps: seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip
or head restraint and you
open the cover to expose
are using a single tether,
the anchor.
route the tether over the
seatback.
Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
If the position you are using If the position you are using not properly secure the child
has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or restraint, resulting in serious
head restraint and you head restraint and you are injury or even death in a crash.
are using a dual tether, using a single tether, route To help make sure the LATCH
route the tether around the the tether over the headrest system is working properly after
headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. a crash, see your dealer to have
3. Before placing a child in the the system inspected and any
child restraint, make sure it necessary replacements made
is securely held in place. as soon as possible.
To check, grasp the child
restraint at the LATCH path If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and attempt to move it side and it was being used during a
to side and back and forth. crash, new LATCH system parts
There should be no more than may be needed.
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement,
for proper installation. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in attached.
a rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be
child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure
compatible with this vehicle. the child restraint in this position.
If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions
system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint
System) on page 3‑57 for how and when and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
is secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, Put the Restraint on page 3‑55. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
for Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3‑57 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑57 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the shoulder belt can be tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
tightened but not pulled out and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
of the retractor. into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, To remove the child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
knee to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
The vehicle has airbags. A rear injured or killed if the right the airbag is off. If you secure a
seat is a safer place to secure front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in
a forward-facing child restraint. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
See Where to Put the Restraint on
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
page 3‑55.
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front
passenger frontal airbag under See Passenger Sensing System
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑41 for additional
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward
Sensing System on page 3‑41 and information.
position.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑16 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the
including important safety system has turned off the right LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
information. front passenger frontal airbag, and Tethers for Children (LATCH
A label on the sun visor says, no system is fail-safe. No one System) on page 3‑57 for how and
“Never put a rear-facing child seat can guarantee that an airbag will where to install the child restraint
in the front.” This is because the risk not deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint
to the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though it is is secured using a safety belt and
if the airbag deploys. turned off. it uses a top tether, see Lower
(Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑57
for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on

position without a top tether anchor the seat.
if a national or local law requires 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
that the top tether be anchored, the lap and shoulder portions of
or if the instructions that come with the vehicle's safety belt through
the child restraint say that the top or around the restraint. The child
strap must be anchored. restraint instructions will show
In Canada, the law requires that you how.
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
this position. Follow the instructions out of the retractor to set the
that came with the child restraint. lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
1. Move the seat as far back as not pulled out of the retractor.
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal 4. Push the latch plate into the
airbag, the off indicator on buckle until it clicks.
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay Position the release button on
lit when the vehicle is started. the buckle so that the safety belt
See Passenger Airbag Status could be quickly unbuckled if
Indicator on page 5‑16. necessary.
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been
tighten the lap portion of the belt, installed and the on indicator is lit,
and feed the shoulder belt back see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
into the retractor. When installing Child Restraint” under Passenger
a forward-facing child restraint, Sensing System on page 3‑41 for
it may be helpful to use your more information.
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of let it return to the stowed position.
the retractor to make sure
the retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments There are two cupholders, with
removable liners, located in front
Storage Compartments of the center console. There may be
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage cupholders located in the second
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 This vehicle has an instrument row seat armrest. To access,
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 panel storage area located above pull the armrest down. There are
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 the radio. To open the cover, press additional cupholders located on
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 the button. each side of the third row seat
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2 and in each door. There may be
This vehicle has an auxiliary input
Additional Storage Features jack. See Auxiliary Devices on cupholders located at the rear of
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 page 7‑37 for more information. the center console. To access,
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 pull the handle down.
Cargo Management Glove Box
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Armrest Storage
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Use the key to lock and unlock the Vehicles with a rear seat
Roof Rack System glove box. armrest, have two cupholders.
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Pull the armrest down from the
rear seatback to access the
cupholders.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Floor Console Storage
To access the upper storage area,

press the upper button (B) and lift
Pull up on the lever, located on the For vehicles with a second row up. To access the lower storage
front of the center console armrest, center console, open each area to area, press the lower button (C)
to slide it forward and backward. access the storage compartment and lift up. The top of the console
To open the armrest storage area, inside. can be folded forward for increased
press the button located on the front storage area. Lift up on handle on
of the armrest. There is additional the rear of the console (A) and pull
storage under the armrest. Move forward.
the armrest all the way to the rear
position, slide the cover back and
remove the tray.
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Cargo Tie Downs

{ WARNING
Never open more than one of the
Features Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle.
three latches at a time to help The tie-downs can be used to
avoid personal injury and damage
Cargo Cover secure small loads.
to the console. For vehicles with a cargo cover, it
can be used to cover items in the Cargo Management
rear of the vehicle. To install the
Notice: Slide the front console cover, place the loops on each
System
as far forward as it will go before corner of the cover on the four This vehicle has a cargo
folding the second row console hooks in the rear of the vehicle. management system located
forward to help prevent damage The cover should be stored in the rear.
to the consoles. securely when not in use.
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net
{ WARNING
For vehicles with a convenience
An improperly latched and closed net in the rear, use it to store small
cargo cover, or cargo cover left loads as far forward as possible.
in the open position, could be The net should not be used to store
thrown about the vehicle during heavy loads.
a crash or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured.
Be sure to return the cover to
the closed position and latch
before driving. If the cover is
removed, always store it outside
To remove the cargo management
of the vehicle. When it is
cover:
replaced, always be sure that
1. Open the cover. It remains open it is securely reattached.
when lifted.
2. Pull the cover up making sure to 3. Remove the cover from the
unhook the hinges at the rear of vehicle and store outside of
the cover. the vehicle.
Storage 4-5
Roof Rack System For vehicles with a roof rack, the fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack can be used to load items. rack will make the vehicle’s center
For roof racks that do not have of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
{ WARNING crossrails included, GM Certified sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
crossrails can be purchased as an braking or abrupt maneuvers,
If something is carried on top of accessory. See your dealer for otherwise it may result in loss of
the vehicle that is longer or wider additional information. control. If driving for a long distance,
than the roof rack— like paneling, on rough roads, or at high speeds,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than occasionally stop the vehicle to
can catch it while the vehicle is make sure the cargo remains in its
being driven. The item being 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may place. Do not exceed the maximum
carried could be violently torn off, vehicle capacity when loading the
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
and this could cause a collision, vehicle.
so that it rests evenly between
and damage the vehicle. Never the crossrails, making sure to For more information on vehicle
carry something longer or wider fasten cargo securely. capacity and loading, see Vehicle
than the roof rack on top of the Load Limits on page 9‑12.
vehicle unless using a GM To prevent damage or loss of cargo
certified accessory carrier. when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Information Displays
Driver Information Center
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-25
Driver Information Center
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15 (DIC) (Without DIC
Controls Passenger Airbag Status Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-33
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17
Malfunction Vehicle Messages
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake System Warning Battery Voltage and Charging
Rear Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Brake System Messages . . . . 5-38
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-38
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-22 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Cooling System
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-22
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Coolant Temperature Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Indicators Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-41
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Object Detection System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Ride Control System Controls Steering Wheel Controls

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43 Steering Wheel
Anti-Theft Alarm System Adjustment
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-45
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-46
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization
(With DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . 5-47 Vehicles with audio steering wheel
Universal Remote System controls could differ depending on
Universal Remote System . . . 5-55 To adjust the steering wheel: the vehicle's options. Some audio
Universal Remote System 1. Pull the lever (A) down. controls can be adjusted at the
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 steering wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up
Universal Remote System or down. w / c x (Next / Previous):
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 Press to select preset or favorite
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you. radio stations, select tracks on a
CD/DVD, or to select tracks and
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the navigate folders on an iPod® or
steering wheel in place. USB device.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
To select preset or favorite radio To select tracks on an iPod or USB To navigate folders on an iPod or
stations: device for vehicles with a navigation USB device for vehicles without a
system: navigation system:
. Press and release w or c x
to go to the next or previous 1. Press and hold w or c x 1. Press and hold w or c x
radio station stored as a preset while listening to a song listed while listening to a song until
or favorite. in the main audio page, to the contents of the current folder
To select tracks on a CD/DVD: quickly move forward or in display on the radio display.
reverse through the tracks.
Press and release w or c x to See the separate Navigation 2. Press and hold c x to go
go to the next or previous track. System manual for more back to the previous folder list.
information. 3. Press and release w or c x
To select tracks on an iPod or
USB device for vehicles without Track information is displayed to scroll up or down the list.
a navigation system: on the screen. Release w or . To select a folder, press
1. Press and hold w or c x
c x when the desired track and hold w, or press
is reached.
while listening to a song until ¨ when the folder is
the contents of the current folder 2. Press and release c x to highlighted.
display on the radio display. begin playing the track shown . To go back further in
in the display. the folder list, press
2. Press and release w or c x
to scroll up or down the list, then and hold c x.
press and hold w, or press ¨ to
play the highlighted track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or interact with those systems. Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
USB device for vehicles with a See Bluetooth on page 7‑50 and when navigating folders on an iPod
navigation system: the OnStar Owner's Guide for or USB device.
1. Go to the Music Navigator by more information.
For vehicles with a navigation
first touching the center touch c x (End): Press to reject an system:
screen folder button in the main incoming call, or end a current call.
audio page. 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep
SRCE (Source/Voice
2. While in Music Navigator, select Recognition): Press to switch is heard, to place the radio into
the folder/artist/genre/category, between the radio, CD, and for SCAN mode, a station will play
etc. using the touch screen. vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, for five seconds before moving
and rear auxiliary. to the next station.
3. Press and release c x to 2. To stop the SCAN function,
scroll through the selected music For vehicles with the navigation
system, press and hold this press ¨ again.
list. Touch the track label on the
touch screen to highlight and button for longer than one second 3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,
begin playing the track from to initiate voice recognition. press and hold to quickly move
that list. See “Voice Recognition” in the forward through the tracks.
Navigation System manual for Release to stop on the desired
4. Press and hold c x to quickly more information. track.
scroll through the selected ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the
music list next radio station while in AM, + e − e (Volume): Press to
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to FM, or XM™. increase or to decrease the volume.
silence the vehicle speakers only. For vehicles with or without a
Press again to turn the sound on. Horn
navigation system:
For vehicles with Bluetooth or Press near the horn symbols or
OnStar® systems, press and hold Press ¨ to go to the next track or press on the steering wheel pad
for longer than two seconds to chapter while sourced to the CD to sound the horn.
or DVD slot.
Windshield Wiper/Washer 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): J (Washer Fluid): Press the
is located on the left side of the Turn the band up for more frequent button at the end of the turn signal/
steering column. wipes or down for less frequent lane change lever, to spray washer
wipes. fluid on the windshield. The wipers
Turn the band with the wiper symbol clear the windshield and either
to control the windshield wipers. 1 : Slow wipes. stop or return to the preset speed.
2 : Fast wipes. The ignition key must be in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
for this to work. See Washer
blades before using them. If frozen
Fluid on page 10‑23.
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper { WARNING
Blade Replacement on page 10‑29.
In freezing weather, do not use
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the Heavy snow or ice can overload the the washer until the windshield
band to 8 and then release. wipers. A circuit breaker stops them is warmed. Otherwise the
until the motor cools. washer fluid can form ice on the
Several wipes, hold the band
on 8 longer. windshield, blocking your vision.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD

FLUID is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the
washer fluid is low. See Washer
Fluid Messages on page 5‑46.
Rear Window Compass Compass variance is the difference

between the earth's magnetic north
Wiper/Washer Your vehicle may have a compass and true geographic north. If the
The rear wiper and rear wash button in the Driver Information Center compass is not set to the zone
is located on the instrument panel (DIC). See Driver Information where you live, the compass may
below the climate control system. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on give false readings. The compass
page 5‑25 or Driver Information must be set to the variance zone
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) in which the vehicle is traveling.
rear wiper on and off. The wiper on page 5‑30 for more information
speed cannot be changed. about the DIC. To adjust for compass variance, use
the following procedure:
Y (Wash): Press to spray Compass Zone
washer fluid on the rear window. Compass Variance (Zone)
The window wiper will also come The zone is set to zone eight upon Procedure
on. Release the button when leaving the factory. Your dealer
will set the correct zone for your 1. Do not set the compass zone
enough fluid has been sprayed
location. when the vehicle is moving.
on the window. The rear wiper
Only set it when the vehicle
will run a few more cycles after Under certain circumstances, is in P (Park).
it is released. If the rear wiper such as during a long distance
function was already on, prior cross-country trip or moving to Press the vehicle information
to pressing the wash button, a new state or province, it will button until PRESS V TO
it stays on until the wiper button be necessary to compensate for CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
is pressed again. compass variance by resetting the displays.
The rear window washer uses the zone through the DIC if the zone
same fluid that is in the windshield is not set correctly.
washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑23.
4. Press the trip/fuel button If CAL should ever appear in the

until the vehicle heading, DIC display, the compass should be
for example, N for North, calibrated.
is displayed in the DIC. If the DIC display does not show a
5. If calibration is necessary, heading, for example, N for North,
calibrate the compass. or the heading does not change
See “Compass Calibration after making turns, there may be
Procedure” following. a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference
Compass Calibration may be caused by a magnetic CB
The compass can be manually or cell phone antenna mount, a
calibrated. Only calibrate the magnetic emergency light, magnetic
2. Find the vehicle's current compass in a magnetically clean note pad holder, or any other
location and variance zone and safe location, such as an magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
number on the map. open parking lot, where driving the move the magnetic item, then turn
vehicle in circles is not a danger. on the vehicle and calibrate the
Zones 1 through 15 are It is suggested to calibrate away compass.
available. from tall buildings, utility wires,
3. Press the set/reset button to manhole covers, or other industrial
scroll through and select the structures, if possible.
appropriate variance zone.
To calibrate the compass, use the 4. The DIC will display 3. Press the pushbutton located
following procedure: CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN under any one of the labels to
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle be changed.
Compass Calibration Procedure in tight circles at less than 4. To increase the time or date,
1. Before calibrating the compass, 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the do one of the following:
make sure the compass zone calibration. The DIC will display
is set to the variance zone in CALIBRATION COMPLETE . Press the pushbutton below
which the vehicle is located. for a few seconds when the the selected label.
See “Compass Variance (Zone) calibration is complete. The DIC
Procedure” earlier in this display will then return to the
. Press ¨ SEEK.
section. previous menu. . Press \ FWD.
Do not operate any switches
Clock . Turn f clockwise.
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc. To adjust the time and date: 5. To decrease the time or date, do
during the calibration procedure. one of the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to
2. Press the vehicle information ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, . Press © SEEK.
button until PRESS V TO then press O, to turn the
CALIBRATE COMPASS
. Press s REV.
radio on.
displays. . Turn f counter‐clockwise.
2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
3. Press the set/reset button to
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
start the compass calibration.
month, day, and year).
To change the time default setting Power Outlets Notice: Leaving electrical
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to equipment plugged in for an
change the date default setting from The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets extended period of time while
month/day/year to day/month/year: that can be used to plug in electrical the vehicle is off will drain the
equipment, such as a cell phone or battery. Always unplug electrical
1. Press G and then the MP3 player. equipment when not in use and
pushbutton located under the The power outlets are located on do not plug in equipment that
forward arrow that displays on the instrument panel below the exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
the radio screen until the time climate controls, at the rear of the rating.
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), center console, and in the rear
and the date MM/DD (month Certain accessory plugs may not
cargo area. Lift the cover to access be compatible with the accessory
and day) and DD/MM (day the outlet and replace when not
and month) displays. power outlet and could overload
in use. vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
2. Press the pushbutton located problem is experienced, see your
under the desired option. { WARNING dealer.
3. Press G again to apply the Power is always supplied to the
selected default, or let the outlets. Do not leave electrical
screen time out.
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
When adding electrical equipment, Power Outlet 110 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns
be sure to follow the proper Alternative Current on to show it is in use. The light
installation instructions included comes on when the ignition is in
with the equipment. See Add-On The vehicle may have a power ON/RUN and equipment requiring
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑56. outlet that can be used to plug in less than 150 watts is plugged into
electrical equipment that uses a the outlet, and no system fault is
Notice: Hanging heavy maximum limit of 150 watts.
equipment from the power detected.
outlet can cause damage not If equipment is connected using
covered by the vehicle warranty. more than 150 watts or a system
The power outlets are designed fault is detected, a protection circuit
for accessory power plugs only, shuts off the power supply and the
such as cell phone charge cords. indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug
it back in or turn the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑21. The power restarts
when equipment using 150 watts
or less is plugged into the outlet
The power outlet is located on the and a system fault is not detected.
rear of the center console.
The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
and may not work properly, if the could be a problem with a vehicle
following are plugged in: Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
. Equipment with high Indicators problem with the vehicle.
initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
and electric power tools. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
. Other equipment requiring to cause an expensive repair or
an extremely stable shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to check the section that explains what
power supply such as: the warning lights and gauges
microcomputer-controlled to do. Follow this manual's advice.
could prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc. Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
See High Voltage Devices and function. Some warning lights come
Wiring on page 10‑31. on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Fuel Gauge Center (DIC). For more information

see Fuel System Messages on
The speedometer shows the page 5‑41.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per Here are some situations that may
hour (mph). occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
Odometer fuel gauge.
Metric English . At the gas station, the fuel pump
The odometer shows how far the
When the ignition is on, the fuel shuts off before the gauge
vehicle has been driven, in either
gauge shows how much fuel is reads full.
kilometers or miles.
left in the tank. . It takes a little more or less fuel
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
An arrow in the fuel gauge indicates to fill up than the fuel gauge
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
the side of the vehicle the fuel door indicated. For example, the
new odometer installed, the new
is on. gauge may have indicated the
one is set to the mileage of the old
tank was half full, but it actually
odometer. If this is not possible, it is The gauge will first indicate empty took a little more or less than
set at zero and a label is put on the before the vehicle is out of fuel, half the tank's capacity to fill
driver door to show the old mileage the vehicle's fuel tank should be the tank.
reading. filled soon. . The gauge goes back to empty
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, when the ignition is turned off.
Tachometer the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
The tachometer displays the appear on the Driver Information
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone

may occur when a large number of
Temperature Gauge electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
Metric English When the engine is not running, but message will appear in the Driver
the ignition is turned on, this gauge Information Center (DIC) and/or
This gauge shows the engine shows the battery's state of charge the charging system light comes on.
coolant temperature. Under normal in DC volts. See Battery Voltage and Charging
driving conditions the gauge will Messages on page 5‑37 for more
read approximately 100 °C (210°F) When the engine is running, this information.
or less. If the gauge pointer is gauge shows the condition of the
charging system. The vehicle's However, readings in either warning
near 125 °C (260°F), the engine zone may indicate a possible
is too hot. charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of charge of the problem in the electrical system.
It means that the engine coolant battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. Have the vehicle serviced as soon
has overheated. If the vehicle has This is normal. Readings between as possible.
been operating under normal driving the low and high warning zones
conditions, pull off the road, stop the indicate the normal operating range.
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt If the passenger safety belt is
Reminder Light buckled, neither the chime nor the
Driver Safety Belt Reminder light comes on.
Light The front passenger safety belt
The driver safety belt reminder light warning light and chime may turn
on the instrument panel cluster. on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the
When the engine is started this light warning light and or chime, remove
and the chime come on and stay on the object from the seat or buckle
for several seconds to remind the the safety belt.
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
When the engine is started this light The light also begins to flash. Airbag Readiness Light
and the chime come on and stay This only occurs if the passenger This light shows if there is an
on for several seconds to remind airbag is enabled. See Passenger electrical problem with the airbag
the driver to fasten the safety belt. Sensing System on page 3‑41 for system. The system check
The light also begins to flash. more information. includes the airbag sensor, the
This cycle repeats if the driver This cycle repeats if the passenger pretensioners, the airbag modules,
remains unbuckled and the vehicle remains unbuckled and the vehicle the wiring and the crash sensing
is moving. is moving. and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
If the driver safety belt is already see Airbag System on page 3‑33.
buckled, neither the light nor chime
comes on.
Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the

passenger airbag status indicator
Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
The vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds
sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using
Sensing System on page 3‑41 remote start to start the vehicle from
The airbag readiness light comes for important safety information. a distance, if equipped, you may not
on and stay on for several seconds The instrument panel has a see the system check. Then, after
when the vehicle is started. passenger airbag status indicator. several more seconds, the status
Then the light turns off. indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
{ WARNING passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light stays If the word ON or the on symbol is
on after the vehicle is started or lit on the passenger airbag status
comes on while driving, it means United States indicator, it means that the right
the airbag system might not be front passenger frontal airbag is
working properly. The airbags in enabled (may inflate).
the vehicle might not inflate in a If the word OFF or the off symbol
crash, or they could even inflate is lit on the passenger airbag
without a crash. To help avoid status indicator, it means that the
injury, have the vehicle serviced passenger sensing system has
right away. turned off the right front passenger
Canada and Mexico frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light system. Have it checked by your
indicator lights remain on, or if there dealer. Driving while this light is on
are no lights at all, there may be could drain the battery.
a problem with the lights or the When this light comes on, the
passenger sensing system. Driver Information Center (DIC) also
See your dealer for service. displays the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM message.
{ WARNING See Vehicle Messages on
If the airbag readiness light ever The charging system light comes page 5‑37 for more information.
on briefly when the ignition is turned
comes on and stays on, it means If a short distance must be driven
on, but the engine is not running, as
that something may be wrong with the light on, be sure to turn off
a check to show the light is working.
with the airbag system. To help It should go out when the engine is all accessories, such as the radio
avoid injury to yourself or others, started. and air conditioner.
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness If the light stays on, or comes
Light on page 5‑15 for more on while driving, there may be a
information, including important problem with the electrical charging
safety information.
Malfunction If the malfunction indicator lamp Notice: Modifications made

comes on and stays on while the to the engine, transmission,
Indicator Lamp engine is running, this indicates that exhaust, intake, or fuel system
A computer system called OBD II there is an OBD II problem and of the vehicle or the replacement
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second service is required. of the original tires with other
Generation) monitors operation Malfunctions often are indicated by than those of the same Tire
of the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC)
control systems. It ensures that apparent. Being aware of the light can affect the vehicle's emission
emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this
for the life of the vehicle, helping to to the vehicle. This system assists light to come on. Modifications
produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly to these systems could lead to
diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to
continually driven with this light pass a required Emission
on, after a while, the emission Inspection/Maintenance
controls might not work as well, test. See Accessories and
the vehicle fuel economy might Modifications on page 10‑3.
not be as good, and the engine
This light should come on when the might not run as smoothly. This light comes on during a
ignition is on, but the engine is not This could lead to costly repairs malfunction in one of two ways:
running, as a check to show it is that might not be covered by Light Flashing: A misfire condition
working. If it does not, have the the vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire
vehicle serviced by your dealer. increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to The following may correct an

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle
the vehicle: emissions system malfunction: with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
. Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is efficiently as designed and can
. Avoid hard accelerations. fully installed. See Filling cause: stalling after start-up,
the Tank on page 9‑44. stalling when the vehicle is
. Avoid steep uphill grades. The diagnostic system can changed into gear, misfiring,
. If towing a trailer, reduce the determine if the fuel cap has hesitation on acceleration,
amount of cargo being hauled been left off or improperly or stumbling on acceleration.
as soon as it is possible. installed. A loose or missing fuel These conditions might go away
cap allows fuel to evaporate into once the engine is warmed up.
If the light continues to flash, when the atmosphere. A few driving
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. trips with the cap properly If one or more of these
Find a safe place to park the installed should turn the light off. conditions occurs, change the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at fuel brand used. It will require
least 10 seconds, and restart the
. Make sure the electrical system at least one full tank of the
engine. If the light is still flashing, is not wet. The system could proper fuel to turn the light off.
follow the previous steps and see be wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of See Recommended Fuel on
your dealer for service as soon as
water. The condition is usually page 9‑42.
possible.
corrected when the electrical If none of the above have made
Light On Steady: An emission system dries out. A few driving the light turn off, your dealer can
control system malfunction has trips should turn the light off. check the vehicle. The dealer
been detected on the vehicle.
has the proper test equipment
Diagnosis and service might be
and diagnostic tools to fix any
required.
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs inspection if:
Light
Some state/provincial and . The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if The vehicle brake system
local governments may have consists of two hydraulic circuits.
programs to inspect the on-vehicle the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN If one circuit is not working, the
emission control equipment. remaining circuit can still work to
For the inspection, the emission while the engine is off.
stop the vehicle. For normal braking
system test equipment is connected . The critical emission control performance, both circuits need to
to the vehicle’s Data Link systems have not been be working.
Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if If the warning light comes on, there
the battery has recently been is a brake problem. Have the brake
replaced or if the battery has system inspected right away.
run down. The diagnostic
system evaluates critical
emission control systems
during normal driving. This can
The DLC is under the instrument take several days of routine
panel to the left of the steering driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not Metric English
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed. pass the inspection, your dealer
This light should come on briefly
can prepare the vehicle for
when the ignition key is turned to
inspection.
ON/RUN. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
This light may also come on due Antilock Brake System

to low brake fluid. See Brakes on { WARNING (ABS) Warning Light
The brake system might not be
When the ignition is on, the brake working properly if the brake
system warning light will also come system warning light is on.
on when the parking brake is set. Driving with the brake system
The light will stay on if the parking warning light on can lead to a
brake does not release fully. If it crash. If the light is still on after
stays on after the parking brake is
the vehicle has been pulled off
fully released, it means there is a
the road and carefully stopped, The ABS warning light comes on
brake problem.
have the vehicle towed for briefly when the ignition key is
If the light comes on while driving, service. turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
pull off the road and stop carefully. If the light does not come on then,
Make sure the parking brake is fully have it fixed so it will be ready to
released. The pedal may be harder warn you if there is a problem.
to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to If the light stays on, turn the ignition
stop. If the light is still on, have to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes
the vehicle towed for service. See on while driving, stop as soon as
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑87. possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant
the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
Light Temperature Warning
vehicle needs service. If the regular Light
brake system warning light is not
on, there are still brakes, but no
antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on,
there are no antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning This light comes on briefly while
Light on page 5‑20. starting the engine. If it does not, The engine coolant temperature
have the vehicle serviced by your warning light comes on briefly when
Tow/Haul Mode Light dealer. If the system is working the engine is started.
normally the indicator light goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle
If it stays on, or comes on while serviced by your dealer. If the
driving, there could be a problem system is working normally, the
with the StabiliTrak system and the indicator light then goes off.
vehicle might need service. When
this warning light is on, the system If the light comes on and stays on
is off and will not limit wheel spin. while driving, the vehicle may have
This light comes on when the a problem with the cooling system.
This light flashes when the Stop the vehicle and turn off the
Tow/Haul mode has been activated. StabiliTrak system is active. engine to avoid damage to the
For more information, see Tow/Haul See StabiliTrak® System on engine. A warning chime sounds
Mode on page 9‑28. page 9‑31 for more information. when this light is on.
See Engine Overheating on
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
Then is On Steady maintenance can damage the
This indicates that there may engine. The repairs would not be
be a problem with the TPMS. covered by the vehicle warranty.
The light flashes for about a Always follow the maintenance
minute and stays on steady for schedule for changing engine oil.
the remainder of the ignition cycle.
This sequence repeats with every
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light Monitor Operation on page 10‑48
comes on briefly when the engine for more information.
is started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS. Engine Oil Pressure Light
The oil pressure light should come
When the Light is On Steady on briefly as the engine is started.
This indicates that one or more
{ WARNING If it does not come on have the
of the tires are significantly Do not keep driving if the oil vehicle serviced by your dealer.
underinflated. pressure is low. The engine can If the light comes on and stays on, it
A tire pressure message can become so hot that it catches fire. means that oil is not flowing through
accompany the light. See Tire Someone could be burned. Check the engine properly. The vehicle
Messages on page 5‑44 for more the oil as soon as possible and could be low on oil and might have
information. Stop as soon as have the vehicle serviced. some other system problem.
possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑45
Security Light See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Cruise Control Light

Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Front Fog Lamp Light
This light flashes when the security This light comes on whenever the
system is activated. cruise control is set.
For more information, see Anti-Theft The light goes out when the cruise
Alarm System on page 2‑13. control is turned off. See Cruise
The fog lamp light comes on when
Control on page 9‑33 for more
the fog lamps are in use.
High-Beam On Light information.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑4 for more
information.
The high-beam on light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
Information Displays The outside air temperature and

compass, if equipped, also display
DIC Buttons
on the DIC when viewing the trip

Driver Information Center and fuel information. The outside
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) air temperature automatically
appears in the top right corner
If your vehicle has DIC buttons,
of the DIC display. If there is a
the information below explains the
problem with the system that
operation of this system.
controls the temperature display, The buttons are the set/reset,
The DIC displays information the numbers will be replaced with customization, vehicle information,
about your vehicle. It also displays dashes. If this occurs, have the and trip/fuel buttons. The button
warning messages if a system vehicle serviced. The compass will functions are detailed in the
problem is detected. be shown in the bottom right corner following pages.
All messages will appear in the DIC of the DIC display. See Compass on
display located at the top of the page 5‑6 for more information. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to
instrument panel cluster. The DIC has different displays turn off or acknowledge messages
The DIC comes on when the ignition which can be accessed by pressing on the DIC.
is on. After a short delay, the DIC the DIC buttons located on the
will display the information that was instrument panel. U (Customization): Press
this button to customize the
last displayed before the engine The DIC also allows some features feature settings on your vehicle.
was turned off. to be customized. See Vehicle See Vehicle Personalization (With
The DIC also displays a shift lever Personalization (With DIC Buttons) DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47 for more
position indicator on the bottom on page 5‑47 for more information. information.
line of the display. See Automatic If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you
Transmission on page 9‑25 for more can also use the trip odometer reset
information. stem to view the odometer and trip
odometers.
T (Vehicle Information): Press will alert you to change the oil on PARK ASSIST
this button to display the oil life, a schedule consistent with your If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
park assist on vehicles with this driving conditions. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
feature, units, tire pressure readings When the remaining oil life is low, press the vehicle information button
on vehicles with this feature, and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON until PARK ASSIST displays.
compass calibration and zone message will appear on the display. This display allows the system
setting on vehicles with this feature. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” to be turned on or off. Once in this
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this under Engine Oil Messages on display, press the set/reset button to
button to display the odometer, trip page 5‑40. You should change the select between ON or OFF. If you
odometers, fuel range, average oil as soon as you can. See Engine choose ON, the system will be
economy, timer, fuel used, and Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the turned on. If you choose OFF, the
average speed. engine oil life system monitoring the system will be turned off. The URPA
oil life, additional maintenance is system automatically turns back on
Vehicle Information Menu recommended in the Maintenance after each vehicle start. When the
Items Schedule in this manual. See URPA system is turned off and the
T (Vehicle Information): Press Scheduled Maintenance on vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
this button to scroll through the page 11‑2 for more information. DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
following menu items: Remember, you must reset the OFF message as a reminder that
OIL LIFE display yourself after each the system has been turned off.
OIL LIFE oil change. It will not reset itself. See Object Detection System
Press the vehicle information Also, be careful not to reset the Messages on page 5‑42 and
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING OIL LIFE display accidentally at any Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
displays. This display shows an time other than when the oil has just page 9‑35 for more information.
estimate of the oil's remaining been changed. It cannot be reset
useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE accurately until the next oil change.
REMAINING on the display, that To reset the engine oil life system,
means 99% of the current oil life see Engine Oil Life System on
remains. The engine oil life system page 10‑11.
UNITS If a low tire pressure condition Blank Display

Press the vehicle information button is detected by the system while This display shows no information.
until UNITS displays. This display driving, a message advising you
allows you to select between Metric add air to a specific tire will appear Trip/Fuel Menu Items
in the display. See Tire Pressure on
or English units of measurement.
page 10‑45 and Tire Messages on
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
Once in this display, press the to scroll through the following menu
set/reset button to select between page 5‑44 for more information.
items:
METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of If the tire pressure display shows
the vehicle information will then dashes instead of a value, there ODOMETER
be displayed in the unit of may be a problem with your vehicle. Press the trip/fuel button until
measurement selected. If this consistently occurs, see your ODOMETER displays. This display
dealer for service. shows the distance the vehicle has
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
been driven in either kilometers (km)
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure COMPASS ZONE SETTING
or miles (mi). Pressing the trip
Monitor System (TPMS), the This display will be available odometer reset stem will also
pressure for each tire can be if the vehicle has a compass. display the odometer.
viewed in the DIC. The tire See Compass on page 5‑6 for
To switch between English and
pressure will be shown in either more information.
metric measurements, see “UNITS”
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
COMPASS RECALIBRATION earlier in this section.
square inch (psi). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC This display will be available
displays FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) if the vehicle has a compass.
LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the See Compass on page 5‑6 for
vehicle information button again more information.
until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##.
TRIP A and TRIP B To use the retroactive reset feature, RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button until press and hold the set/reset button Press the trip/fuel button until
TRIP A or TRIP B displays. for at least four seconds. The trip RANGE displays. This display
This display shows the current odometer will display the number of shows the approximate number
distance traveled in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven of remaining kilometers (km) or
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since since the ignition was last turned miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven
the last reset for each trip odometer. on and the vehicle was moving. without refueling. The display will
Both trip odometers can be used at Once the vehicle begins moving, show LOW if the fuel level is low.
the same time. Pressing the trip the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle The fuel range estimate is based
odometer reset stem will also on an average of the vehicle's fuel
display the trip odometers. was driven 8 km (5 miles) before
it is started again, and then the economy over recent driving history
Each trip odometer can be reset retroactive reset feature is activated, and the amount of fuel remaining
to zero separately by pressing the the display will show 8 km (5 miles). in the fuel tank. This estimate will
set/reset button or the trip odometer As the vehicle begins moving, the change if driving conditions change.
reset stem while the desired trip display will then increase to 8.2 km For example, if driving in traffic and
odometer is displayed. (5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. making frequent stops, this display
The trip odometer has a feature may read one number, but if the
If the retroactive reset feature is vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
called retroactive reset. This can activated after the vehicle is started,
be used to set the trip odometer to number may change even though
but before it begins moving, the the same amount of fuel is in the
the number of kilometers (miles) display will show the number of
driven since the ignition was last fuel tank. This is because different
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that driving conditions produce different
turned on. This can be used if the were driven during the last ignition
trip odometer is not reset at the fuel economies. Generally, freeway
cycle. driving produces better fuel
beginning of the trip.
economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
AVG (Average) ECONOMY Time will continue to be counted as AVG (Average) SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until long as the ignition is on, even if Press the trip/fuel button
AVG ECONOMY displays. another display is being shown until AVG SPEED displays.
This display shows the approximate on the DIC. The timer will record This display shows the average
average liters per 100 kilometers up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and speed of the vehicle in kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which per hour (km/h) or miles per
(mpg). This number is calculated the display will return to zero. hour (mph). This average is
based on the number of L/100 km To stop the timer, press the set/reset calculated based on the various
(mpg) recorded since the last time button briefly while TIMER is vehicle speeds recorded since the
this menu item was reset. To reset displayed. last reset of this value. To reset
AVG ECONOMY, press and hold To reset the timer to zero, press the value to zero, press and hold
the set/reset button. and hold the set/reset button while the set/reset button.
TIMER TIMER is displayed. Blank Display
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED This display shows no information.
TIMER displays. This display can Press the trip/fuel button until
be used as a timer. FUEL USED displays. This display
To start the timer, press the shows the number of liters (L) or
set/reset button while TIMER is gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
displayed. The display will show last reset of this menu item. To reset
the amount of time that has passed the fuel used information, press
since the timer was last reset, not and hold the set/reset button while
including time the ignition is off. FUEL USED is displayed.
Driver Information If your vehicle does not have TRIP A or TRIP B

DIC buttons, you can use the trip
Center (DIC) (Without odometer reset stem to view the
Press the trip odometer reset stem
DIC Buttons) until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This
following displays: odometer, trip display shows the current distance
If your vehicle does not have DIC odometers, oil life, park assist menu traveled in either kilometers (km)
buttons, the information below for vehicles with the Ultrasonic or miles (mi) since the last reset
explains the operation of this Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, for each trip odometer. Both trip
system. units, and display language. odometers can be used at the
The DIC has different displays If your vehicle has DIC buttons, same time.
which can be accessed by pressing you can use the trip odometer reset Each trip odometer can be reset
the trip odometer reset stem stem to view the following displays: to zero separately by pressing and
located on the instrument panel odometer and trip odometers. holding the trip odometer reset stem
cluster. Pressing the trip odometer Trip Odometer Reset Stem while the desired trip odometer is
reset stem will also turn off, Menu Items displayed.
or acknowledge, DIC messages.
The trip odometer has a feature
ODOMETER
The DIC displays trip and vehicle called the retroactive reset. This can
system information, and warning Press the trip odometer reset be used to set the trip odometer to
messages if a system problem is stem until ODOMETER displays. the number of kilometers (miles)
detected. This display shows the distance the driven since the ignition was last
vehicle has been driven in either turned on. This can be used if the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). trip odometer is not reset at the
To switch between English and beginning of the trip.
metric measurements, see “UNITS”
later in this section.
To use the retroactive reset feature, OIL LIFE oil as soon as you can. See Engine
press and hold the trip odometer To access this display, the vehicle Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
reset stem for at least four seconds. must be in P (Park). Press the engine oil life system monitoring
The trip odometer will display trip odometer reset stem until the oil life, additional maintenance
the number of kilometers (km) OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. is recommended in the Maintenance
or miles (mi) driven since the This display shows an estimate of Schedule in this manual.
ignition was last turned on and the oil's remaining useful life. If you See Scheduled Maintenance on
the vehicle was moving. Once the see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on page 11‑2 for more information.
vehicle begins moving, the trip the display, that means 99% of the Remember, you must reset the
odometer will accumulate mileage. current oil life remains. The engine OIL LIFE display yourself after each
For example, if the vehicle was oil life system will alert you to oil change. It will not reset itself.
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it change the oil on a schedule Also, be careful not to reset the
is started again, and then the consistent with your driving OIL LIFE display accidentally at any
retroactive reset feature is activated, conditions. time other than when the oil has just
the display will show 8 km (5 miles). been changed. It cannot be reset
As the vehicle begins moving, the When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON accurately until the next oil change.
display will then increase to 8.2 km To reset the engine oil life system,
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” see Engine Oil Life System on
If the retroactive reset feature is under Engine Oil Messages on page 10‑11.
activated after the vehicle is started, page 5‑40. You should change the
but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that
were driven during the last ignition
cycle.
PARK ASSIST UNITS DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehicle To access this display, the vehicle To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the trip must be in P (Park). This display
has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking odometer reset stem until UNITS allows you to select the language
Assist (URPA) system, press the displays. This display allows you to in which the DIC messages will
trip odometer reset stem until PARK select between Metric or English appear. To select a language:
ASSIST displays. This display units of measurement. Once in this 1. Press the trip odometer reset
allows the system to be turned on or display, press and hold the trip stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE
off. Once in this display, press and odometer reset stem to select displays.
hold the trip odometer reset stem to between METRIC or ENGLISH
select between ON or OFF. If you units. All of the vehicle information 2. Continue to press and hold the
choose ON, the system will be will then be displayed in the unit of trip odometer reset stem to scroll
turned on. If you choose OFF, the measurement selected. through all of the available
system will be turned off. The URPA languages.
system automatically turns back on The available languages are
after each vehicle start. When the ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
URPA system is turned off and the (French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the and NO CHANGE.
DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
OFF message as a reminder that 3. Once the desired language
the system has been turned off. is displayed, release the trip
See Object Detection System odometer reset stem to set
Messages on page 5‑42 and your choice.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
Head-Up Display (HUD) information or CD track. It will also

display turn-by-turn navigation
information if the vehicle has a
{ WARNING navigation radio. The images are
If the HUD image is too bright or projected by the HUD lens located
on the driver's side of the instrument
too high in your field of view, it
panel.
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is The tap shift gear will also appear
dark outside. Be sure to keep the on the HUD if the vehicle has tap
HUD image dim and placed low in shift and it is active.
your field of view. The HUD information can be
displayed in one of three languages,
HUD Display on the Vehicle
For vehicles with the Head-Up English, French, or Spanish.
The speedometer reading and other Windshield
Display (HUD), some information
concerning the operation of the numerical values can be displayed The HUD information appears as an
vehicle is projected onto the in either English or metric units. image focused out toward the front
windshield. This includes the The language selection and the of the vehicle.
speedometer reading, RPM reading, units of measurement are changed When the ignition key is turned to
transmission position, outside air through the trip computer in the ON/RUN, the HUD will display an
temperature, the tap shift gear, Driver Information Center (DIC). introductory message for a short
and a brief display of the current See Vehicle Personalization (With time, until the HUD is ready.
radio station, including XM DIC Buttons) on page 5‑47.
The following indicator lights come or CD track number will display To adjust the HUD image so that
on the instrument panel when for a short period of time after items are properly displayed, do the
activated and also appear on the radio or CD track status following:
the HUD: changes. This happens whenever 1. Adjust the driver's seat to a
. Turn Signal Indicators radio information is changed. comfortable position.
The speedometer size is reduced
. High-Beam Indicator Symbol when radio, CD information, 2. Start the engine.
The HUD temporarily displays warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation 3. Adjust the HUD controls.
CHECK GAGES and ICE information are displayed on
the HUD. Use the following settings to adjust
POSSIBLE when these messages the HUD.
are on the DIC trip computer.
9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate the
The HUD also displays the following dimming knob fully counterclockwise
messages on vehicles with these until the HUD display turns off.
systems, when they are active:
Brightness : Turn the knob
. TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE on the HUD control clockwise or
. STABILITRAK ACTIVE counterclockwise to brighten or
Notice: If you try to use the dim the display.
HUD image as a parking aid, you w (Up) : x (Down) : Press the up
may misjudge the distance and or down arrows to center the HUD
damage your vehicle. Do not use image in your view. The HUD image
the HUD image as a parking aid. can only be adjusted up and down,
When the HUD is on, the not side to side.
The HUD control is located to the
speedometer reading is continually right of the steering wheel.
displayed. The current radio station
? (Page) : Press this button to

select the display formats. Release
the page button when the format
number with the desired display is
shown on the HUD.
The three formats are as follows:
English English
English
Metric Metric
Format Two: This display includes Format Three: This display
the information in Format One includes all the information in
without the transmission information Format One along with a circular
and the outside air temperature. tachometer, but without outside
air temperature.
Metric
Format One: This display gives the
speedometer reading (in English or
metric units), turn signal indication,
high beam indication, transmission
positions, and the outside air
temperature.
All formats will show the Care of the HUD

. Is the HUD image adjusted to
turn-by-turn navigation information the proper height?
Clean the inside of the windshield
and provide details about the . Are you wearing polarized
as needed to remove any dirt or film
next driving maneuver to be made. sunglasses?
that could reduce the sharpness or
When you near your destination,
clarity of the HUD image. . Still no HUD image? Check the
the HUD will display a distance
bar that will fill in the closer you get To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, fuse in the instrument panel fuse
to your destination. All navigation clean cloth that has household glass block. See Instrument Panel
information is provided to the HUD cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the Fuse Block on page 10‑35.
by the navigation radio, if the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
vehicle has one. spray cleaner directly on the lens
because the cleaner could leak
. Is the HUD image too bright?
The HUD image displayed on the
into the unit. . Are the windshield and HUD
windshield will automatically dim
and brighten to compensate for lens clean?
If You Cannot See the HUD
outside lighting. Image When the Ignition Is On If the HUD image is not correct,
The HUD image can temporarily .
contact your dealer.
Is anything covering the
light up depending on the angle HUD lens? Keep in mind that the windshield is
and position of the sunlight on the part of the HUD system.
HUD display. This is normal and
. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
will change when the angle of enough?
the sunlight on the HUD display
changes.
Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
Vehicle Messages cleared. You should take any

messages that appear on the
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery
Messages are displayed on the DIC display seriously and remember to recharge.
to notify the driver that the status of that clearing the messages will The normal battery voltage range is
the vehicle has changed and that only make the messages disappear, 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
some action may be needed by not correct the problem.
the driver to correct the condition. SERVICE BATTERY
The following are the possible
Multiple messages may appear CHARGING SYSTEM
messages that can be displayed
one after another.
and some information about them. On some vehicles, this message
Some messages may not require displays if there is a problem
immediate action, but you can Battery Voltage and with the battery charging system.
press any of the DIC buttons Under certain conditions, the
on the instrument panel or the
Charging Messages
charging system light may also turn
trip odometer reset stem on BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE on in the instrument panel cluster.
the instrument panel cluster to See Charging System Light on
acknowledge that you received This message displays when the
system detects that the battery page 5‑17. Driving with this problem
the messages and to clear them could drain the battery. Turn off all
from the display. voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system unnecessary accessories. Have the
Some messages cannot be cleared starts reducing certain features of electrical system checked as soon
from the DIC display because they the vehicle that you may be able as possible. See your dealer.
are more urgent. These messages to notice. At the point that the
require action before they can be features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery.
Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is
This message displays along with This message displays and a not fully closed and the vehicle is
the brake system warning light if chime sounds if the driver door is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
there is a problem with the brake not fully closed and the vehicle is off the vehicle, check the door for
system. See Brake System Warning shifted out of P (Park). Stop and obstructions, and close the door
Light on page 5‑20. If this message turn off the vehicle, check the door again. Check to see if the message
appears, stop as soon as possible for obstructions, and close the door still appears on the DIC.
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the again. Check to see if the message
vehicle and check for the message still appears on the DIC. LIFTGATE OPEN
on the DIC display. If the message This message displays and a chime
is still displayed or appears again HOOD OPEN
sounds if the liftgate is open while
when you begin driving, the brake On some models, this message the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
system needs service as soon as displays and a chime sounds if the the vehicle and check the liftgate.
possible. See your dealer. hood is not fully closed. Stop and Restart the vehicle and check for
turn off the vehicle, check the hood the message on the DIC display.
Cruise Control Messages for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message
CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC.
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑33 for more
information.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE

This message displays and a chime Messages ENGINE
sounds if the passenger door is Notice: If you drive the vehicle
not fully closed and the vehicle is ENGINE HOT A/C while the engine is overheating,
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn (Air Conditioning) OFF severe engine damage may
off the vehicle, check the door for This message displays when the occur. If an overheat warning
obstructions, and close the door engine coolant becomes hotter than appears on the instrument panel
again. Check to see if the message the normal operating temperature. cluster and/or DIC, stop the
still appears on the DIC. See Engine Coolant Temperature vehicle as soon as possible.
Gauge on page 5‑14. To avoid Do not increase the engine
POWER LIFTGATE OFF speed above normal idling speed.
added strain on a hot engine,
This message displays when the the air conditioning compressor See Engine Overheating on
power liftgate has been turned off automatically turns off. When page 10‑19 for more information.
by pressing the power liftgate button the coolant temperature returns This message displays when the
on the center console. to normal, the air conditioning engine coolant temperature is too
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN compressor turns back on. hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
You can continue to drive idle until it cools down. See Engine
This message displays and a chime your vehicle. Coolant Temperature Gauge on
sounds if the passenger side rear page 5‑14.
If this message continues to appear,
door is not fully closed and the
have the system repaired by your See Overheated Engine Protection
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
dealer as soon as possible to avoid Operating Mode on page 10‑22 for
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
damage to the engine. information on driving to a safe
the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the place in an emergency.
message still appears on the DIC.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, This message displays when the while the engine oil pressure
severe engine damage may engine oil needs to be changed. is low, severe engine damage
occur. If an overheat warning When you change the engine oil, may occur. If a low oil pressure
appears on the instrument panel be sure to reset the CHANGE warning appears on the
cluster and/or DIC, stop the ENGINE OIL SOON message. instrument panel cluster and/or
vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Oil Life System on DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
Do not increase the engine speed page 10‑11 for information on how as possible. Do not drive the
above normal idling speed. to reset the message. See Engine vehicle until the cause of the
See Engine Overheating on Oil on page 10‑8 and Scheduled low oil pressure is corrected.
page 10‑19 for more information. Maintenance on page 11‑2 for See Engine Oil on page 10‑8
more information. for more information.
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the This message displays if low oil
engine cooling system reaches pressure levels occur. Stop the
unsafe temperatures for operation. vehicle as soon as safely possible
Stop and turn off the vehicle as and do not operate it until the cause
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid of the low oil pressure has been
severe damage. This message corrected. Check the oil as soon
clears when the engine has cooled as possible and have your vehicle
to a safe operating temperature. serviced by your dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8.
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a This message displays and a REMOTE KEY
chime sounds when the cooling chime sounds if the fuel level is This message displays if a Remote
system temperature gets too hot low. Refuel as soon as possible. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and the engine further enters the See Fuel Gauge on page 5‑13 battery is low. The battery needs
engine coolant protection mode. and Fuel on page 9‑42 for more to be replaced in the transmitter.
See Engine Overheating on information. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 10‑19 for further information. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
TIGHTEN GAS CAP System Operation on page 2‑3.
This message also displays when
the vehicle's engine power is This message may display along
reduced. Reduced engine power with the check engine light on Lamp Messages
can affect the vehicle's ability the instrument panel cluster if the
to accelerate. If this message vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened AUTOMATIC LIGHT
is on, but there is no reduction properly. See Malfunction Indicator CONTROL OFF
in performance, proceed to your Lamp on page 5‑18. Reinstall the This message displays when the
destination. The performance fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank automatic headlamps are turned
may be reduced the next time on page 9‑44. The diagnostic off. This message clears itself after
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle system can determine if the fuel 10 seconds.
may be driven at a reduced speed cap has been left off or improperly
while this message is on, but installed. A loose or missing fuel AUTOMATIC LIGHT
acceleration and speed may be cap allows fuel to evaporate into the CONTROL ON
reduced. Anytime this message atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should This message displays when the
stays on, the vehicle should be automatic headlamps are turned
taken to your dealer for service turn this light and message off.
on. This message clears itself after
as soon as possible. 10 seconds.
TURN SIGNAL ON PARK ASSIST OFF Ride Control System

This message displays and a chime If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Messages
sounds if a turn signal is left on for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turn after the vehicle has been started SERVICE STABILITRAK
signal/multifunction lever to the off and shifted out of P (Park), this This message displays if there
position. message displays to remind the is a problem with the StabiliTrak®
driver that the URPA system has system. If this message appears, try
Object Detection System been turned off or to notify the to reset the system. Stop; turn off
driver that the system has turned the engine for at least 15 seconds;
Messages itself off. Press the set/reset button then start the engine again. If this
PARK ASST (Assist) or the trip odometer reset stem message still comes on, it means
BLOCKED SEE OWNERS to acknowledge this message there is a problem. See your dealer
MANUAL and clear it from the DIC display. for service. The vehicle is safe to
For more information see Ultrasonic drive, however, you do not have the
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑35. benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, your speed and drive accordingly.
this message displays if there is SERVICE PARK ASSIST
something interfering with the park If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
assist system. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Parking Assist on page 9‑35 for this message displays if there is
more information. a problem with the URPA system.
Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
See your dealer for service.
SERVICE TRACTION Airbag System Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED

CONTROL This message displays if the
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there content theft-deterrent system has
is a problem with the Traction This message displays if there is a detected a break-in attempt while
Control System (TCS). When this problem with the airbag system. you were away from your vehicle.
message is displayed, the system Have your dealer inspect the See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your system for problems. See Airbag page 2‑13 for more information.
driving accordingly. See your dealer Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and
for service. See StabiliTrak® System Airbag System on page 3‑33 for Service Vehicle Messages
on page 9‑31 for more information. more information.
SERVICE A/C
TRACTION CONTROL OFF Anti-Theft Alarm System (Air Conditioning)
This message displays when the Messages SYSTEM
Traction Control System (TCS) This message displays when the
is turned off. Adjust your driving SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT electronic sensors that control
accordingly. See StabiliTrak® SYSTEM the air conditioning and heating
System on page 9‑31 for more This message displays when there systems are no longer working.
information. This message clears is a problem with the theft-deterrent Have the climate control system
itself after 10 seconds. system. The vehicle may or may not serviced by your dealer if you
TRACTION CONTROL ON restart so you may want to take the notice a drop in heating and air
vehicle to your dealer before turning conditioning efficiency.
This message displays when the off the engine. See Immobilizer
Traction Control System (TCS) is Operation on page 2‑15 for more
turned on. See StabiliTrak® System information.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
SERVICE POWER STEERING STARTING DISABLED The low tire pressure warning
SERVICE THROTTLE light will also come on. See Tire
This message displays when
Pressure Light on page 5‑23.
a problem is detected with the This message displays when your
power steering system. When this vehicle's throttle system is not If a tire pressure message appears
message is displayed, you may functioning properly. Have your on the DIC, stop as soon as you
notice that the effort required to vehicle serviced by your dealer. can. Inflate the tires by adding air
steer the vehicle increases or feels until the tire pressure is equal to the
heavier, but you will still be able to Tire Messages values shown on the Tire Loading
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle Information label. See Tires on
serviced by your dealer immediately. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE page 10‑38, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
page 10‑45.
Monitor System (TPMS), this
This message displays when a message displays when the You can receive more than one
non-emissions related malfunction pressure in one or more of the tire pressure message at a time.
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced vehicle's tires is low. To read the other messages that
by your dealer as soon as possible. may have been sent at the same
This message also displays
time, press the set/reset button
LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT
or the trip odometer reset stem.
(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),
The DIC also shows the tire
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
pressure values. See Driver
the location of the low tire.
Information Center (DIC) (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑25 or
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE The AWD system is disabled until
SYSTEM the compact spare tire is replaced
This message displays when the
by a full-size tire. If the warning
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor System
message is still on after putting on
Monitor System (TPMS), this (TPMS) is re-learning the tire
the full-size tire, you need to reset
message displays if a part on the positions on your vehicle. The tire
the warning message. To reset the
TPMS is not working properly. positions must be re-learned after
warning message, turn the ignition
The tire pressure light also flashes rotating the tires or after replacing a
off and then back on again after
and then remains on during the tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
30 seconds. If the message stays
same ignition cycle. See Tire page 10‑52, Tire Pressure Monitor
on, see your dealer right away.
Pressure Light on page 5‑23. System on page 10‑47, and Tire
See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑28
Several conditions may cause Pressure on page 10‑45 for more
this message to appear. See Tire information.
Pressure Monitor Operation on SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
page 10‑48 for more information. Transmission Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
If the warning comes on and stays
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF Drive (AWD) system, this message
on, there may be a problem with
displays if there is a problem
the TPMS. See your dealer. If your vehicle has the All-Wheel with this system. If this message
Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible
displays when there is a compact and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
spare tire on the vehicle, when vehicle after 30 seconds and check
the Antilock Brake System (ABS) for the message on the DIC display.
warning light comes on, or when the If the message is still displayed or
rear differential fluid is overheating. appears again when you begin
This message turns off when the driving, the AWD system needs
differential fluid cools. service. See your dealer.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages
sounds if the transmission fluid in
This message displays when there SPEED LIMITED TO
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer for service.
transmission fluid temperature high XXX MPH (KM/H)
can cause damage to the vehicle.
This message displays when
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
your vehicle speed is limited to
ENGINE allow the transmission to cool.
128 km/h (80 mph) because the
This message clears when the fluid
Notice: If you drive the vehicle vehicle detects a problem in the
temperature reaches a safe level.
while the transmission fluid is speed variable assist steering
overheating and the transmission system. Have your vehicle serviced
temperature warning is displayed
Vehicle Reminder by your dealer.
on the instrument panel cluster Messages
and/or DIC, you can damage the
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
Washer Fluid Messages
transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
covered by the warranty. Do not This message displays when FLUID
drive the vehicle with overheated the outside air temperature is This message displays when the
transmission fluid or while the cold enough to create icy road windshield washer fluid is low.
transmission temperature conditions. Adjust your driving Fill the windshield washer fluid
warning is displayed. accordingly. reservoir as soon as possible.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location
of the windshield washer fluid
reservoir. Also, see Washer
Fluid on page 10‑23 for more
information.
Vehicle The customization preferences are Feature Settings Menu Items

automatically recalled.
Personalization The following are customization
To change customization features that allow you to program
preferences, use the following settings to the vehicle:
Vehicle Personalization procedure.
(With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
Entering the Feature This feature will only display if a
Your vehicle may have Settings Menu language other than English has
customization capabilities
1. Turn the ignition on and place been set. This feature allows you to
that allow you to program certain
the vehicle in P (Park). change the language in which the
features to one preferred setting.
DIC messages appear to English.
Customization features can only To avoid excessive drain on the
be programmed to one setting battery, it is recommended that Press the customization button until
on the vehicle and cannot be the headlamps are turned off. the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
programmed to a preferred ENGLISH screen appears on the
2. Press the customization
setting for two different drivers. DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to enter the feature
All of the customization options may settings menu. button once to display all DIC
not be available on your vehicle. messages in English.
If the menu is not available,
Only the options available will be
FEATURE SETTINGS
displayed on the DIC.
AVAILABLE IN PARK will
The default settings for the display. Before entering the
customization features were set menu, make sure the vehicle
when your vehicle left the factory, is in P (Park).
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select made to this feature. The current AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
the language in which the DIC setting will remain. DIC display. Press the set/reset
messages will appear. To select a setting, press the button once to access the settings
set/reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the
Press the customization button until customization button to scroll
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
appears on the DIC display. Press You can also change the language
the set/reset button once to access by pressing the trip odometer reset SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
the settings for this feature. Then stem. See “Language” under Driver The doors will automatically lock
press the customization button to Information Center (Without DIC when the vehicle is shifted out of
scroll through the following settings: Buttons) earlier in this section for P (Park).
ENGLISH (default): All messages more information. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
will appear in English. will automatically lock when the
AUTO DOOR LOCK vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
FRANCAIS: All messages will This feature allows you to select (8 mph) for three seconds.
appear in French. when the vehicle's doors will NO CHANGE: No change will be
ESPANOL: All messages will automatically lock. See Automatic made to this feature. The current
appear in Spanish. Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more setting will remain.
information.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
whether or not to turn off the out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
It also allows you to select which doors will unlock when the vehicle is for this feature. Then press the
doors and when the doors will shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll
automatically unlock. See Automatic through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
information. setting will remain. when you press the lock button on
Press the customization button until the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on set/reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock
button once to access the settings button on the RKE transmitter.
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock
through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: None of the doors will when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
automatically unlock. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE
driver's door will unlock when the feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound
key is taken out of the ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed
are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Entry (RKE) System Operation on
driver's door will unlock when the previous command.
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button DELAY DOOR LOCK
made to this feature. The current until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select
setting will remain. appears on the DIC display. Press whether or not the locking of the
To select a setting, press the the set/reset button once to access vehicle's doors and liftgate will be
set/reset button while the desired the settings for this feature. Then delayed. When locking the doors
setting is displayed on the DIC. press the customization button to and liftgate with the power door
scroll through the following settings: lock switch and a door or the liftgate
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps is open, this feature will delay
This feature allows you to select the will not flash when you press locking the doors and liftgate until
type of feedback you will receive the unlock button on the RKE five seconds after the last door is
when unlocking the vehicle with transmitter. closed. You will hear three chimes
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior to signal that the delayed locking
transmitter. You will not receive lamps will flash when you press feature is in use. The key must be
feedback when unlocking the the unlock button on the RKE out of the ignition for this feature to
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if transmitter. work. You can temporarily override
the doors are open. See Remote delayed locking by pressing the
Keyless Entry (RKE) System NO CHANGE: No change will be power door lock switch twice or the
Operation on page 2‑3 for more made to this feature. The current lock button on the RKE transmitter
information. setting will remain. twice. See Delayed Locking on
To select a setting, press the page 2‑8 for more information.
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until Press the customization button APPROACH LIGHTING
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on until EXIT LIGHTING appears on This feature allows you to select
the DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset whether or not to have the exterior
button once to access the settings button once to access the settings lights turn on briefly during low
for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the light periods after unlocking the
customization button to scroll customization button to scroll vehicle using the Remote Keyless
through the following settings: through the following settings: Entry (RKE) transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for button once to access the settings
door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds. for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. through the following settings:
setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will OFF: The exterior lights will not
To select a setting, press the stay on for two minutes. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
set/reset button while the desired with the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current ON (default): If it is dark enough
setting will remain. outside, the exterior lights will turn
EXIT LIGHTING on briefly when you unlock the
This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
the amount of time you want set/reset button while the desired
the exterior lamps to remain on setting is displayed on the DIC.
when it is dark enough outside.
This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
The lights will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be for this feature. Then press the
20 seconds or until the lock button set to a loud level. customization button to scroll
on the RKE transmitter is pressed, NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings:
or the vehicle is no longer off. made to this feature. The current OFF (default): Neither outside
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain. mirror will be tilted down when the
System Operation on page 2‑3 for vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
more information. There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's
NO CHANGE : No change will be at the last known setting. outside mirror will be tilted down
made to this feature. The current when the vehicle is shifted into
setting will remain. To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired R (Reverse).
To select a setting, press the setting is displayed on the DIC. PASSENGER MIRROR: The
set/reset button while the desired passenger's outside mirror will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. PARK TILT MIRRORS tilted down when the vehicle is
CHIME VOLUME If your vehicle has this feature, shifted into R (Reverse).
it allows you to select whether BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and
This feature allows you to select the or not the outside mirror(s) will
volume level of the chime. passenger's outside mirrors will be
automatically tilt down when the tilted down when the vehicle is
Press the customization button until vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). shifted into R (Reverse).
CHIME VOLUME appears on the See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑18
DIC display. Press the set/reset for more information. NO CHANGE: No change will be
button once to access the settings made to this feature. The current
Press the customization button until setting will remain.
for this feature. Then press the PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the
through the following settings: button once to access the settings set/reset button while the desired
NORMAL: The chime volume will setting is displayed on the DIC.
be set to a normal level.
EASY EXIT SEAT ignition. If the automatic movement Press the customization button
If your vehicle has this feature, it has already occurred, and you put until MEMORY SEAT RECALL
allows you to select your preference the key back in the ignition and appears on the DIC display. Press
for the automatic easy exit seat remove it again, the seat and the set/reset button once to access
feature. See Delayed Locking on steering column will stay in the the settings for this feature. Then
page 2‑8 for more information. original exit position, unless a press the customization button to
memory recall took place prior scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until to removing the key again.
EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the OFF (default): No remote memory
DIC display. Press the set/reset NO CHANGE: No change will be seat recall will occur.
button once to access the settings made to this feature. The current ON: The driver's seat and outside
for this feature. Then press the setting will remain. mirrors will automatically move to
customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the the stored driving position when
through the following settings: set/reset button while the desired the unlock button on the Remote
OFF (default): No automatic seat setting is displayed on the DIC. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
exit recall will occur. pressed.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
ON: The driver's seat will move NO CHANGE: No change will be
If your vehicle has this feature, it made to this feature. The current
back when the key is removed from allows you to select your preference
the ignition. setting will remain.
for the remote memory seat recall
The automatic easy exit seat feature. See Delayed Locking on To select a setting, press the
movement will only occur one time page 2‑8 for more information. set/reset button while the desired
after the key is removed from the setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START NO CHANGE: No change will be DO NOT RESTORE: The

If your vehicle has this feature, it made to this feature. The current customization features will not be
allows you to turn the remote start setting will remain. set to their factory default settings.
off or on. The remote start feature To select a setting, press the To select a setting, press the
allows you to start the engine from set/reset button while the desired set/reset button while the desired
outside of the vehicle using the setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
Start on page 2‑5 for more This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the
information. the customization features back to feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until their factory default settings. Press the customization button
REMOTE START appears on the Press the customization button until until FEATURE SETTINGS
DIC display. Press the set/reset FACTORY SETTINGS appears on PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the
button once to access the settings the DIC display. Press the set/reset DIC display. Press the set/reset
for this feature. Then press the button once to access the settings button once to exit the menu.
customization button to scroll for this feature. Then press the
through the following settings: customization button to scroll If you do not exit, pressing the
through the following settings: customization button again will
OFF: The remote start feature will return you to the beginning of
be disabled. RESTORE ALL (default): The the feature settings menu.
ON (default): The remote start customization features will be set
feature will be enabled. to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Home
Settings Menu Remote with any garage door
System opener that does not have the stop
The feature settings menu will be and reverse feature. This includes
exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on
any garage door opener model
occurs: page 13‑20 for information
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
. The vehicle is shifted out of Communications Commission Read the instructions completely
P (Park). (FCC) rules and Industry Canada before attempting to program
. The vehicle is no longer in Standards RSS-210/220/310. the Universal Home Remote.
ON/RUN. Because of the steps involved,
. The trip/fuel or vehicle Universal Remote System it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you with
information DIC buttons are Programming programming the Universal Home
pressed.
Remote.
. The end of the feature settings
Keep the original hand-held
menu is reached and exited.
transmitter for use in other vehicles
. A 40 second time period has as well as for future Universal Home
elapsed with no selection made. Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
This system provides a way to Universal Home Remote buttons
replace up to three remote control should be erased for security
transmitters used to activate purposes. See “Erasing Universal
devices such as garage door Home Remote Buttons” later in
openers, security systems, and this section.
home automation devices.
When programming a garage door, Programming a garage door opener indicator light begins to flash,
park outside of the garage. Park involves time-sensitive actions, so after 20 seconds. This step will
directly in line with and facing the read the entire procedure before erase the factory settings or all
garage door opener motor-head starting. Otherwise, the device will previously programmed buttons.
or gate motor-head. Be sure that time out and the procedure will have Do not hold down the buttons for
people and objects are clear of the to be repeated. longer than 30 seconds and do
garage door or gate that is being To program up to three devices: not repeat this step to program
programmed. the remaining two Universal
It is recommended that a new Home Remote buttons.
battery be installed in your 2. Hold the end of your hand-held
hand-held transmitter for quicker transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
and more accurate transmission (1 to 3 inches) away from the
of the radio-frequency signal. Universal Home Remote buttons
Programming the Universal while keeping the indicator
Home Remote System 1. From inside the vehicle, light in view. The hand-held
press and hold down the two transmitter was supplied by the
For questions or help programming outside buttons at the same manufacturer of your garage
the Universal Home Remote door opener receiver (motor
time, releasing only when
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 the Universal Home Remote head unit).
or go to www.homelink.com.
3. At the same time, press and 5. Press and hold the newly-trained
hold both the Universal Home Universal Home Remote button
Remote button to be used to and observe the indicator light.
control the garage door and the . If the indicator light
hand-held transmitter button. stays on continuously, the
Do not release the Universal programming is complete
Home Remote button or the and the garage door should
hand-held transmitter button move when the Universal
until Step 4 has been completed. Home Remote button is
Some entry gates and garage pressed and released. 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
door openers may require There is no need to been completed, locate inside
substitution of Step 3 with continue programming the garage the garage door
the procedure noted in Steps 6 through 8. opener receiver (motor-head
“Gate Operator and Canadian unit). Locate the “Learn” or
. If the Universal Home “Smart” button. The name and
Programming” later in this Remote indicator
section. color of the button may vary by
light blinks rapidly for manufacturer.
4. The indicator light on the two seconds and then
Universal Home Remote will turns to a constant 7. Firmly press and release the
flash slowly at first and then light, continue with the “Learn” or “Smart” button. After
rapidly after Universal Home programming Steps 6 you press this button, you will
Remote successfully receives through 8. have 30 seconds to complete
the frequency signal from the Step 8.
It may be helpful to have
hand-held transmitter. Release another person assist with
both buttons. the remaining steps.
8. Immediately return to the To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are
vehicle. Firmly press and hold Universal Home Remote buttons, having difficulty programming a
the Universal Home Remote begin with Step 2 of “Programming gate operator or garage door
button, selected in Step 3 to the Universal Home Remote opener by using the “Programming
control the garage door, for System.” Do not repeat Step 1, Universal Home Remote”
two seconds, and then release as this will erase all previous procedures, regardless of where
it. If the garage door does programming from the Universal you live, replace Step 3 under
not move, press and hold the Home Remote buttons. “Programming Universal Home
same button a second time Remote” with the following:
for two seconds, and then Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming Continue to press and hold the
release it. Again, if the door Universal Home Remote button
does not move, press and hold If you have questions or need while you press and release
the same button a third time for help programming the Universal every two seconds (cycle) the
two seconds, and then release. Home Remote System, call hand-held transmitter button
The Universal Home Remote 1-800-355-3515 or go to until the frequency signal has
should now activate the www.homelink.com. been successfully accepted
garage door. Canadian radio-frequency laws by the Universal Home Remote.
require transmitter signals to time The Universal Home Remote
out or quit after several seconds indicator light will flash slowly
of transmission. This may not be at first and then rapidly. Proceed
long enough for Universal Home with Step 4 under “Programming
Remote to pick up the signal during Universal Home Remote” to
programming. Similarly, some U.S. complete the training procedure.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single

the Universal Remote device: Universal Remote Button
Operation
To reprogram any of the three
Using Universal Remote Universal Remote buttons, repeat
Press and hold the appropriate the programming instructions earlier
Universal Remote button for at least in this section, beginning with
half of a second. The indicator light Step 2.
will come on while the signal is For help or information on the
being transmitted. Universal Home Remote System,
1. Press and hold down the call the customer assistance phone
Erasing Universal Remote two outside buttons until the
Buttons number under Customer Assistance
indicator light begins to flash, Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
All programmed buttons should be after 20 seconds. page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
erased when the vehicle is sold or 2. Release both buttons. Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑6.
the lease ends.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Turn and Lane-Change Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
The exterior lamps control is located

on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
6-2 Lighting
It controls the following systems: ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the Headlamp

. Headlamps parking lamps on together with the High/Low-Beam
following:
. Taillamps Changer
. Taillamps
. Parking Lamps 2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐Beam
.
. License Plate Lamps Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights change lever away from you to turn
. Instrument Panel Lights the high beams on.
5 (Headlamps): Turns the
. Fog Lamps headlamps on together with the Pull the lever toward you to return to
The exterior lamps control has following lamps listed below. low beams.
four positions: A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position the ignition switch is off and
to turn the automatic light control off
the headlamps are on.
or on again.
. Parking Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at . Taillamps
normal brightness, together with . License Plate Lamps This indicator light turns on in the
the following: instrument panel cluster when the
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Parking Lamps high‐beam headlamps are on.
# (Fog Lamps): Turns on the fog
. Taillamps lamps (if equipped).
. License Plate Lamps See Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
. Instrument Panel Lights
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system makes either darkness of the surroundings.

the low-beam headlamps come The other lamps that come on with
This feature is used to signal to on at a reduced brightness or the headlamps will also come on.
the vehicle ahead that you want the DRL lights, for vehicles with
to pass. When it is bright enough outside,
High Intensity Discharge (HID) the headlamps will go off and the
If the headlamps are off or in headlamps when the following DRL will come on.
the low‐beam position, pull the conditions are met:
turn signal lever toward you to The regular headlamp system
. The ignition is in the ON/RUN should be turned on when needed.
momentarily switch to high‐beams. position.
Release the lever to turn the Do not cover the light sensor on top
. The exterior lamps control is of the instrument panel because it
high-beam headlamps off. in AUTO. works with the DRL.
Daytime Running
. The engine is running.
When the DRL are on, the regular Hazard Warning Flashers
Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, | Hazard Warning Flasher:
and other lamps will not be on. Press this button located on the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The instrument panel and cluster instrument panel below the audio
make it easier for others to see the will also not be lit. system, to make the front and rear
front of your vehicle during the day. For vehicles with HID headlamps, turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Fully functional daytime running if the DRL are on and the left or This warns others that you are
lamps are required on all vehicles right turn signal lamp is turned on, having trouble. Press again to turn
first sold in Canada. the left or right DRL will go off. the flashers off.
The headlamps automatically The turn signals do not work while
change from DRL to the regular the hazard warning flashers are on.
headlamps depending on the
6-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps
position whenever it is released.
Signals Use the fog lamps for better vision
If after signaling a turn or lane in foggy or misty conditions.
change the arrow flashes rapidly
or does not come on, a signal bulb The fog lamps button is on the
might be burned out. exterior lamps control to the left
of the steering column.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse. # (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on lamps button to turn the fog lamps
page 10‑32. on or off. A light comes on in the
An arrow on the instrument panel instrument panel cluster when the
cluster flashes in the direction of the Turn Signal On Chime fog lamps are in use. The ignition
turn or lane change. must be on for the fog lamps
If either one of the turn signals are
Move the lever all the way up or left on and the vehicle has been to work.
down to signal a turn. driven more than 1.2 km (3/4 mile), When the headlamps are changed
Raise or lower the lever until the a chime will sound. to high-beam, the fog lamps turn off.
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane The fog lamps come back on again
change. Hold it there until the lane when the high-beam headlamps are
change is completed. If the lever is turned off.
briefly pressed and released, the Some localities have laws that
turn signal flashes three times. require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps Dome Lamp Override

The courtesy lamps automatically
Instrument Panel come on when a door is opened.
Illumination Control The lamps can also be turned
on manually by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent
of the automatic courtesy lamps,
when the doors are closed. The dome lamp override button is
next to the exterior lamps control.
Dome Lamps E DOME OFF (Dome Lamp
The instrument panel brightness Override): Press the top of the
The dome lamps are located in the
knob is located on the instrument button in and the dome lamps
panel to the left of the steering overhead console and above the
remain off when a door is opened.
column. rear seat passengers.
An indicator light on the button
D (Instrument Panel The dome lamps come on when a comes on to show that the dome
door is opened, unless the dome lamps are off. Press near the bottom
Brightness): Push the knob
in all the way until it extends out lamp override button is pressed in. of the button so the dome lamps
and then turn the knob clockwise The lamps can also be turned on come on when a door is opened.
or counterclockwise to brighten or and off by turning the instrument
dim the lights. Push the knob back panel brightness control clockwise Reading Lamps
in when finished. to the farthest position. Press the button near each lamp to
turn them on or off.
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features Entry lighting includes a feature Delayed Entry Lighting

called theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps do not turn Delayed entry lighting illuminates
Entry Lighting off at the end of the delay time. the interior for a period of time after
For vehicles with courtesy lamps, Instead, they slowly dim and then all the doors have been closed.
they come on and stay on for a set go out. The delay time is canceled The ignition must be off for delayed
time whenever the unlock symbol if the ignition key is turned to entry lighting to work. Immediately
is pressed on the Remote Keyless ON/RUN or the power door lock after all the doors have been closed,
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the switch is pressed. The lamps will the delayed entry lighting feature
vehicle has one. dim right away. continues to work until one of the
If a door is opened, the lamps stay When the ignition is on, illuminated following occurs:
on while it is open and then turn entry is inactive, which means the . The ignition is in ON/RUN.
off automatically about 20 seconds courtesy lamps will not come on
unless a door is opened.
. The doors are locked.
after the door is closed. If the unlock
symbol is pressed and no door is . An illumination period of about
opened, the lamps turn off after 25 seconds has elapsed.
about 20 seconds. If during the illumination period
a door is opened, the timed
illumination period is canceled
and the interior lamps remain on.
Lighting 6-7
Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming voltage move up or down. This is

normal. If there is a problem, an
Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits alert will be displayed.
interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument
key is removed from the ignition. panel displays in daylight while The battery can be discharged at
the headlamps are on so that the idle if the electrical loads are very
The ignition must be off for delayed high. This is true for all vehicles.
exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen.
This is because the generator
is removed, interior illumination (alternator) may not be spinning
activates and remains on until Battery Load fast enough at idle to produce
one of the following occurs: Management all the power needed for very
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power high electrical loads.
. The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates A high electrical load occurs when
activated. the battery's temperature and state several of the following are on,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage such as: headlamps, high beams,
. An illumination period of for best performance and extended fog lamps, rear window defogger,
20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery. climate control fan at high speed,
If during the illumination period When the battery's state of charge heated seats, engine cooling fans,
a door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly trailer loads, and loads plugged into
illumination period will be canceled to quickly bring the charge back up. accessory power outlets.
and the interior lamps will remain When the state of charge is high, EPM works to prevent excessive
on because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to discharge of the battery. It does this
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle by balancing the generator's output
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage and the vehicle's electrical needs.
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
6-8 Lighting
It can increase engine idle speed Battery Power Protection

to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce This feature helps prevent the
the power demands of some battery from being drained, if the
accessories. interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk
Normally, these actions occur lamp are accidentally left on.
in steps or levels, without being If any of these lamps are left on,
noticeable. In rare cases at the they automatically turn off after
highest levels of corrective action, 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
this action may be noticeable The lamps will not come back on
to the driver. If so, a Driver again until one of the following
Information Center (DIC) message occurs:
might be displayed, such as
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
. The ignition is turned on.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, . The exterior lamps control is
or LOW BATTERY. If one of turned off, then on again.
these messages displays, it is
recommended that the driver The headlamps will timeout after
reduce the electrical loads as 10 minutes, if they are manually
much as possible. See Driver turned on while the ignition is on
Information Center (DIC) (With or off.
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑25 or
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Introduction
System CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP3 (Radios with
7-16
Infotainment
CD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Read the following pages to
Introduction MP3 (Radios with become familiar with the audio
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 CD/DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 system's features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Rear Seat Infotainment { WARNING
Radio Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Taking your eyes off the road
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 for extended periods could
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Rear Audio injury or death to you or others.
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of
the audio system.
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset
Operation
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned
off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑21
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it
is stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat

Entertainment (RSE) system,
it has a CD, DVD, and USB radio.
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player
is capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc..
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Dolby Laboratories.
The vehicle may have one of these Radios with CD, DVD, and USB
radios as its audio system.
Radios with CD, DVD, and USB
have a Bose® Surround Sound
System. Some of its features are
explained later in this section
under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
Playing the Radio 4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text:

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio
the system on and off. Turn to station frequency and the time. setup menu.
increase or decrease the volume. When the ignition is in the OFF
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
position, press 4 to display the time. TXT tab on the radio display.
For vehicles with a Rear
Entertainment System (RSE), press For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA
3. Press the softkey under the
and hold for more than two seconds or RDS features, press 4 to display
ON tab on the radio display.
to turn off the entire radio and RSE additional text information related
system and to start the parental to the current FM-RDS or XM If 4 is pressed and the song title
control feature. Parental control station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. or artist information is longer than
prevents the rear seat occupant If information is available during what can be displayed, the extra
from operating the Rear Seat Audio XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, information will page every
(RSA) system or remote control. the song title information displays five seconds when Auto Text
on the top line of the display and is activated.
A lock symbol displays next to the artist information displays on the
clock display while the parental Speed Compensated Volume
bottom line. When information is not
control feature is being used. available, “NO INFO” is displayed. (SCV): The Speed Compensated
The feature remains on until O is Volume (SCV) feature automatically
pressed and held for more than Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, adjusts the radio volume to
two seconds, or the driver turns the CD, MP3, and WMA features): If compensate for road and wind
ignition off and exits the vehicle. additional information is available noise as the vehicle speeds up
for the current song being played, or slows down, so that the
Auto Text will automatically volume level is consistent.
page/scroll the information every
five seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display.
To activate SCV: Setting the Tone MID, or TREB tab for more than
1. Set the radio volume. (Bass/Midrange/Treble) two seconds. A beep sounds and
the level adjusts to the middle
2. Press the MENU button to BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, position.
display the radio setup menu. or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble: To quickly adjust all tone and
3. Press the softkey under the speaker controls to the middle
AUTO VOLUM (automatic 1. Press f until the tone control position, press f for more than
volume) tab on the radio display. tabs display. two seconds until a beep sounds.
4. Press the softkey under the 2. Continue pressing f to highlight EQ (Equalization): Press to
Speed Compensated Volume the tab, or press the softkey choose bass and treble equalization
setting (OFF, Low, Med, or under the tab. settings designed for different types
High) to select the level of of music. The choices are pop, rock,
radio volume compensation. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
do one of the following until the country, talk, jazz, and classical.
Press the softkey located below
levels are obtained. Selecting MANUAL or changing
the BACK tab on the MENU
bass or treble, returns the EQ to
SETUP display or let the display . Turn f clockwise or the manual bass and treble settings.
time out after approximately
counterclockwise. Unique EQ settings can be saved
10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume . Press \ FWD, or s REV. for each source.
compensation at faster vehicle If the radio has a Bose® audio
speeds. If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble. system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BASS,
Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
(Balance/Fade) tone controls to the middle position, turned on, the radio disables FADE
press f for more than two seconds and mutes the rear speakers.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):
To adjust the balance or fade: until a beep sounds. Radio Messages
Radios with CD and DVD fade
1. Press f until the speaker control differently depending on the DVD
Calibration Error: The audio
tabs display. system has been calibrated
Media type: for the vehicle from the factory.
2. Continue pressing f to highlight . With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround If Calibration Error displays, it
the tab, or press the softkey media, the left front and right means that the radio has not been
under the tab. front speakers fade rearward, configured properly for the vehicle
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, leaving the center front and it must be returned to your
do one of the following until the speakers unaffected until the dealer for service.
levels are obtained. last fade step, then all front Locked: This message displays
speakers mute. when the TheftLock® system has
. Turn f clockwise or . With DVD‐V 5.1 Surround locked up the radio. Take the
counterclockwise. media, surround sound is vehicle to your dealer for service.
. Press \ FWD, or s REV. maintained until Step 4 of the If any error occurs repeatedly or
Fade control is reached while if an error cannot be corrected,
To quickly adjust balance or fade fading rearward. At that point
to the middle position, press the contact your dealer.
the audio system output
softkey under the BAL or FADE tab changes to Stereo to prevent
for more than two seconds. A beep the loss of Center channel
sounds and the level adjusts to the output when the full rearward
middle position. fade position is reached.
Radio Finding a Station Storing a Radio Station as a

BAND: Press to switch between Favorite
AM-FM Radio AM, FM, or XM. The selection Drivers are encouraged to set up
displays. their radio station favorites while
Radio Data System (RDS) the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
f (Tune): Turn to select radio
The Radio Data System (RDS) stations. favorite stations using the presets,
feature is available for use only on favorites button, and steering wheel
FM stations that broadcast RDS © SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the controls. See Steering Wheel
information. This system relies previous or to the next station and Controls on page 5‑2.
upon receiving specific information stay there.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
from these stations and only works To scan stations, press and 36 stations can be programmed
when the information is available. hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. as favorites using the six softkeys
While the radio is tuned to an The radio goes to a station, plays below the radio station frequency
FM-RDS station, the station name for a few seconds, then goes to tabs and by using the radio favorites
or call letters display. In rare cases, the next station. Press either arrow page button (FAV button). Press
a radio station could broadcast again to stop scanning. to go through up to six pages of
incorrect information that causes the favorites, each having six favorite
radio features to work improperly. The radio only seeks and scans
stations available per page. Each
If this happens, contact the radio stations with a strong signal that
page of favorites can contain any
station. are in the selected band.
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings To setup the number of favorites Satellite Radio
that were previously adjusted, are pages:
stored with the favorite stations. 1. Press MENU to display the radio
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
To store a station as a favorite: setup menu. XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
1. Tune to the desired radio station. 2. Press the softkey below the
FAV 1-6 tab. United States and 10 Canadian
2. Press FAV to display the page to provinces. XM Satellite Radio
store the station. 3. Select the desired number of has a wide variety of programming
3. Press and hold one of the favorites pages by pressing the and commercial-free music,
six softkeys until a beep sounds. softkey below the displayed coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
When that softkey is pressed page numbers. sound. A service fee is required
and released, the station that 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time to receive the XM service. If XM
was set, returns. out, to return to the original Service needs to be reactivated, the
main radio screen showing radio will display “No Subscription
4. Repeat the steps for each radio Please Renew” on channel XM1.
station to be stored as a favorite. the radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of For more information, contact
programming favorites for the XM at www.xmradio.com or
chosen amount of numbered call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
pages. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Finding a Station Finding a Category (CAT) 4. Press either of the two buttons
Station below the desired category tab
BAND: Press to switch between
to immediately tune to the first
AM, FM, or XM. The selection CAT (Category): The CAT button is XM station associated with that
displays. used to find XM™ stations when the category.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio radio is in the XM mode. To find XM
channels within a desired category: 5. To go to the next or previous
stations.
XM station within the selected
© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the 1. Press BAND until the XM category, do one of the
previous or to the next station and frequency displays. following:
stay there. 2. Press CAT to display the
category tabs.
. Turn f.
To scan stations, press and hold ©
3. Continue pressing CAT until the
. Press the buttons below the
or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio right or left arrows on the
desired category name displays.
goes to a station, plays for a few display.
. Radios with CD and DVD
seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again can also navigate the
. Press either SEEK arrow.
to stop scanning. category list by pressing 6. To exit the category search
The radio only seeks and scans
s REV or \ FWD. mode, press the FAV button
stations with a strong signal that or BAND button to display
are in the selected band. the favorites again.
Undesired XM categories can be Storing a Radio Station as a The balance/fade and tone settings
removed through the setup menu. Favorite that were previously adjusted, are
To remove an undesired category, stored with the favorite stations.
perform the following: Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while To store a station as a favorite:
1. Press MENU to display the radio the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
setup menu. favorite stations using the presets,
favorites button, and steering wheel 2. Press FAV to display the page to
2. Press the softkey below the store the station.
XM CAT tab. controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑2. 3. Press and hold one of the
3. Turn f to display the category to six softkeys until a beep sounds.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
be removed. When that softkey is pressed
36 stations can be programmed
4. Press the softkey under the as favorites using the six softkeys and released, the station that
Remove tab until the category below the radio station frequency was set, returns.
name along with the word tabs and by using the radio favorites 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
Removed displays. page button (FAV button). Press station to be stored as a favorite.
5. Repeat the steps to remove to go through up to six pages of
more categories. favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
Removed categories can be page of favorites can contain any
restored by pressing the softkey combination of AM, FM, or XM
under the Add tab when a removed stations.
category is displayed or by pressing
the softkey under the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or
added while the vehicle is moving
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
To setup the number of favorites XM™ Radio Messages Channel Off Air: This channel is
pages: not currently in service. Tune in to
XL (Explicit Language
1. Press MENU to display the radio another channel.
Channels): These channels,
setup menu. or any others, can be blocked at Channel Unauth : This channel is
2. Press the softkey below the a customer's request, by calling blocked or cannot be received with
FAV 1-6 tab. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and your XM Subscription package.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Channel Unavail: This previously
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the XM Updating: The encryption assigned channel is no longer
softkey below the displayed code in the receiver is being assigned. Tune to another station.
page numbers. updated, and no action is required. If this station was one of the
This process should take no presets, choose another station
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time longer than 30 seconds. for that preset button.
out, to return to the original
main radio screen showing the No XM Signal: The system is No Artist Info: No artist
radio station frequency tabs functioning correctly, but the vehicle information is available at this
and to begin the process of is in a location that is blocking the time on this channel. The system
programming favorites for the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is working properly.
chosen amount of numbered is moved into an open area, No Title Info: No song title
pages. the signal should return. information is available at this time
Loading XM: The audio system is on this channel. The system is
acquiring and processing audio and working properly.
text data. No action is needed. This No CAT Info: No category
message should disappear shortly. information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, Radio Reception

informational messages are this message alternates with the
available at this time on this XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Frequency interference and static
channel. The system is working This label is needed to activate the can occur during normal radio
properly. service. reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is accessories, and external electronic
XM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0, devices are plugged into the
reactivated. Contact XM at there could be a receiver fault. accessory power outlet. If there is
www.xmradio.com or call Consult with your dealer. interference or static, unplug the
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. Check XM Receivr: If this item from the accessory power
and www.xmradio.ca or call message does not clear within a outlet.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. short period of time, the receiver
CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with
FM
channels available for the selected your dealer. FM signals only reach about 16 to
category. The system is working 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
XM Not Available: If this message
properly. radio has a built-in electronic circuit
does not clear within a short period
that automatically works to reduce
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver of time, the receiver could have a
interference, some static can occur,
in the vehicle could have previously fault. Consult with your dealer.
especially around tall buildings or
been in another vehicle. For security
hills, causing the sound to fade in
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
and out.
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
AM Just as with FM, tall buildings or Multi-Band Antenna

hills can interfere with satellite radio
The range for most AM stations is The multi-band antenna is located
signals, causing the sound to fade
greater than for FM, especially at on the roof of the vehicle. This type
in and out. In addition, traveling
night. The longer range can cause of antenna is used with the AM/FM
or standing under heavy foliage,
station frequencies to interfere radio, as well as OnStar® and the
bridges, garages, or tunnels may
with each other. For better radio XM™ Satellite Radio Service
cause loss of the XM signal for a
reception, most AM radio stations System, if the vehicle has these
period of time.
boost the power levels during the features. Keep this antenna clear
day, and then reduce these levels Cellular Phone Usage of snow and ice build up for clear
during the night. Static can also radio reception. If the vehicle has
occur when things like storms and Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's a sunroof, the performance of the
power lines interfere with radio radio system may be affected if the
reception. When this happens, try radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone sunroof is open. Loading items onto
reducing the treble on the radio. the roof of the vehicle can interfere
calls, charging the phone's battery,
XM™ Satellite Radio Service or simply having the phone on. with the performance of the radio
This interference can cause an system and, if the vehicle has this
XM Satellite Radio Service
increased level of static while feature, OnStar®. Make sure the
gives digital radio reception from multi-band antenna is not
listening to the radio. If static is
coast to coast in the 48 contiguous obstructed.
received while listening to the
United States, and in Canada.
radio, unplug the cellular phone
and turn it off.
Audio Players © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to the RDM (Random): CD tracks can be

start of the current track, if more listened to in random, rather than
than ten seconds on the CD have sequential order with the random
CD Player setting. To use random, press the
played. Press ¨ to go to the next
Playing a CD softkey under the RDM label until
track.
Random Current Disc displays.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, If either arrow is held, or pressed Press the softkey again to turn
label side up. The player pulls it in multiple times, the player continues off random play.
and the CD should begin playing. moving backward or forward
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
Z EJECT : Press and release through the tracks on the CD.
when a CD is playing. The CD
to eject the disc that is currently s REV (Fast Reverse): Press remains inside the radio for future
playing. A beep sounds and and hold to reverse playback listening.
Ejecting Disc displays. Once quickly within a track. Sound will
the disc is ejected, Remove CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
be heard at a reduced volume.
Disc displays. The disc can be select between CD, or Auxiliary.
Release to resume playing the
removed. If the disc is not removed, track. The elapsed time of the . When a CD is in the player
after several seconds, the disc track displays. the CD icon and a message
automatically pulls back into the showing the disc and/or track
player. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
number displays.
and hold to advance playback
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on quickly within a track. Sound will . If an auxiliary input device is not
the CD that is currently playing. be heard at a reduced volume. connected, “No Input Device
Release to resume playing the Found” displays.
track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
Care of CDs Care of the CD Player Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Do not add any label to a CD, it CD-RW Disc
can be reduced due to CD-R or could get caught in the CD player. The radio has the capability of
CD-RW quality, the method of If a CD is recorded on a personal playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
recording, the quality of the music computer and a description label is CD-RW disc. For more information
that has been recorded, and the needed, try labeling the top of the on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been recorded CD with a marking pen. or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radios
handled. Handle them carefully. The use of CD lens cleaners for with CD/USB) on page 7‑24 or
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their CDs is not advised. MP3 (Radios with CD/DVD) on
original cases or other protective page 7‑30.
cases and away from direct sunlight Notice: If a label is added to a
and dust. The CD player scans the CD, more than one CD is inserted CD Messages
bottom surface of the disc. If the into the slot at a time, or an CHECK DISC: Radios with a
surface of a CD is damaged, such attempt is made to play scratched Single CD player display CHECK
as cracked, broken, or scratched, or damaged CDs, the CD player DISC and/or ejects the CD if an
the CD does not play properly or not could be damaged. While using error occurs.
at all. Do not touch the bottom side the CD player, use only CDs in
of a CD while handling it; this could good condition without any label, Optical Error: The disc was
damage the surface. Pick up CDs load one CD at a time, and keep inserted upside down.
by grasping the outer edges or the the CD player and the loading slot Disk Read Error: A disc was
edge of the hole and the outer edge. free of foreign materials, liquids, inserted with an invalid or unknown
and debris. format.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a If an error displays, see “CD
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral Messages” later in this section.
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD CD/DVD Player When a CD is inserted, the text
or disc EJECT problems. label DVD or CD symbol displays
. It is very hot. When the
Playing a CD (In Either the on the left side of the radio display.
temperature returns to normal, DVD or CD Slot) As each new track starts to play,
the CD should play. the track number displays.
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
. The road is very rough. When label side up. The player pulls it in Z CD (Eject): Press and release
the road becomes smoother, and the CD should begin playing to eject the disc that is currently
the CD should play. (loading a disc into the system, playing. The disc ejects from the
depending on media type and bottom slot. A beep sounds and
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Ejecting Disc displays. Once
or upside down. for a CD, and up to 30 seconds the disc is ejected, Remove
. The air is very humid. If so, wait for a DVD to begin playing). Disc displays. The disc can be
about an hour and try again. removed. If the disc is not removed,
If the ignition or radio is turned off,
after several seconds, the disc
. There could have been a while a CD is in the player, it stays
automatically pulls back into the
problem while burning the CD. in the player. When the ignition or
player.
radio is turned on, the CD starts
. The label could be caught in the playing where it stopped, if it was Z DVD (Eject): Press and
CD player. the last selected audio source. release to eject the disc that is
If the CD is not playing correctly The CD is controlled by the buttons currently playing in the top slot.
for any other reason, try a known on the radio faceplate or by the RSA A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
good CD. unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) displays.
System on page 7‑48 for more If loading and reading of a disc
If any error occurs repeatedly or
information. The DVD/CD decks, cannot be completed, and the
if an error cannot be corrected,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and disc fails to eject, press and
contact your dealer. If the radio
the lower slot is the CD deck) of
displays an error message, write it
the radio are compatible with most hold Z DVD for more than
down and provide it to your dealer five seconds to force the disc
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and
when reporting the problem. to eject.
MP3/WMAs.

. If an auxiliary input device is not
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): CD tracks can be
connected, and a disc is in both
the CD that is currently playing. listened to in random, rather than
sequential order with the random the DVD slot and the CD slot the
© SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to the setting. To use random, press the DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
start of the current track if the track softkey under the RDM tab until between the two sources and
has played more than five seconds. Random Current Disc displays. does not indicate “No Aux Input
If the track has played less than Press the softkey again to turn Device”.
five seconds the previous track off random play. . If a front auxiliary input device
will play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
Press ¨ to go to the next track. when a CD or DVD is playing. button cycles through all
The CD or DVD remains inside available options.
If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues the radio for future listening or If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
moving backward or forward for viewing entertainment. slot, the rear seat operator can turn
through the tracks on the CD. DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press on the video screen and use the
to select between DVD, CD, remote control to only navigate
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press the CD tracks through the remote
and hold to reverse playback or Auxiliary.
control.
quickly within a track. Sound will . If an auxiliary input device is
be heard at a reduced volume. not connected, “No Aux Input See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Release to resume playing the Device” displays. Jack(s)” later in this section,
track. The elapsed time of the or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
. When a disc is in either slot, the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
track displays.
DVD/CD text tab and a message System on page 7‑39 for more
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press showing the track or chapter information.
and hold to advance playback number displays.
quickly within a track. Sound will be
heard at a reduced volume. Release
to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
Care of CDs and DVDs If the surface of a CD is soiled, take Notice: If a label is added to a
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a CD, more than one CD is inserted
can be reduced due to CD-R or clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral into the slot at a time, or an
CD-RW quality, the method of detergent solution mixed with water, attempt is made to play scratched
recording, the quality of the music and clean it. Make sure the wiping or damaged CDs, the CD player
that has been recorded, and the process starts from the center to could be damaged. While using
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been the edge. the CD player, use only CDs in
handled. Handle them carefully. good condition without any label,
Care of the CD and DVD Player load one CD at a time, and keep
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective Do not add any label to a CD, it the CD player and the loading slot
cases and away from direct sunlight could get caught in the CD or DVD free of foreign materials, liquids,
and dust. The CD or DVD player player. If a CD is recorded on a and debris.
scans the bottom surface of the personal computer and a description If an error displays, see “CD
disc. If the surface of a CD is label is needed, try labeling the Messages” later in this section.
damaged, such as cracked, broken, top of the recorded CD with a
or scratched, the CD does not play marking pen.
properly or not at all. Do not touch The use of CD lens cleaners for
the bottom side of a CD while CDs is not advised.
handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Radios with CD and DVD If a playback device is plugged into Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
Audio Output the radio’s front auxiliary input jack CD-RW Disc
or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
Only one audio source can be heard seat passengers are able to listen The radio has the capability of
through the speakers at one time. to playback from this source through playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
An audio source is defined as the vehicle speakers. See “Using CD-RW disc. For more information
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear in this section, or “Audio/Video or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radios
Auxiliary Jack. (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat with CD/USB) on page 7‑24 or
Entertainment (RSE) System on MP3 (Radios with CD/DVD) on
Press O to turn the radio on. page 7‑30.
The radio can be heard through page 7‑39 for more information.
all of the vehicle speakers. In some vehicles, depending on CD Messages
Front seat passengers can listen audio options, the rear speakers Optical Error: The disc was
to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by can be muted when the RSA power inserted upside down.
pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑48 for Disk Read Error: A disc was
select the CD slot, DVD slot, front inserted with an invalid or unknown
or rear auxiliary input (if available). more information.
format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD
or disc EJECT problems. f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on
The DVD player can be controlled
. It is very hot. When the by the buttons on the remote a CD or DVD, to manually tune a
temperature returns to normal, control, the RSA system, or by radio station, or to change clock
the CD should play. the buttons on the radio faceplate. or date settings, while in the clock
. The road is very rough. When See “Remote Control”, under Rear or date setting mode. See the
the road becomes smoother, Seat Entertainment (RSE) System information given earlier in this
the CD should play. on page 7‑39 and Rear Seat Audio section specific to the radio, CD,
(RSA) System on page 7‑48 for and the DVD. Also, see “Setting
. The CD is dirty, scratched, more information. the Clock” in the index, for setting
wet, or upside down. the clock and date.
The DVD player is only compatible
. The air is very humid. If so, wait with DVDs of the appropriate region © SEEK (Previous Track/
about an hour and try again. code that is printed on the jacket of Chapter): Press to return to the
. There could have been a most DVDs. start of the current track or chapter.
problem while burning the CD. The DVD slot of the radio is Press © again to go to the previous
. The label could be caught in the compatible with most audio track or chapter. This button may
CD player. CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, not work when the DVD is playing
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, the copyright information or the
If the CD is not playing correctly DVD+R/RW media along previews.
for any other reason, try a known with MP3 and WMA formats.
good CD. SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):
If an error message displays Press to go to the next track or
If any error occurs repeatedly on the video screen or the radio, chapter. This button may not work
or if an error cannot be corrected, see “DVD Display Error Messages” when the DVD is playing the
contact your dealer. If the radio under, Rear Seat Entertainment copyright information or the
displays an error message, write it (RSE) System on page 7‑39 and previews.
down and provide it to your dealer “DVD Radio Error Messages” in
when reporting the problem. this section for more information.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press If loading and reading of a DVD r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
to quickly reverse the DVD at cannot be completed, because the play or pause icon displayed on
five times the normal speed. of an unknown format, etc., and the the radio system, to toggle between
The radio displays the elapsed disc fails to eject, press and hold for pausing or restarting playback of
time while in fast reverse. more than five seconds to force the a DVD.
To stop fast reversing, press again. disc to eject. . If the forward arrow is showing
This button may not work when DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons on display, the system is in
the DVD is playing the copyright pause mode.
information or the previews. Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several icons. . If the pause icon is showing
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Press the softkeys under any icon on display, the system is in
to fast forward the DVD. The radio during DVD playback. See the icon playback mode.
displays the elapsed time and fast list below for more information.
forwards five times the normal . If the DVD screen is off, press
speed. To stop fast forwarding, The rear seat passenger can the play button to turn the
press again. This button may not navigate the DVD-V menus and screen on.
work when the DVD is playing controls through the remote control.
Some DVDs begin playing after
the copyright information or the See “Remote Control”, under Rear
the previews have finished,
previews. Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
although there could be a delay
Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. The Video Screen automatically
of up to 30 seconds. If the DVD
If the DVD is ejected, but not does not begin playing the movie
turns on when the DVD-V is
removed, the player automatically automatically, press the softkey
inserted into the DVD slot.
pulls it back in after 15 seconds. under the play/pause icon displayed
on the radio. If the DVD still does
not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio the play or pause icon displayed on
r (Enter): Press to select the display menu shows several icons. the radio system, to toggle between
choices that are highlighted in Press the softkeys under any icon pausing or restarting playback of
any menu. during DVD playback. See the icon a DVD.
list below for more information. . If the forward arrow is showing
y (Menu): Press to access the
on display, the system is in
DVD menu. The DVD menu is The rear seat operator can
different on every DVD. Use the navigate the DVD-A menus and pause mode.
softkeys under the navigation controls through the remote control. . If the pause icon is showing
arrows to navigate the cursor See “Remote Control”, under on display, the system is in
through the DVD menu. After Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) playback mode.
making a selection press this System on page 7‑39 for more
button. This button only operates information. The Video Screen does q Group r : Press to cycle
not automatically power on when through musical groupings on
when using a DVD. the DVD-A disc.
the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD
Nav (Navigate): Press to display slot. It must be manually turned on Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating by the rear seat occupant through directional arrows for navigating
through the menus. the remote control power button. through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the e (Audio Stream): Press to
current active menu and return to cycle through audio stream
the previous menu. This button formats located on the DVD-A disc.
operates only when a DVD is The video screen shows the audio
playing and a menu is active. stream changing.
Inserting a Disc Stopping and Resuming Playback The DVD should resume play from
To play a disc, gently insert the To stop playing a DVD without where it last stopped if the disc
disc, with the label side up, into the turning off the system, do one of has not been ejected and the stop
loading slot. The DVD player might the following: button has not been pressed twice
not accept some paper labeled on the remote control. If the disc
media. The player starts loading
. Press c on the remote control. has been ejected or the stop button
the disc into the system and shows .
has been pressed twice on the
Press the softkey under the remote control, the disc resumes
“Loading Disc” on the radio display. stop or the play/pause icons
At the same time, the radio displays playing at the beginning of the disc.
displayed on the radio.
a softkey menu of option(s). Some Ejecting a Disc
discs automatically play the movie
. If the radio head is sourced to
while others default to the softkey something other than DVD-V, Press Z DVD on the radio to eject
menu display, which requires the press the DVD/CD AUX button the disc. If a disc is ejected from the
Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to make DVD-V the active radio, but not removed, the radio
to be pressed; either by the softkey source. reloads the disc after a short period
on the radio or by the rear seat To resume DVD playback, do one of of time. The disc is stored in the
passenger using the remote control. the following: radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically.
It may take up to 30 seconds for a . Press r / j on the remote If the movie is reloaded and the
DVD to begin playing. control. RSA system is sourced to the
. Press the softkey under the DVD, the player begins to play
play/pause icon displayed on again. If loading and reading a
the radio. DVD or CD cannot be completed,
and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold Z DVD for more than
five seconds to force the disc to
eject.
DVD Error Messages MP3 (Radios with Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
Player Error: This message CD/USB)
displays when there are disc load The radio can play discs that
or eject problems. Format contain both uncompressed CD
Radios that have the capability audio and MP3/WMA files. If both
Disc Format Error: This message
of playing MP3s can play .mp3 formats are on the disc, the radio
displays, if the disc is inserted with
or .wma files that were recorded plays both file formats in the order
the disc label wrong side up, or if
onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. in which they were recorded to
the disc is damaged.
The files can be recorded with the the disc.
Disc Region Error: This message following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
displays, if the disc is not from a CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, and Folder Structure
correct region. 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
No Disc Inserted: This message 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, The radio supports:
displays, if no disc is present when 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a . Up to 50 folders.
Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is variable bit rate. . Up to 8 folders in depth.
pressed on the radio. Radios that have a USB port can . Up to 15 playlists.
play .mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device as . Up to 512 files and folders.
well as AAC files that are stored on . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
an iPod®. extension.
. Files with an .mp3, .wma,
or .cda file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder If a disc contains both Tracks are played in the following
Structure uncompressed CD audio and order:
The radio supports: MP3/WMA files, a folder under . Play begins from the first track
the root directory called CD in the first playlist and continues
. Up to 700 folders. accesses all of the CD audio sequentially through all tracks
. Up to 8 folders in depth. tracks on the disc. in each playlist. When the last
. Up to 65,535 files. Empty Folder track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
. Folder and file names up to Folders that do not contain files are first track of the first playlist.
64 bytes. skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files. . Play begins from the first track
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file in the first folder and continues
extension. Order of Play sequentially through all tracks in
. AAC files stored on an iPod. Compressed audio files are each folder. When the last track
accessed in the following order: of the last folder has played,
. FAT16
.
play continues from the first
. FAT32 Playlists (Px).
track of the first folder.
. Files stored in the root directory.
Root Directory When play enters a new folder, the
. Files stored in folders in the root display does not automatically show
The root directory of the disc is directory. the new folder name unless the
treated as a folder. If the root
folder mode has been chosen as
directory has compressed audio
the default display. The new track
files, the directory displays on the
name displays.
radio as the CD label.
File System and Naming Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 S c (Previous Folder): Press
The song name that displays is the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA the softkey below S c to go to
song name that is contained in the files. the first track in the previous folder.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of c T (Next Folder): Press the
radio displays the file name without
the track, if more than ten seconds softkey below c T to go to the
have played. Press and hold or first track in the next folder.
the extension (such as .mp3) as
press multiple times to continue
the track name. RDM (Random): Files on the disc
moving backward through tracks.
Track names longer than can be listened to in random, rather
32 characters or four pages are
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next than sequential order. To use
track. Press and hold or press random, press the softkey under the
shortened. Parts of words on the
multiple times to continue moving RDM tab until Random Current Disc
last page of text and the extension
forward through tracks. displays to play songs in random
of the filename does not display.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold order. Press the same softkey again
Preprogrammed Playlists to reverse playback quickly. Sound to turn off random play.
Preprogrammed playlists that is heard at a reduced volume and h (Music Navigator): Press the
were created using WinAmp™, the elapsed time of the file displays.
softkey below h to play files in
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Release s REV to resume playing. order by artist or album.
software can be accessed, however,
they cannot be edited using the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The player scans the disc to sort the
radio. These playlists are treated and hold to advance playback files by artist and album ID3 tag
as special folders containing quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced information. It can take several
compressed audio song files. volume and the elapsed time of the minutes to scan the disc depending
file displays. Release \ FWD to on the number of files on the disc.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a resume playing. The elapsed time The radio may begin playing while
USB device may be supported by of the file displays. it is scanning in the background.
the radio with a USB port.
When the scan is finished, the disc To change from playback by artist to Connecting a USB Storage
begins playing files in order by playback by album: Device or iPod®
artist. The current artist playing is 1. Press the softkey located below
shown on the second line of the the Sort By tab.
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the 2. Press one of the softkeys below
next artist in alphabetical order and the album tab from the sort
begins playing files by that artist. screen.
To listen to files by another artist, 3. Press the softkey below the
press the softkey located below back tab to return to the main
either arrow tab. The disc goes music navigator screen.
to the next or previous artist in The album name displays on the
alphabetical order. Continue second line between the arrows
pressing either softkey below the and songs from the current album
arrow tab until the artist displays. begins to play. Once all songs
from that album have played, the A. USB Port
player moves to the next album in To connect a USB storage device,
alphabetical order on the CD and connect the device to the USB port
begins playing MP3 files from that located in the instrument panel
album. storage area. See Instrument
To exit music navigator mode, press Panel Storage on page 4‑1 for
the softkey below the Back tab to more information.
return to normal MP3 playback. The USB Port can be used to
control an iPod or a USB storage
device.
To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock quickly. Sound is heard at a
connector and connect the other The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using reduced volume. Release \ FWD
end to the USB port located in the
the radio buttons and knobs and to resume playing. The elapsed time
center console. If the vehicle is on
display song information on the of the file displays.
and the USB connection works,
“OK to disconnect” and a GM logo radio’s display. 4 (Information): Press to display
may appear on the iPod and iPod f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the
appears on the radio's display. selected track.
The iPod music appears on the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than ten seconds Using Softkeys to Control a
radio’s display and begins playing.
have played. Press and hold or USB Storage Device or iPod
The iPod charges while it is press multiple times to continue
connected to the vehicle if the moving backward through tracks. The five softkeys below the radio
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY display are used to control the
or ON/RUN position. When the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next functions listed below.
track. Press and hold or press
vehicle is turned off, the iPod To use the softkeys:
multiple times to continue moving
automatically powers off and
forward through tracks. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
will not charge or draw power
from the vehicle's battery. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below the radio display to
to reverse playback quickly. Sound display the functions listed
If you have an older iPod model that below, or press the softkey
is heard at a reduced volume.
is not supported, it can still be used below the function if it is
by connecting it to the Auxiliary Release s REV to resume playing. currently displayed.
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm The elapsed time of the file
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the displays. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more with the function on it to use that
information. function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press
below j to pause the track. in the selected folder. the softkey below h to view and
The tab appears raised when pause 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the
is being used. Press the softkey iPod's menu system. Files are
played.
below j again to resume playback. sorted by:
To skip through large lists, the five .
Back: Press the softkey below the Playlists
softkeys can be used to navigate in
back tab to go back to the main the following order: . Artists
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
. First softkey, first item in the list. . Albums
device. . Second softkey, 1% through . Genres
c (Folder View): Press the the list each time the softkey is . Songs
pressed.
softkey below c to view the . Composers
contents of the current folder on
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed. To select files:
the USB drive. To browse and
select files: . Fourth softkey, 10% through 1. Press the softkey below h.
the list each time the softkey is
1. Press the softkey below c. pressed. 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
of folders. 3. Press f to select the menu.
3. Press f to select the folder. 4. Turn f to scroll through
If there is more than one folder, the folders or files in the
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the selected menu.
folder is reached.
5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
To skip through large lists, the five ' (Repeat Track): Press the MP3 (Radios
softkeys can be used to navigate in softkey below ' to repeat one
the following order:
with CD/DVD)
track. The tab appears raised
. First softkey, first item in the list. when Repeat Track is being used. Format
. Second softkey, 1% through Shuffle Functionality The radio can play .mp3 or
the list each time the softkey is .wma files that were recorded
pressed. To use Shuffle: onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below >, 2, The USB port can play .mp3 and
each time the softkey is pressed. < or = to select between .wma files that are stored on a USB
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ storage device as well as AAC files
. Fourth softkey, 10% through that are stored on an iPod®.
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
the list each time the softkey
or Shuffle Folder.
is pressed. Compressed Audio or Mixed
> (Shuffle Off): This is the Mode Discs
default mode when a USB storage
The radio plays discs that contain
Repeat Functionality device or iPod is first connected.
both uncompressed CD audio and
To use Repeat: 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle MP3/WMA files depending on which
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the slot the disc is loaded into.
Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod.
to select between Repeat All and The DVD Player only reads
Repeat Track. < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles uncompressed audio and ignores
all songs in the current album on MP3/WMA files on a mixed
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey an iPod. mode disc.
below " to repeat all tracks. = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
The tab appears lowered when songs in the current folder on a USB
Repeat All is being used. This is the storage device.
default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
The CD Player reads both The CD Player supports: Root Directory

uncompressed audio and . Up to 512 files and folders. The root directory of the disc is
MP3/WMA files on a mixed treated as a folder. If the root
mode disc. Uncompressed audio . Up to 8 folders in depth.
directory has compressed audio
is played before MP3/WMA files. . Playlists with an .m3u or files, the directory displays as
Press the CAT (category) button .wpl extension. F1 ROOT on the radio.
to toggle between uncompressed
audio and MP3/WMA files.
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or If a disc contains both
.cda file extension. uncompressed CD audio and
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File MP3/WMA files, a folder under
and Folder Structure USB Supported File and Folder
Structure the root directory called CD
The DVD Player supports: accesses all of the CD audio
The radio supports: tracks on the disc.
. Up to 255 folders.
. Up to 700 folders. Empty Folder
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
. Up to 8 folders in depth. Folders that do not contain files are
. Up to 15 playlists.
. Up to 65,535 files. skipped, and the player advances to
. Up to 40 sessions. the next folder that contains files.
. Folder and file names up to
. Playlists with an .m3u or 64 bytes. No Folder
.wpl extension.
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file When the disc contains only
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or extension. compressed files, the files are
.cda file extension. located under the root folder.
. AAC files stored on an iPod.
. FAT16
. FAT32
The next and previous folder Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming
function does not function on a order: The song name that displays is the
disc that was recorded without . Play begins from the first track song name that is contained in the
folders or playlists. When displaying in the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not
the name of the folder the radio sequentially through all tracks present in the ID3 tag, then the
displays ROOT. in each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without
When the disc contains only track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as
playlists and compressed audio played, play continues from the the track name.
files, but no folders, all files are first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than
located under the root folder. . Play begins from the first track 32 characters or four pages are
The folder down and the folder up in the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the
buttons search playlists first and sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension
then goes to the root folder. When each folder. When the last track of the filename does not display.
the radio displays the name of the of the last folder has played,
folder the radio displays ROOT. play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists
Order of Play track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that
When play enters a new folder, the were created using WinAmp™,
Compressed audio files are MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
accessed in the following order: display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the software can be accessed, however,
. Playlists. folder mode has been chosen as they cannot be edited using the
. Files stored in the root directory. the default display. The new track radio. These playlists are treated
name displays. as special folders containing
. Files stored in folders in the root compressed audio song files.
directory.
Playlists that have an .m3u or
.pls file extension and are stored
on a USB device may be supported
by the radio with a USB port.
Playing an MP3/WMA File s REV (Reverse): Press and hold displays to play songs in random
From a Disc (In Either the DVD to reverse playback quickly. Sound order. Press the same softkey again
or CD Slot) is heard at a reduced volume and to turn off random play.
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
the elapsed time of the file displays. h (Music Navigator): Press the
slot, the rear seat operator can turn Release s REV to resume playing. softkey below h to play files in
on the video screen and use the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press order by artist or album.
remote control to navigate the and hold to advance playback The player scans the disc to sort
CD (tracks only). quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced the files by artist and album ID3 tag
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA volume and the elapsed time of the information. It can take several
files. file displays. Release \ FWD to minutes to scan the disc depending
© SEEK: Press to go to the resume playing. The elapsed time on the number of files on the disc.
start of the track, if more than of the file displays. The radio may begin playing while
it is scanning in the background.
five seconds have played. Press S c (Previous Folder): Press
to go to the previous track if less the softkey below S c to go to the When the scan is finished, the disc
than five seconds have played. first track in the previous folder. begins playing files in order by
Press and hold or press multiple artist. The current artist playing is
times to continue moving backward c T (Next Folder): Press the shown on the second line of the
through tracks. softkey below c T to go to the display. Once all songs by that artist
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next first track in the next folder. are played, the player moves to the
track. Press and hold or press next artist in alphabetical order and
RDM (Random): Files on the begins playing files by that artist.
multiple times to continue moving disc can be listened to in random,
forward through tracks. rather than sequential order. To use To listen to files by another artist,
random, press the softkey under the press the softkey located below
RDM tab until Random Current Disc either arrow tab. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue Connecting a USB Storage To connect an iPod, connect one
pressing either softkey below the Device or iPod® end of the USB cable that came
arrow tab until the artist displays. with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
To change from playback by artist to connector and connect the other
playback by album: end to the USB port located in the
center console. If the vehicle is on
1. Press the softkey located below and the USB connection works,
the Sort By tab. “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
2. Press one of the softkeys below may appear on the iPod and iPod
the album tab from the sort appears on the radio's display.
screen. The iPod music appears on the
radio’s display and begins playing.
3. Press the softkey below the
back tab to return to the main The iPod charges while it is
music navigator screen. connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
The album name displays on the A. USB Port or ON/RUN position. When the
second line between the arrows vehicle is turned off, the iPod
and songs from the current album To connect a USB storage device,
automatically powers off and
begins to play. Once all songs connect the device to the USB port
will not charge or draw power
from that album have played, the located in the instrument panel
from the vehicle's battery.
player moves to the next album in storage area. See Instrument Panel
alphabetical order on the CD and Storage on page 4‑1 for more If you have an older iPod model that
begins playing MP3 files from that information. is not supported, it can still be used
album. by connecting it to the Auxiliary
The USB Port can be used to
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
To exit music navigator mode, press control an iPod or a USB storage
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
the softkey below the Back tab to device.
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
return to normal MP3 playback. information.
Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey
USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track.
The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a The tab appears raised when pause
storage device or an iPod using reduced volume. Release \ FWD is being used. Press the softkey
the radio buttons and knobs and to resume playing. The elapsed below j again to resume playback.
display song information on the time of the file displays.
radio’s display. Back: Press the softkey below the
4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main
f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the
selected track. root directory on a USB storage
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than ten seconds Using Softkeys to Control a device.
have played. Press and hold or USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the
press multiple times to continue softkey below c to view the
moving backward through tracks. The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control the contents of the current folder on
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and
track. Press and hold or press select files:
multiple times to continue moving To use the softkeys:
forward through tracks. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below c.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
to reverse playback quickly. Sound display the functions listed of folders.
is heard at a reduced volume. below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder.
Release s REV to resume playing. currently displayed. If there is more than one folder,
The elapsed time of the file
2. Press the softkey below the tab repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the
displays.
with the function on it to use that folder is reached.
function.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press the 4. Turn f to scroll through
in the selected folder. softkey below h to view and the folders or files in the
select a file on an iPod, using the selected menu.
5. Press f to select the file to be
iPod's menu system. Files are 5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
sorted by:
To skip through large lists, the five played.
. Playlists
softkeys can be used to navigate in To skip through large lists, the five
the following order: . Artists softkeys can be used to navigate in
. First softkey, first item in the list. . Albums the following order:
. Second softkey, 1% through the . Genres
. First softkey, first item in the list.
list each time the softkey is . Songs
. Second softkey, 1% through
pressed. the list each time the softkey is
. Composers pressed.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: . Third softkey, 5% through the list
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h. each time the softkey is pressed.
list each time the softkey is . Fourth softkey, 10% through
pressed. 2. Turn f to scroll through the list the list each time the softkey is
of menus. pressed.
3. Press f to select the menu. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices

To use Repeat: To use Shuffle: The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
Press the softkey below " or ' Press the softkey below >, 2, (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located
to select between Repeat All and < or = to select between on the lower right side of the
Repeat Track. Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ faceplate and for vehicles with
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, a USB port, it is located in the
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey or Shuffle Folder. center console.
below " to repeat all tracks.
> (Shuffle Off): This is the Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
The tab appears lowered when
Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage Auxiliary Input Jack
default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected. The auxiliary input jack is located on
device or iPod is first connected. 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle the lower right side of the faceplate.
' (Repeat Track): Press the Songs): Shuffles all songs on the This is not an audio output; do not
USB storage device or iPod. plug a headphone set into the front
softkey below ' to repeat one auxiliary input jack. Connect an
track. The tab appears raised when < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles auxiliary input device such as an
Repeat Track is being used. all songs in the current album on
iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,
an iPod.
CD player, or cassette tape player,
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all etc. to the auxiliary input jack for
songs in the current folder on a USB use as another source for audio
storage device. listening.
Drivers are encouraged to CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to

. If an auxiliary input device is not
set up any auxiliary device select between CD, or Auxiliary. connected, and a disc is in both
while the vehicle is in P (Park). the DVD slot and the CD slot the
. When a CD is in the player DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 the CD icon and a message
for more information on driver between the two sources and
showing the disc and/or track does not indicate “No Aux Input
distraction. number displays. Device.”
To use an auxiliary input device, . If an auxiliary input device is not
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
. If a front auxiliary input device is
connected, “No Input Device connected, the DVD/CD AUX
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. Found” displays. button cycles through all
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press available options.
or counterclockwise to increase to select between DVD, CD,
or decrease the volume of the If a disc is inserted into top DVD
or Auxiliary. slot, the rear seat operator can turn
portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might have to be made . If an auxiliary input device is on the video screen and use the
from the portable device if the not connected, “No Aux Input remote control to only navigate
volume is not loud or soft enough. Device” displays. the CD tracks through the remote
. control.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio When a disc is in either slot, the
when a portable audio device is DVD/CD text tab and a message See “Using the Auxiliary Input
playing. The portable audio device showing the track or chapter Jack(s)” later in this section,
continues playing, so you might number displays. or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
want to stop it or turn it off. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
information.
Using the USB Port USB Supported Devices Rear Seat

For vehicles with a USB port, . USB Flash Drives
the connector is located in the
Infotainment
. Portable USB Hard Drives
instrument panel storage area.
See Instrument Panel Storage on
. Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Entertainment
page 4‑1 for more information. . iPod nanos (RSE) System
Radios with a USB port can control . iPod touch The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
a USB storage device or an iPod® .
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
using the radio buttons and knobs. iPod classic The RSE system works with the
See MP3 (Radios with CD/USB) on Not all iPods and USB Drives are vehicle's audio system. The DVD
page 7‑24 or MP3 (Radios with compatible with the USB port. player is part of the front radio.
CD/DVD) on page 7‑30 for The RSE system includes a radio
Make sure the iPod has the latest
information about how to connect with a DVD player, a video display
firmware from Apple® for proper
and control a USB storage device screen, audio/video jacks, two
operation. iPod firmware can be
or an iPod. wireless headphones, and a remote
updated using the latest iTunes®
application. See www.apple.com/ control. See Operation on page 7‑2
itunes. for more information on the vehicle's
infotainment system.
For help with identifying your iPod,
go to www.apple.com/support.
Before Driving Parental Control Headphones

The RSE is designed for rear seat The RSE system may have a
passengers only. The driver cannot Parental Control feature, depending
safely view the video screen while on the radio. To enable Parental
driving and should not try to do so. Control, press and hold the radio
In severe or extreme weather power button for more than
conditions the RSE system might or two seconds to stop all system
might not work until the temperature features such as: radio, video
is within the operating range. The screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
operating range for the RSE system While Parental Control is on,
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below Q displays.
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of When the radio is turned back on,
the vehicle is outside of this range, Parental Control is unlocked.
heat or cool the vehicle until the
A. Battery cover
temperature is within the operating
range of the RSE system. B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
C. Power button
D. Volume control
E. Power indicator light
The RSE includes two 2-channel To adjust the volume on the Notice: Do not store the
wireless headphones that are headphones, use the volume headphones in heat or direct
dedicated to this system. Channel 1 control located on the right side. sunlight. This could damage
is dedicated to the video screen, Infrared transmitters are located the headphones and repairs will
while Channel 2 is dedicated to at the rear of the RSE overhead not be covered by the warranty.
RSA selections. These headphones console. The headphones shut off Storage in extreme cold can
are used to listen to media such automatically to save the battery weaken the batteries. Keep the
as CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, power if the RSE system and RSA headphones stored in a cool,
DVD-As, radio, any auxiliary are shut off or if the headphones are dry place.
source connected to A/V jacks, out of range of the transmitters for If the foam ear pads attached to
or the auxiliary input jack, if the more than three minutes. Moving the headphones become worn or
vehicle has this feature. The too far forward or stepping out of the damaged, the pads can be replaced
wireless headphones have an vehicle, can cause the headphones separately from the headphone set.
On/Off button, channel 1 or 2 to lose the audio signal. To purchase replacement ear pads,
switch, and a volume control. call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
Switch the headphones to Off For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly. zero (0), or contact your dealer.
when not in use.
Headphones should be worn with Headphones should be stored in
Push the power button to turn on the headband over the top of the the front floor console and not in the
the headphones. An indicator light head for best audio reception. front seat back pocket. Headphone
located on the headphones comes The symbol L (Left) appears on damage can occur when the second
on. If the light does not come on, the outside bottom edge of the ear row seats are folded forward.
the batteries might need to be cup and should be positioned on
replaced. Intermittent sound or the left ear. The symbol R (Right)
static on the headphones can also appears on the outside bottom
be an indication of weak batteries. edge of the ear cup and should
See “Battery Replacement” later in be positioned on the right ear.
this section for more information.
Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks camcorder or a video game

To change the batteries on the unit to the RSE system. Adapter
headphones: connectors or cables (not supplied)
might be required to connect the
1. Turn the screw to loosen the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
battery door located on the Refer to the manufacturer’s
left side of the headphones. instructions for proper usage.
Slide the battery door open.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
2. Replace the two batteries in the supplied by the radio system.
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using To use the auxiliary inputs of the
the diagram on the inside of the RSE system, connect an external
battery compartment. auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
3. Replace the battery door and device and the video screen power
tighten the door screw. A. Yellow: Video Input on. If the video screen is in the
If the headphones are to be stored B. White: Left Audio Input DVD player mode, pressing the
for a long period of time, remove the C. Red: Right Audio Input AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote
batteries and keep them in a cool, control, switches the video screen
dry place. The A/V jacks are color coded to from the DVD player mode to the
match typical home entertainment auxiliary device. The radio can
system equipment. listen to the audio of the connected
The A/V jacks, located on the rear auxiliary device by sourcing to
of the floor console, allow audio auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on
or video signals to be connected page 7‑37 for more information.
from an auxiliary device such as a
How to Change the RSE Video The RSE system always Video Screen
Screen Settings transmits the audio signal to the
The video screen is located in the
The screen display mode (normal, wireless headphones, if there is
overhead console. When the video
full, and zoom), screen brightness, audio available. See “Headphones”
screen is not in use, push it up into
and setup menu language can be earlier in this section for more
its locked position.
changed from the on screen setup information.
To use the video screen:
menu by using the remote control. The DVD player is capable of
To change a setting: outputting audio to the wired 1. Push the release button located
headphone jacks on the RSA on the overhead console.
1. Press z. system, if the vehicle has this 2. Move the screen to the desired
2. Use n, q, p, o and r to feature. The DVD player can be position.
navigate and use the selected as an audio source on
the RSA system. See Rear Seat If a DVD is playing and the screen
setup menu. is raised to its locked position, the
Audio (RSA) System on page 7‑48
3. Press z again to remove the for more information. screen remains on; this is normal,
setup menu from the screen. and the DVD continues to play
When a device is connected to the through the previous audio source.
Audio Output A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this Press P on the remote control or
Audio from the DVD player or feature, the rear seat passengers eject the disc to turn off the screen.
auxiliary inputs can be heard are able to hear audio from the
through the following sources: auxiliary device through the wireless
. Wireless headphones or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to
. Vehicle speakers playback from this device through
. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks the vehicle speakers by selecting
on the RSA system, if the AUX as the source on the radio.
vehicle has this feature.
The infrared receivers for the desired button. Direct sunlight or Remote Control Buttons
wireless headphones and the very bright light could affect the O (Power): Press to turn the video
remote control are located at the ability of the RSE transmitter to screen on and off.
rear of the overhead console. receive signals from the remote
Notice: Avoid directly touching control. If the remote control P (Illumination): Press to turn
does not seem to be working, the the remote control backlight on.
the video screen, as damage may The backlight automatically times
occur. See “Cleaning the Video batteries might need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in out after seven to ten seconds if no
Screen” later in this section for other button is pressed while the
more information. this section. Objects blocking the
line of sight could also affect the backlight is on.
Remote Control function of the remote control. v (Title): Press to return the DVD
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This
slot, the remote control O button function could vary for each disc.
can be used to turn on the video y (Main Menu): Press to access
screen display and start the disc. the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
The radio can also turn on the video different on every DVD. Use the
screen display. See Operation on navigation arrows to move the
page 7‑2 for more information. cursor around the DVD menu.
Notice: Storing the remote After making a selection press
the enter button. This button only
control in a hot area or in direct
operates when using a DVD.
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
warranty. Storage in extreme cold Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
can weaken the batteries. Keep navigate through a menu.
To use the remote control, aim it at the remote control stored in a
the transmitter window at the rear of cool, dry place.
r (Enter): Press to select
the overhead console and press the the choice that is highlighted in
any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter): or CD, release [. This button might
the brightness, screen display mode Press to return to the start of the not work when the DVD is playing
(normal, full, or zoom), and display current track or chapter. Press the copyright information or the
the language menu. again to go to the previous track previews.
q (Return): Press to exit the or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing
e (Audio): Press to change audio
current active menu and return to tracks on DVDs that have this
the previous menu. This button the copyright information or the
feature when the DVD is playing.
operates only when the display previews.
The format and content of this
menu or a DVD menu is active. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press function vary for each disc.
c (Stop): to go to the beginning of the next
Press to stop playing,
chapter or track. This button might
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/
rewinding, or fast forwarding a OFF subtitles and to move through
DVD. Press twice to return to the not work when the DVD is playing
subtitle options when a DVD is
beginning of the DVD. the copyright information or the
playing. The format and content of
previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start this function vary for each disc.
playing a DVD. Press while a DVD r (Fast Reverse): Press to AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
is playing to pause it. Press again to quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
the system between the DVD player
continue playing the DVD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
and an auxiliary source.
press s. To stop fast reversing
When the DVD is playing,
a DVD audio or CD, release r.
2 (Camera): Press to change
depending on the radio, play may camera angles on DVDs that have
This button might not work when
be slowed down by pressing s this feature when a DVD is playing.
the DVD is playing the copyright The format and content of this
then [. The DVD continues playing information or the previews. function vary for each disc.
in a slow play mode. Depending on
the radio, perform reverse slow play [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast The numeric keypad provides the
by pressing s then r. To cancel
forwarding a DVD video, press s. capability of direct chapter or track
slow play mode, press s again. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio number selection.
\ (Clear): Press within If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the
three seconds after entering a batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place.
numeric selection, to clear all Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
numerical inputs.
Problem Recommended Action
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press
to select chapter or track numbers There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to
greater than nine. Press this button ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
before entering the number. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings
If the remote control becomes There are black borders on the top in the setup menu by pressing the
lost or damaged, a new universal and bottom or on both sides, or the display menu button on the remote
remote control can be purchased. picture looks stretched out. control.
If this happens, make sure the In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
universal remote control uses a or scrolls. connections at both devices.
Toshiba® code set.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
Battery Replacement obstruction between the remote
To change the remote control control and the transmitter window.
batteries: Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
1. Slide the rear cover back, on the incorrectly.
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
After stopping the player, and If the stop button was pressed one has. The video screen might display
pushing Play, sometimes the time, the DVD player resumes one of the following:
DVD starts where it left off and playing where the DVD was
sometimes at the beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This
pressed two times, the DVD player message displays when there are
begins to play from the beginning disc load or eject problems.
of the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message
The auxiliary source is running, Check that the RSE video screen displays if the disc is inserted with
but there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if
Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged.
connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region.
interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message
towers, or use a cellular telephone displays if no disc is present when
in the vehicle. the Z EJECT button is pressed on
Check that the headphones are the radio.
on correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones See your dealer for assistance.
are lost.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player.
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The front
Video distortion can occur when System
operating cellular phones, scanners, audio system displays X when the
For vehicles with Rear Seat RSA is on, and disappears from the
CB radios, Global Position Systems
Audio (RSA), rear seat passengers display when it is off.
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
can listen to and control any of
or walkie talkies. Audio can be heard through wired
the music sources: radio, CDs,
It might be necessary to turn off the DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. headphones (not included) plugged
DVD player when operating one of The rear seat passengers can only into the jacks on the RSA. If the
these devices in or near the vehicle. control the music sources the front vehicle has this feature, audio can
seat passengers are not listening to also be heard on Channel 2 of the
*Excludes the OnStar® System. wireless headphones.
(except on some radios where dual
Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example, The audio system mutes the rear
Console rear seat passengers can control speakers when the RSA audio is
a CD and listen to it through the active through the headphones.
When cleaning the RSE overhead
headphones, while the driver
console surface, use only a clean To listen to an iPod or portable
listens to the radio through the
cloth dampened with clean water. audio device through the RSA,
front speakers. The rear seat
attach the iPod or portable audio
Cleaning the Video Screen passengers have control of the
device to the front auxiliary input
volume for each set of headphones.
Use only a clean cloth dampened (if available), located on the front
with clean water. Use care when audio system. Turn the iPod on,
directly touching or cleaning the then choose the front auxiliary input
screen, as damage could result. with the RSA SRCE button.
with some radios, if the front seat PROG (Program): Press to go

passengers are listening to the to the next preset radio station
radio. or channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some
Press and hold © or ¨ until the radios, if the front seat passengers
display flashes to tune to an are listening to the radio.
individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons When a CD or DVD audio disc is
have not been pushed for more playing, press PROG to go to the
than two seconds. This function is beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA inactive, with some radios, if the
radios, if the front seat passengers
on or off. front seat passengers are listening
to the radio. are listening to the disc.
Volume: Turn to increase or to
When a disc is playing in the CD
decrease the volume of the wired While listening to a disc, press ¨ to
or DVD changer, press PROG to
headphones. The left knob controls go to the next track or chapter on select the next disc, if multiple discs
the left headphones and the right the disc. Press © to go back to the are loaded. This function is inactive,
knob controls the right headphones. start of the current track or chapter with some radios, if the front seat
SRCE (Source): Press to select (if more than ten seconds have passengers are listening to the disc.
between the radio (AM/FM), played). This function is inactive,
When a DVD video menu is being
CD, and if the vehicle has these with some radios, if the front seat
displayed, press PROG to perform
features, DVD, front auxiliary, passengers are listening to the disc.
the ENTER menu function.
and rear auxiliary. When a DVD video menu is being
© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the displayed, press © or ¨ to perform
previous or to the next station and a cursor up or down on the menu.
stay there. This function is inactive,
Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
Rear Audio © SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK Phone

Controller (RAC) arrows to go to the previous or to
the next radio station while in AM or Bluetooth
FM. Press the SEEK arrows to go to
the previous or to the next track or For vehicles equipped with
chapter while sourced to a CD or Bluetooth capability, the system
DVD slot. can interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
SRCE (Source): Press this
button to switch between the radio, . Placement and receipt of calls in
CD, and if the vehicle has these a hands-free mode.
The vehicle may have the Rear features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
Audio Controller (RAC). Certain
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
rear auxiliary. address book or contact list
radio functions can be controlled
with RAC. > (Mute): Press this button to with the vehicle.
silence the system. Press this To minimize driver distraction,
x w (Next/Previous): Press the button again, or any other radio
down or up arrows to go to the next before driving, and with the vehicle
button, to turn the sound on. parked:
or to the previous radio station
stored as a favorite. + / − x (Volume): Press the plus or . Become familiar with the
When a CD/DVD is playing, press minus volume buttons to increase or features of the cell phone.
the down or up arrows to go to the to decrease the volume. Organize the phone book and
next or previous track or chapter. contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.

. Review the controls and Voice Recognition
operation of the infotainment WARNING (Continued)
and navigation system. The Bluetooth system uses voice
(navigation) system. Taking recognition to interpret voice
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. commands to dial phone numbers
The system may not work with your eyes off the road too long
and name tags.
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in or too often could cause a crash
this section for more information. resulting in injury or death. Focus For additional information, say
your attention on driving. “Help” while you are in a voice
. If the cell phone has voice recognition menu.
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the A Bluetooth system can use a Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
address book or contact list. Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a minimum. The system may not
See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this a Hands‐Free Profile to make and recognize voice commands if there
section for more information. receive phone calls. The system is too much background noise.
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone can be used while the key is in the When to Speak: A short tone
Numbers” in this section for ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY sounds after the system responds
more information. position. The range of the Bluetooth indicating when it is waiting for a
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). voice command. Wait until the tone
Not all phones support all functions, and then speak.
{ WARNING and not all phones are guaranteed
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
When using a cell phone, it can calm and natural voice.
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
be distracting to look too long for more information on compatible
or too often at the screen of phones.
the phone or the infotainment
(Continued)
Audio System Pairing

. Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
When using the in‐vehicle A Bluetooth cell phone must be system at a time.
Bluetooth system, sound comes paired to the Bluetooth system
through the vehicle's front audio and then connected to the vehicle
. If multiple paired cell phones
system speakers and overrides before it can be used. See the cell are within range of the system,
the audio system. Use the audio phone manufacturer's user guide for the system connects to the first
system volume knob, during a Bluetooth functions before pairing available paired cell phone in the
call, to change the volume level. the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone order that they were first paired
The adjusted volume level remains is not connected, calls will be made to the system. To connect to a
in memory for later calls. To prevent using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling, different paired phone, see
missed calls, a minimum volume if equipped. Refer to the OnStar “Connecting to a Different
level is used if the volume is turned Owner's Guide for more information. Phone” later in this section.
down too low. Pairing a Phone
Pairing Information
Bluetooth Controls . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b g for
Use the buttons located on the paired to the Bluetooth system. two seconds.
steering wheel to operate the . The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. when the vehicle is moving.
See Steering Wheel Controls on 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
. Pairing only needs to be with instructions and a four‐digit
completed once, unless the Personal Identification Number
b g (Push To Talk): Press to pairing information on the cell (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
answer incoming calls, confirm phone changes or the cell phone
system information, and start is deleted from the system.
speech recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
operation.
4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
cell phone that you want to pair. Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
the cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
5. Locate the device named “Your system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending
Vehicle” in the list on the cell after that phone name. on which cell phone you want to
phone. Follow the instructions connect to, you may have to use
on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press and hold b g for this command several times.
PIN that was provided in Step 3. two seconds.
After the PIN is successfully 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
1. Press and hold b g for
entered, the system prompts you two seconds.
to provide a name for the paired 3. Say “List.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
cell phone. This name will be Deleting a Paired Phone
used to indicate which phones 3. Say “Change phone.”
are paired and connected to the If the phone name you want to . If another cell phone is
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be
and Connected Phones” later in Paired and Connected Phones.” “<Phone name> is now
this section for more information. 1. Press and hold b g for connected.”
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
additional phones. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
remains connected.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a
Numbers time, that you want to store.
1. Press and hold b g for After each digit is entered, the
The system can store up to two seconds. system repeats back the digit it
30 phone numbers as name tags heard followed by a tone. After
2. Say “Store.”
in the Hands‐Free Directory that the last digit has been entered,
is shared between the Bluetooth 3. Say the phone number or group say “Store,” and then follow the
and OnStar systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store directions given by the system to
all at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the
to delete and store phone numbers.
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command
Store: This command will store this number.
a phone number, or a group of 1. Press and hold b g for
numbers as a name tag. Using the “Digit Store” Command two seconds.
Digit Store: This command allows If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.”
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the 3. Say the name tag you want to
name tag by entering the digits one delete.
at a time. last number.
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Delete: This command is used to Command
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
Delete All Name Tags: This name tags in the Hands‐Free
command deletes all stored 1. Press and hold b g for Calling Directory and the OnStar
name tags in the Hands‐Free two seconds. Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
Calling Directory and the OnStar 2. Say “Digit Store.” if equipped.
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped.
To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows If an unwanted number is
a phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
1. Press and hold b g for entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the
two seconds. last number.
Re‐dial: This command is used to
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers
Listing Stored Numbers phone. recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
numbers and name tags. Command 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
1. Press and hold b g for 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
two seconds. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
that you want to dial. After each
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the
4. Say “List.” will be heard through the audio last digit has been entered,
speakers. say “Dial.”
Making a Call
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called
Calls can be made using the
will be heard through the audio
following commands. The digit dial command allows a
speakers.
Dial or Call: The dial or phone number to be dialed by
call command can be used entering the digits one at a time.
interchangeably to dial a phone After each digit is entered, the
number or a stored name tag. system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command Call Waiting Three‐Way Calling

1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on Three‐way calling must be
two seconds. the cell phone and enabled by the supported on the cell phone and
wireless service carrier. enabled by the wireless service
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” carrier.
Once connected, the person called
. Press b g to answer an
will be heard through the audio incoming call when another call 1. While on a call, press b g.
speakers. is active. The original call is 2. Say “Three‐way call.”
placed on hold.
Receiving a Call 3. Use the dial or call command to
. Press b g again to return to the dial the number of the third party
When an incoming call is received, original call. to be called.
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
. To ignore the incoming call, no 4. Once the call is connected,
action is required. press b g to link all callers
. Press b g to answer the call. together.
. Press c x to disconnect the
. Press c x to ignore a call. current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Ending a Call Transferring Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Press c x to end a call. Voice pass‐thru allows access to
During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on
Muting a Call vehicle: the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
During a call, all sounds from inside 1. Press b g. the cell phone supports this feature.
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call 2. Say “Transfer Call.” To access contacts stored in the cell
cannot hear them. Transferring Audio to the phone:
Bluetooth System from a Cell
. To mute a call, press b g, and Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
then say “Mute call.” two seconds.
During a call with the audio on the
. To cancel mute, press b g, and 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
cell phone, press b g. The audio responds “Bluetooth ready,”
then say “Un‐mute call.”
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio followed by a tone.
Transferring a Call does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on 3. Say “Voice.” The system
Audio can be transferred between the cell phone. See your cell phone responds “OK, accessing
the Bluetooth system and the cell manufacturer's user guide for more <phone name>.”
phone. information. The cell phone's normal prompt
The cell phone must be paired messages will go through their cycle
and connected with the Bluetooth according to the phone's operating
system before a call can be instructions.
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out
The Bluetooth system can send of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
numbers and the numbers stored it will be retained indefinitely.
as name tags during a call. This includes all saved name tags in
You can use this feature when the phone book and phone pairing
calling a menu‐driven phone information. For information on how
system. Account numbers can to delete this information, see the
also be stored for use. previous section “Deleting a Paired
Phone” and the previous sections
Sending a Number or Name Tag on deleting name tags.
During a Call
Other Information
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by The Bluetooth® word mark and
a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
2. Say “Dial.” by General Motors is under license.
3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names
to send. are those of their respective owners.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control
System (Rear Climate
Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
System (Rear Climate with
Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air A. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 way counterclockwise to turn the
B. Temperature Control
front climate control system off.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
D. Air Conditioning or counterclockwise to increase or
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) decrease the fan speed.
F. Recirculation
G. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the 0 (Defrost): This clears the
clockwise or counterclockwise floor outlets, with some of the air windshield of fog or frost, more
to increase or decrease the directed to the windshield, side quickly. Air is directed to the
temperature of the air flowing window, and second row floor windshield and side window vents,
from the system. outlets. In this mode, the system with some to the floor vents. In this
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. mode, outside air is pulled inside
clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be
change the current airflow mode. while in floor mode. selected while in the defrost mode.
- (Defog): This clears the The air conditioning system runs
By positioning the right knob automatically in this setting, unless
between two modes, a combination windows of fog or moisture.
Air is directed to the windshield, the outside temperature is less than
of those two modes is selected. 4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle
floor outlets, and side window
H (Vent): Air is directed to the vents. When this mode is selected, until all the windows are clear.
instrument panel outlets. the system turns off recirculation # (Air Conditioning): Press to
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided and runs the air conditioning unless turn the air conditioning system on
between the instrument panel the outside temperature is less than or off. An indicator light comes on
and floor outlets. Some air is 4°C (40°F). Recirculation cannot be when A/C is on. The air conditioning
directed towards the windshield selected while in the defog mode. system does not operate when
and side window outlets. Cooler Do not drive the vehicle until all the outside temperature is below
air is directed to the upper outlets the windows are clear. 4°C (40°F). The indicator light
and warmer air to the floor outlets. flashes three times and turns off
when outside conditions affect air
conditioning operation. This is
normal.
For quicker cool down on hot days: @ (Recirculation): Press to turn REAR (Rear Climate Control):
1. Open the windows to let hot air the recirculation mode on or off. Press to turn the rear heating
escape. An indicator light comes on when and air conditioning on or off.
recirculation is on. When the engine See Rear Climate Control System
2. Select H mode. is turned off, the recirculation mode (Rear Climate Control Only) on
automatically turns off and must page 8‑10 or Rear Climate Control
3. Select #. be re‐selected when the engine System (Rear Climate with Rear
4. Select the coolest temperature. is turned on again. Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.
5. Select the highest fan speed. This mode recirculates and helps Rear Window Defogger
to quickly cool the air inside the The rear window defogger uses a
6. Close the windows after the hot
vehicle. It can be used to prevent warming grid to remove fog from
air has escaped.
outside air and odors from entering the rear window.
7. Once the vehicle's interior the vehicle.
temperature is below the outside
The recirculation mode cannot be
< (Rear Window Defogger):
temperature, select @ mode Press to turn the rear window
used with floor, defrost, or defogging defogger on or off. The rear
for faster cooling. modes. If recirculation is selected in window defogger stays on
Using recirculation for long periods these modes, the indicator flashes for about 10 minutes, before
of time could cause the air inside three times and turns off. The air automatically turning off.
of the vehicle to become too dry. To conditioning also comes on when The defogger will also turn off
prevent this from happening, after this mode is activated unless the when the engine is turned off.
the inside of the vehicle has cooled, outside air temperature is less than
turn the recirculation mode off. 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation Do not drive the vehicle until all the
mode the windows can fog when windows are clear.
The air conditioning system the weather is cold and damp.
removes moisture from the air, To clear the fog, select either the
so water might drip under the defog or defrost mode and increase
vehicle while idling or after turning the fan speed.
off the engine. This is normal.
For vehicles with heated outside Dual Automatic Climate Control System
rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
cleared from the surface of the The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
mirror when < is pressed. this system.
Notice: Do not use anything

sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid,
and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
A. Fan Control H. Display

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation) I. Power (On/Off)
C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger
D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger)
F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature
G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control
Display Function Automatic Operation quickly cool the vehicle.

Each time the temperature, mode, The recirculation indicator
AUTO (Automatic): The system
or fan control buttons are pressed, light will come on.
automatically controls the inside
the climate control display shows temperature, the air delivery, and 2. Set the temperature for the
that function along with the inside the fan speed. driver and passenger.
temperature setting. The outside To find a comfortable setting,
To use automatic mode:
temperature is displayed on the start with a 22°C (73°F)
instrument panel cluster. 1. Press the AUTO button.
temperature setting and
O (On/Off): Press to turn the When AUTO is selected, allow about 20 minutes
climate control system on or off. the current temperature(s) for the system to regulate.
While the system is off, outside air selected and AUTO is shown Use the driver's side or
still enters through the floor outlets, on the display. The current air passenger side temperature
but the air delivery mode can be delivery mode and fan speed buttons to adjust the
adjusted. also appear for approximately temperature setting as
five seconds. necessary. The system will
The climate control system will
also turn on if either the fan control, When AUTO is selected, remain at the selected setting.
defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning the air conditioning and air Choosing the warmest or
buttons are pressed. inlet are automatically controlled. coolest temperatures does
The air conditioning runs when not cause the vehicle to heat
the outside temperature is over or cool more quickly.
4°C (40°F). The system is To avoid blowing cold air in
automatically set to outside cold weather, the system delays
air, unless it is hot outside and turning on the fan until warm
then the air inlet changes to air is available. Press the fan
recirculation mode to help control to override this delay
and select the fan speed.
Temperature Control PASS (Passenger): Press to H / G (Air Delivery Mode

The driver and passenger side set the passenger temperature Control): Press to change the
temperature buttons are used to match the driver temperature direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
to adjust the temperature of the setting. The PASS indicator will Repeatedly press H or G until
air coming through the system. turn off. When the passenger
the desired mode appears on the
The temperature can be adjusted temperature setting is different
display. Pressing a mode button
even if the system is turned than the driver setting, the PASS
while the system is off changes the
off since outside air still enters indicator comes on.
air delivery mode without turning
the vehicle, unless the Manual Operation the system on. Press a mode button
recirculation mode is selected. while in automatic control to place
See “Recirculation” later in this The air delivery mode or fan speed the system into manual control.
section. can be manually adjusted.
The air delivery mode setting still
Driver Side Temperature D / C (Fan Control): Press to displays, but the word AUTO no
Control: Press the + or − buttons increase or decrease the fan speed. longer displays, and the AUTO
to increase or decrease the driver Pressing D or C while in automatic button indicator light turns off.
side temperature. The driver side
temperature display will show the
control places the fan speed under H (Vent): Air is directed to the
manual control. instrument panel outlets.
temperature setting.
Passenger Side Temperature
The air delivery mode remains in ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
automatic control. The fan setting between the instrument panel and
Control: Press the + or − buttons still displays, but the word AUTO floor outlets. Some air is directed
to increase or decrease the no longer displays, and the AUTO towards the windshield and side
passenger side temperature. button indicator light turns off. window outlets. Cooler air is
The passenger side display will
directed to the upper outlets and
show the temperature setting.
warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the inside the vehicle. The air Air Conditioning
floor outlets, with some of the air conditioning system runs
automatically in this setting,
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
directed to the windshield, side turn the air conditioning (A/C) on
window, and second row floor unless the outside temperature
and off. An indicator light comes
outlets. In this mode, the system is less than 4°C (40°F).
on when A/C is on.
uses outside air. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
The A/C does not work when the
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows are clear.
outside temperature is below 4°C
windows of fog or moisture. Air is While in defrost mode, if the (40°F). If # is pressed the indicator
directed to the windshield, floor PASS button is pressed, the
outlets, and side window vents. flashes three times and turns off
PASS button indicator flashes three to show that the A/C mode is not
When this mode is selected, the times to show that the passenger
system turns off recirculation and available. If the A/C is on and the
climate control system cannot outside temperature drops below a
runs the air conditioning compressor be activated. If the passenger
unless the outside temperature is temperature which is too cool for air
temperature buttons are adjusted conditioning to be effective, the A/C
less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive while in defrost mode, the driver
the vehicle until all the windows are indicator turns off to show that the
temperature indicator will change. A/C mode has been canceled.
clear. The passenger temperature will
0 (Defrost): Press to turn the not be displayed. On hot days, open the windows
defrost on or off. This mode quickly briefly to let hot inside air escape.
When returning to bi-level, vent, This helps reduce the time it takes
clears the windshield of fog or frost. or floor mode, the previous
Air is directed to the windshield, for the interior of the vehicle to
temperature settings displays in cool down.
side window, and floor vents. place of any change made while
In this mode, outside air is pulled in defrost mode.
The air conditioning system The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger
removes moisture from the air, so used with floor, defog, or defrosting
The rear window defogger uses a
water might drip under the vehicle modes. If recirculation is selected in
warming grid to remove fog from the
while idling or after turning off the these modes, the indicator flashes
rear window.
engine. This is normal. three times and turns off. The air
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn conditioning compressor also comes < (Rear Window Defogger):
on when this mode is activated. Press to turn the rear window
the recirculation mode on or off.
While in recirculation mode the defogger on or off. The rear
An indicator light comes on when
windows can fog when the weather window defogger stays on for
recirculation is on. When the engine
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, about 10 minutes, before turning
is turned off, the recirculation mode
select either the defog or defrost off. The defogger also turns off
automatically turns off and must
mode and increase the fan speed. when the engine is turned off.
be re‐selected when the engine is
Do not drive the vehicle until
turned on again. REAR: Press to turn the rear
all the windows are clear.
This mode recirculates and helps heating and air conditioning on
or off. See Rear Climate Control For vehicles with heated outside
to quickly cool the air inside the
System (Rear Climate Control Only) rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
vehicle. It can be used to prevent
on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate cleared from the surface of the
outside air and odors from entering
Control System (Rear Climate with mirror when the rear window
the vehicle.
Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11. defog button is pressed.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Sensors There is also an exterior

temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor
reads the outside air temperature
and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on
the front of the vehicle could cause
a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The climate control system uses
the information from these sensors
to maintain comfort settings by
The interior temperature sensor adjusting the temperature, fan
located on the instrument panel to speed, and the air delivery mode.
The solar sensor, located in the the right of the steering column, The system may also supply cooler
defrost grille in the middle of the measures the temperature of the air to the side of the vehicle facing
instrument panel, monitors the solar air inside the vehicle. the sun. The recirculation mode will
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain
or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures.
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
Control Only) according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to 9 to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change the
A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front airflow direction.
B. Temperature Control climate control system to turn the H (Vent): Air is directed through
rear climate control system on or the overhead outlets.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control off. An indicator comes on when the
rear system is on. The system also ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
For vehicles with the rear climate
turns on if any of the rear controls through the rear floor outlets,
control system, the controls are
are adjusted. as well as the overhead outlets.
located on the rear of the center
console. The system can also be Mimic Mode: This mode matches 6 (Floor): Air is directed through
controlled with the front controls. the rear climate control to the front the floor outlets. The rear system
climate control settings. It comes on floor outlets are located under the
when REAR is pressed. third row seats.
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear The system can also be turned
off, by pressing and holding
Seat Audio)
the C button.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control settings. It comes on
when REAR is pressed.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the
rear controls. It comes on when
any rear control is adjusted.
D C (Fan Control): Press the fan
up or down buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front Temperature Control: Press +
B. Air Delivery Mode Control climate control system to turn the or − to increase or decrease
rear climate control system on or the air temperature. The
C. Temperature Control off. The system also turns on if temperature settings will display
For vehicles with the rear climate any of the rear controls, except for in 0‐12 increments, going from
control system, the controls are the C are pressed. An indicator the coolest (0) to the warmest (12)
located on the rear of the center comes on when the rear system setting.
console. is on.

. Use of non-GM approved hood
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents deflectors can adversely affect
Press to manually change the
Use the slider switch in the center of the performance of the system.
direction of the airflow. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction . Keep the path under all seats
mode appears on the display. of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel clear of objects to help circulate
near the outlet to control the amount the air inside the vehicle more
H (Vent): Air is directed through of air flow or to shut off the airflow. effectively.
the overhead outlets.
Keep all outlets open whenever . If fogging reoccurs while in
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system vent or bi-level modes with
through the rear floor outlets, as performance. mild temperature throughout
well as the overhead outlets.
Operation Tips the vehicle, turn on the air
6 (Floor): Air is directed through conditioner to reduce windshield
the floor outlets. The rear system . Clear away any ice, snow, fogging.
floor outlets are located under the or leaves from the air inlets at
third row seats. the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen,
and other airborne irritants from
outside air and inside air when in
recirculation mode.
To find out what type of replacement
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9. 2. Twist the compartment 5. Squeeze the housing cover (A)
1. Open the glove box. retainers (A) and pull outward tabs to remove.
to remove. 6. Remove the old air filter from the
3. Lower the instrument panel passenger compartment air filter
compartment assembly (B) housing (B).
beyond the stops. 7. Install the new air filter.
4. If needed, unsnap 8. Replace the housing cover.
the instrument panel
compartment assembly (B) 9. If removed, re‐install the
from the instrument panel. instrument panel compartment
When re-installing, be sure the assembly.
instrument panel compartment 10. Re‐install the compartment
dampener arm is aligned retainers.
properly to the dampener
gear assembly. See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-35
Operating Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Engine Exhaust Fuel
Driving Information Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission California Fuel
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Filling a Portable Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Brakes
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Antilock Brake Towing
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 General Towing
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Starting and Operating Driving Characteristics and
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Ride Control Systems Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Retained Accessory Cruise Control Conversions and Add-Ons
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information WARNING (Continued)

Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means “always anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected.” The first possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
page 3‑16. Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
Drunk Driving vehicle-related deaths involve
{ WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
Assume that other road users { WARNING deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than
drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by the use of alcohol, with about
In addition: even a small amount of alcohol. 250,000 people injured.
. Allow enough following You can have a serious — or For persons under 21, it is against
distance between you and even fatal — collision if you drive the law in every U.S. state to drink
the driver in front of you. after drinking. Do not drink and alcohol. There are good medical,
. Focus on the task of driving. drive or ride with a driver who has psychological, and developmental
been drinking. Ride home in a reasons for these laws.
(Continued)
cab; or if you are with a group,
The obvious way to eliminate the
designate a driver who will not leading highway safety problem is
drink. for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping

alcohol in a person's system distances vary greatly with the
can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on surface of the road, whether it is
especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑20. pavement or gravel; the condition
spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
that when anyone who has been perception time and reaction or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking — driver or passenger — is time. Deciding to push the brake brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of pedal is perception time. Actually and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled doing it is reaction time. applied.
is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy
been drinking. Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. braking. Some people drive in
But that is only an average. spurts — heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle It might be less with one driver followed by heavy braking — rather
The following three systems and as long as two or three seconds than keeping pace with traffic.
help to control the vehicle while or more with another. Age, physical This is a mistake. The brakes
driving — brakes, steering, and condition, alertness, coordination, might not have time to cool between
accelerator. At times, as when and eyesight all play a part. So do hard stops. The brakes will wear
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. out much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems But even in three‐fourths of a braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide. second, a vehicle moving at traffic and allowing realistic following
Meaning, you can lose control of the 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m distances eliminates a lot of
vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on (66 ft). That could be a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
page 9‑31. distance in an emergency, so better braking and longer brake life.
keeping enough space between
Adding non‐dealer accessories
the vehicle and others is important.
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
If the engine ever stops while Steering Steering Tips

the vehicle is being driven, brake
Power Steering It is important to take curves at a
normally but do not pump the
reasonable speed.
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, If power steering assist is lost
the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or Traction in a curve depends on
down. If the engine stops, there will the power steering system is not the condition of the tires and the
still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be road surface, the angle at which the
it will be used when the brake is steered but it will take more effort. curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
applied. Once the power assist is While in a curve, speed is the one
used up, it can take longer to stop Variable Effort Steering factor that can be controlled.
and the brake pedal will be harder If there is a need to reduce speed,
The vehicle has a steering system
to push. do it before entering the curve, while
that continuously adjusts the effort
Adding non‐dealer accessories felt when steering at all vehicle the front wheels are straight.
can affect vehicle performance. speeds. It provides ease when Try to adjust the speed so you can
See Accessories and Modifications parking, yet a firm, solid feel at drive through the curve. Maintain a
on page 10‑3. highway speeds. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering The vehicle's right wheels can drop
can be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
For example, you come over a hill shoulder while driving.
and find a truck stopped in your
lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at
The vehicle can perform very the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
well in emergencies like these. positions, it can be turned a full
First apply the brakes. See Braking 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is
on page 9‑3. It is better to remove only slightly below the pavement,
as much speed as possible from to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy.
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Ease off the accelerator and Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
then, if there is nothing in the water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
way, steer so that the vehicle material is on the road. For safety,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
straddles the edge of the pavement. slow down and adjust your driving
most skids by taking reasonable
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm to these conditions. It is important
care suited to existing conditions,
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, to slow down on slippery surfaces
and by not overdriving those
until the right front tire contacts because stopping distance is longer
conditions. But skids are always
the pavement edge. Then turn the and vehicle control more limited.
possible.
steering wheel to go straight down While driving on a surface with
the roadway. The three types of skids
reduced traction, try to avoid
correspond to the vehicle's three
sudden steering, acceleration,
Loss of Control control systems. In the braking skid,
or braking, including reducing
the wheels are not rolling. In the
Let us review what driving experts vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much
say about what happens when the gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes
three control systems — brakes, cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
steering, and acceleration — do not not realize the surface is slippery
And in the acceleration skid, too
have enough friction where the tires until the vehicle is skidding. Learn
much throttle causes the driving
meet the road to do what the driver to recognize warning clues — such
wheels to spin.
has asked. as enough water, ice, or packed
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease snow on the road to make a
In any emergency, do not give up. your foot off the accelerator pedal mirrored surface — and slow
Keep trying to steer and constantly and quickly steer the way you down when you have any doubt.
seek an escape route or area of want the vehicle to go. If you start
less danger. Remember: Antilock brakes help
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid.
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Rain and wet roads can reduce slow down when the road is wet.
vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through Other Rainy Weather Tips
Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the Besides slowing down, other wet
of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this weather driving tips include:
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
. Allow extra following distance.
deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be . Pass with caution.
{ WARNING very cautious about trying to . Keep windshield wiping
drive through flowing water. equipment in good shape.
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in . Keep the windshield washer fluid
a quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning reservoir filled.
pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Have good tires with proper
lose control of the vehicle. can build up under the vehicle's tread depth. See Tires on
After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the page 10‑38.
water. This can happen if the road
puddle of water or a car/vehicle . Turn off cruise control.
is wet enough and you are going
wash, lightly apply the brake fast enough. When the vehicle is
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no
normally. contact with the road.
(Continued)
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads

{ WARNING
Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through
to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the
If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they
a safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would
and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in then have poor braking or even
Other driving tips include: good shape. none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep
. Keep interior temperature cool. tires, cooling system, and downhill slope.
transmission.
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
. Check the rearview mirror and { WARNING
vehicle instruments often.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will
have to do all the work of slowing
down and they could get so hot
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑29 improves vehicle
Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
that they would not work well. slippery roads, but apply the brakes
Drive carefully when there is
You would then have poor braking snow or ice between the tires sooner than when on dry pavement.
or even none going down a hill. and the road, creating less traction Allow greater following distance on
You could crash. Always have the or grip. Wet ice can occur at about any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. begins to fall, resulting in even less occur on otherwise clear roads in
traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or shaded areas. The surface of a
. Stay in your own lane. Do not in freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain
swing wide or cut across the treated with salt or sand. icy when the surrounding roads
center of the road. Drive at Drive with caution, whatever the are clear. Avoid sudden steering
speeds that let you stay in condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
your own lane. traction is not lost. Accelerating on ice.
. Top of hills: Be too quickly causes the wheels to Turn off cruise control on slippery
alert — something could spin and makes the surface under surfaces.
be in your lane (stalled car, the tires slick, so there is even less
accident). traction.
. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
appropriate action.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑24.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside.
not collect there. CO could overcome you and kill
. Turn on the hazard warning
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
flashers. . Open a window about
5 cm (2 in) on the side of so you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
the vehicle that is away from
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
the wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains be careful.
circulates the air inside
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which the vehicle and set the fan
cannot be seen or smelled. It can speed to the highest setting.
cause unconsciousness and even See Climate Control System
death. in the Index.
(Continued) (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm { WARNING
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and
until help arrives but only when you you or others could be injured.
If the vehicle has a traction system,
feel really uncomfortable from the it can often help to free a stuck The vehicle can overheat,
cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's causing an engine compartment
also helps. traction system in the Index. If stuck fire or other damage. Spin the
too severely for the traction system wheels as little as possible and
If it takes some time for help to
to free the vehicle, turn the traction avoid going above 55 km/h
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator system off and use the rocking (35 mph).
pedal slightly so the engine method.
runs faster than the idle speed. For information about using tire
This keeps the battery charged to chains on the vehicle, see Tire
restart the vehicle and to signal for Chains on page 10‑60.
help with the headlamps. Do this
as little as possible to save fuel.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits

it Out { WARNING
It is very important to know
Turn the steering wheel left and how much weight your vehicle Do not load the vehicle
right to clear the area around the can carry. This weight is called any heavier than the
front wheels. Turn off any traction Gross Vehicle Weight
the vehicle capacity weight
or stability system. Shift back and Rating (GVWR), or either the
forth between R (Reverse) and a and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross
forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
transmission wear, wait until the Two labels on your vehicle This can cause systems to
wheels stop spinning before shifting show how much weight it may break and change the way the
gears. Release the accelerator properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
pedal while shifting, and press Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
lightly on the accelerator pedal the Certification/Tire label. crash. Overloading can also
when the transmission is in gear. shorten the life of the vehicle.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that
could free the vehicle. If that
does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing
the Vehicle on page 10‑87.
Tire and Loading Information number of occupant seating Steps for Determining Correct
Label positions (A), and the maximum Load Limit
vehicle capacity weight (B) in 1. Locate the statement
kilograms and pounds. “The combined weight of
The Tire and Loading occupants and cargo should
Information label also shows the never exceed XXX kg or
size of the original equipment XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
tires (C) and the recommended placard.
cold tire inflation pressures (D). 2. Determine the combined
For more information on tires weight of the driver and
and inflation see Tires on passengers that will be
page 10‑38 and Tire Pressure riding in your vehicle.
on page 10‑45.
Example Label 3. Subtract the combined
There is also important loading weight of the driver and
A vehicle specific Tire and information on the vehicle passengers from XXX kg
Loading Information label is Certification/Tire label. It tells or XXX lbs.
attached to the center pillar you the Gross Vehicle Weight
(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
With the driver's door open, Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
you will find the label attached for the front and rear axle.
below the door lock post See “Certification/Tire Label”
(striker). The tire and loading later in this section.
information label shows the
4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing

the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your
and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to
For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this
amount equals 1400 lbs manual to determine how this
and there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity
the amount of available cargo for your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 for important information on
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs). towing a trailer, towing safety
5. Determine the combined rules and trailering tips. Example 1
weight of luggage and cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
being loaded on the vehicle. for Example 1 = 453 kg
That weight may not safely (1,000 lbs).
exceed the available cargo
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
and luggage load capacity
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
calculated in Step 4.
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Refer to your vehicle's tire and

loading information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo C. Available Cargo
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification/
Tire label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver's door.
The label shows the gross Never exceed the GVWR for Notice : Overloading the
weight capacity of your your vehicle or the GAWR for vehicle may cause damage.
vehicle. This is called the Gross either the front or rear axle. Repairs would not be covered
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). by the vehicle warranty.
The GVWR includes the weight { WARNING Do not overload the vehicle.
of the vehicle, all occupants, If you put things inside your
fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle
any heavier than the Gross vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
The Certification/Tire label also Vehicle Weight Rating packages, or anything else,
tells you the maximum weights (GVWR), or either the they will go as fast as the
for the front and rear axles, maximum front or rear Gross vehicle goes. If you have to
called the Gross Axle Weight Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). stop or turn quickly, or if there
Rating (GAWR). To find out the This can cause systems to is a crash, they will keep going.
actual loads on your front and break and change the way the
rear axles, you need to go to a vehicle handles. This could { WARNING
weigh station and weigh your cause loss of control and a
vehicle. Your dealer can help Things you put inside the
crash. Overloading can also vehicle can strike and injure
you with this. Be sure to spread shorten the life of the vehicle.
out your load equally on both people in a sudden stop or
sides of the centerline. turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
(Continued)

. Avoid making hard stops for
WARNING (Continued) Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles)
Operating or so. During this time the
. Never stack heavier new brake linings are not
things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In yet broken in. Hard stops
inside the vehicle so that with new linings can mean
some of them are above Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
the tops of the seats. need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this
will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every
. Do not leave an if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake
unsecured child restraint . If you have all-wheel drive, linings.
in the vehicle. keep your speed at 88 km/h . Do not tow a trailer during
. When you carry something (55 mph) or less for the first break-in. See Driving
inside the vehicle, secure 805 km (500 miles). Characteristics and Towing
it whenever you can. . Do not drive at any one Tips on page 9‑47 for the
constant speed, fast or trailer towing capabilities
. Do not leave a seat folded slow, for the first 805 km of your vehicle and more
down unless you need to. (500 miles). Do not make information.
full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed
downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually
slow the vehicle. increased.
Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the In an emergency:

key to turn in the ignition could 1. Brake using a firm and steady
cause damage to the switch or pressure. Do not pump the
break the key. Use the correct brakes repeatedly. This may
key, make sure it is all the way in, deplete power assist, requiring
and turn it only with your hand. increased brake pedal force.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ vehicle is moving. After shifting
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
stopped, turn the ignition switch to brakes and steer the vehicle to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. a safe location.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
Accessory Power (RAP) on to P (Park), and turn the ignition
The ignition switch has four different to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
page 9‑21.
positions. an automatic transmission, the
This position locks the ignition shift lever must be in P (Park) to
In order to shift out of P (Park),
and transmission. The key can turn the ignition switch to the
the ignition must be in ON/RUN or
be removed in LOCK/OFF. LOCK/OFF position.
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal must be applied. Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake.
vehicle is moving. This will cause See Parking Brake on
a loss of power assist in the brake page 9‑30.
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
The steering can bind with the If you leave the key in the Starting Procedure
wheels turned off center. If this ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN 1. With your foot off the accelerator
happens, move the steering wheel position with the engine off, the pedal, turn the ignition to START.
from right to left while turning the battery could be drained. You may When the engine starts, let go
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this not be able to start the vehicle if of the key. The idle speed
doesn't work, then the vehicle the battery is allowed to drain for will slow down as the engine
needs service. an extended period of time. warms. Do not race the engine
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This / (START): This is the position immediately after starting it.
is the position in which you can that starts the engine. When the Operate the engine and
operate the electrical accessories engine starts, release the key. transmission gently to allow
or items plugged into the accessory The ignition switch will return to the oil to warm up and lubricate
power outlets. This position unlocks ON/RUN for driving. all moving parts.
the ignition and steering wheel. Use The vehicle has a
this position if the vehicle must be Starting the Engine Computer-Controlled
pushed or towed. Cranking System. This feature
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
R (ON/RUN): This position can N (Neutral). The engine will not start assists in starting the engine
be used to operate the electrical in any other position. To restart the and protects components.
accessories and to display some engine when the vehicle is already If the ignition key is turned to
instrument panel warning and moving, use N (Neutral) only. the START position, and then
indicator lights. The switch stays released when the engine
in this position when the engine Notice: Do not try to shift to begins cranking, the engine
is running. The transmission is P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. will continue cranking for a few
also unlocked in this position. If you do, you could damage the seconds or until the vehicle
transmission. Shift to P (Park) starts. If the engine does not
only when the vehicle is stopped. start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this 15 seconds between each try, Engine Heater
system also prevents cranking to allow the cranking motor to
if the engine is already running. cool down. When the engine The engine coolant heater
Engine cranking can be stopped starts, let go of the key and can provide easier starting
by turning the ignition switch accelerator. If the vehicle starts and better fuel economy during
to the ACC/ACCESSORY or briefly but then stops again, engine warm-up in cold weather
LOCK/OFF position. repeat these steps. This clears conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C).
the extra gasoline from the Vehicles with an engine coolant
Notice: Cranking the engine for heater should be plugged in at
long periods of time, by returning engine. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. least four hours before starting.
the key to the START position Some models may have an internal
immediately after cranking has Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the thermostat in the cord which will
ended, can overheat and damage prevent engine coolant heater
the cranking motor, and drain the oil warms up and lubricates
all moving parts. operation at temperatures above
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds 0°F (−18°C).
between each try, to let the Notice: The engine is designed
cranking motor cool down. to work with the electronics in To Use the Engine Coolant
2. If the engine does not start the vehicle. If you add electrical Heater
after 5‐10 seconds, especially in parts or accessories, you could
1. Turn off the engine.
very cold weather (below 0°F or change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical 2. Open the hood and unwrap
−18°C), it could be flooded with
equipment, check with your the electrical cord. The cord is
too much gasoline. Try pushing
dealer. If you do not, the engine located on the driver side of the
the accelerator pedal all the
might not perform properly. Any engine compartment. It is routed
way to the floor and holding it
resulting damage would not be around the windshield washer
there as you hold the key in
covered by the vehicle warranty. fluid reservoir.
START for up to a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING Power (RAP)
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories can be { WARNING
ungrounded outlet could cause used for up to 10 minutes after the
an electrical shock. Also, the It can be dangerous to get out of
ignition key is turned off: the vehicle if the shift lever is not
wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire.
. Audio System fully in P (Park) with the parking
You could be seriously injured. . Power Windows brake firmly set. The vehicle can
Plug the cord into a properly roll. If you have left the engine
. Sunroof (if equipped)
grounded three-prong 110-volt AC running, the vehicle can move
outlet. If the cord will not reach, Power to the windows and sunroof suddenly. You or others could be
use a heavy-duty three-prong will work up to 10 minutes or until a injured. To be sure the vehicle will
extension cord rated for at least door is opened. not move, even when you are on
15 amps. The radio continues to work for fairly level ground, use the steps
10 minutes or until the driver's door that follow. If you are pulling a
is opened. trailer, see Driving Characteristics
4. Before starting the engine, be and Towing Tips on page 9‑47.
sure to unplug and store the For an additional 10 minutes of
cord as it was before to keep operation, close all the doors and
it away from moving engine turn the key to ON/RUN and then 1. Hold the brake pedal down
parts. If you do not, it could back to LOCK/OFF. and set the parking brake.
be damaged. See Parking Brake on page 9‑30
All these features will work when
The length of time the heater should the key is in the ON/RUN or
remain plugged in depends on ACC/ACCESSORY positions.
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) Torque Lock

by holding in the button on the WARNING (Continued)
Torque lock is when the weight
shift lever and pushing the shift
vehicle with the engine running, of the vehicle puts too much
lever all the way toward the front
it could overheat and even catch force on the parking pawl in the
of the vehicle.
transmission. This happens when
3. Turn the ignition key to fire. You or others could be
parking on a hill and shifting the
LOCK/OFF. injured. Do not leave the vehicle
transmission into P (Park) is not
with the engine running. done properly and then it is difficult
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
with the ignition key in your If you have to leave the vehicle torque lock, set the parking brake
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). with the engine running, be sure and then shift into P (Park). To find
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
Leaving the Vehicle with the parking brake is firmly set before listed previously.
Engine Running you leave it. After you have moved If torque lock does occur, your
the shift lever into P (Park), hold vehicle may need to be pushed
{ WARNING the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
It can be dangerous to leave the shift lever away from P (Park) can shift out of P (Park).
vehicle with the engine running. without first pushing the button.
The vehicle could move suddenly If you can, it means that the shift
if the shift lever is not fully in lever was not fully locked in
P (Park) with the parking brake P (Park).
firmly set. And, if you leave the
(Continued)
Shifting Out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking Over Things
battery or a battery with low voltage,
The vehicle is equipped with try charging or jump starting the
That Burn
an electronic shift lock release battery. See Jump Starting on
system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
page 10‑83 for more information. { WARNING
To shift out of P (Park): Things that can burn could touch
. Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in 1. Apply the brake pedal. hot exhaust parts under the
P (Park) with the shift lever vehicle and ignite. Do not park
2. Press the shift lever button.
button fully released, and over papers, leaves, dry grass,
3. Move the shift lever to the or other things that can burn.
. Prevent movement of the shift desired position.
lever out of P (Park), unless
the ignition is in ON/RUN or If you still are unable to shift out of
ACC/ACCESSORY and the P (Park):
regular brake pedal is applied. 1. Fully release the shift lever
The shift lock release is always button.
functional except in the case of an 2. While holding down the brake
uncharged or low voltage (less than pedal, press the shift lever
9 volt) battery. button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your dealer.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market
to, here are some things to know.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is
. Drive it only with the windows dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
garages, tunnels, deep snow contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled.
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a that has no fresh air ventilation.
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air For more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑24.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
of the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
transmission shift lever is not fully shift lever located on the console in P (Park) with the parking brake
in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless
the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the
you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the
could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
always set the parking brake and and move the shift lever to
move the shift lever to P (Park). P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9‑21. If you are pulling a
Follow the proper steps to be trailer, see Driving Characteristics
sure the vehicle will not move. P (Park): This position locks the and Towing Tips on page 9‑47.
See Shifting Into Park on front wheels. It is the best position
page 9‑21. to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is
If parking on a hill and pulling a fully in P (Park) before starting
trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily.
the engine. The vehicle has
and Towing Tips on page 9‑47. an automatic transmission
shift lock control system.
You must fully apply the regular N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for
brake first and then press the shift engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best
lever button before shifting from wheels. To restart the engine when fuel economy. If you need more
P (Park) when the ignition key is the vehicle is already moving, power for passing, and you are:
in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift use N (Neutral) only. Also, use . Going less than 56 km/h
out of P (Park), ease pressure on N (Neutral) when the vehicle is (35 mph), push the accelerator
the shift lever, then push the shift being towed. pedal about halfway down.
lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button
{ WARNING . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
and move the shift lever into Shifting into a drive gear while the the way down.
another gear. See Shifting Out engine is running at high speed is Notice: If the vehicle seems to
of Park on page 9‑23. dangerous. Unless your foot is accelerate slowly or not shift
R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the gears when you go faster, and
back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. you continue to drive the vehicle
You could lose control and hit that way, you could damage the
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) transmission. Have the vehicle
people or objects. Do not shift
while the vehicle is moving serviced right away. You can
forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed. drive in L (Low) when you are
transmission. The repairs would driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
not be covered by the vehicle and D (Drive) for higher speeds
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) until then.
only after the vehicle is stopped. or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may If the vehicle is stopped on
To rock the vehicle back and forth to a hill, with your foot off the brake
get out of snow, ice or sand without damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered pedal, the vehicle may roll.
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11. by the vehicle warranty. Be sure
the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
This is normal and is due to To use this feature: The transmission will not shift into
the torque converter designed 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
to improve fuel economy and used or you shift back into D (Drive).
performance. Use the brake to 2. Press the plus/minus button
located on the shift lever, to While in L (Low), the transmission
hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not will prevent shifting to a lower gear
use the accelerator pedal. increase or decrease the gear
range available. range if the engine speed is too
L (Low): This position gives high. You have a brief period of
you access to gear ranges. This When you shift from D (Drive) to time to slow the vehicle. If vehicle
provides more engine braking but L (Low), the transmission will shift to speed is not reduced within the time
lower fuel economy than D (Drive). a pre-determined lower gear range. allowed, the lower gear range shift
You can use it on very steep hills, The highest gear available for this will not be completed. You must
or in deep snow or mud. pre-determined range is displayed further slow the vehicle, then press
next to the L in the DIC. See Driver the − (Minus) button to the desired
Manual Mode Information Center (DIC) (With DIC lower gear range.
Buttons) on page 5‑25 or Driver
Electronic Range Information Center (DIC) (Without Automatic Engine Grade braking
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30 for more is not available when the ERS is
Select (ERS) Mode active. It is available in D (Drive) for
information. The number displayed
ERS mode allows you to choose in the DIC is the highest gear that both normal and Tow/Haul mode.
the top-gear limit of the transmission the transmission will be allowed While using the ERS, cruise control
and the vehicle's speed while to operate in. This means that and the tow/haul mode can be used.
driving down hill or towing a trailer. all gears below that number are See Tow/Haul Mode following.
The vehicle has an electronic available. For example, when
shift position indicator within the 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,
instrument panel cluster. When 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
using the ERS Mode a number will automatically shifted by the vehicle.
display next to the L, indicating the
current gear that has been selected.
Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade Drive Systems

Braking
_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may
have a Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking All-Wheel Drive
assists when driving on a downhill
The button is located on the Vehicles with this feature always
grade. It maintains vehicle speed
instrument panel under the climate send engine power to all four
by automatically implementing
controls. wheels. It is fully automatic, and
a shift schedule that uses the
Push the button to activate the adjusts itself as needed for road
engine and the transmission to
system. Push it again to deactivate conditions.
slow the vehicle. The system will
the system. You can use this feature automatically command downshifts When using a compact spare
to assist when towing or hauling a to reduce vehicle speed, until the tire on an AWD vehicle, the
heavy load. brake pedal is no longer being system automatically detects the
When Tow/Haul is activated the pressed. compact spare and disables AWD.
Tow/Haul symbol will come on To restore AWD operation and
While in the Electronic Range
the instrument panel cluster. prevent excessive wear on the
Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Driving system, replace the compact
is deactivated, allowing the driver
Characteristics and Towing Tips on spare with a full-size tire as soon
to select a range and limiting the
page 9‑47 for more information. as possible. See Compact Spare
highest gear available. Grade
Tire on page 10‑82 for more
braking is available for normal
information.
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑25.
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and If you get too close to the vehicle
it becomes necessary to slam on in front of you, there will not be
the brakes and continue braking enough time to apply the brakes
Antilock Brake to avoid a sudden obstacle, a if that vehicle suddenly slows or
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels stops. Always leave enough room
are slowing down. If one of the up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
This vehicle has the Antilock
wheels is about to stop rolling,
Brake System (ABS), an advanced Using ABS
the computer will separately work
electronic braking system that helps
the brakes at each wheel. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal down firmly and let
When the engine is started and the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS pump or motor operating and feel
than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while normal.
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates ABS allows the driver to steer and
on wheel speed and controls brake at the same time. In many
braking pressure accordingly. emergencies, steering can help
Remember: ABS does not more than even the very best
change the time needed to get braking.
a foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑21.
Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the
parts. Make sure that the parking driver in stopping or decreasing
brake is fully released and the vehicle speed in emergency
brake warning light is off before driving conditions. This feature
driving. uses the stability system hydraulic
brake control module to supplement
To release the parking brake, hold the power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle.
foot up off the park brake pedal. The stability system hydraulic brake
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
regular brake pedal down, then
system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates.
push the parking brake pedal down.
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or
If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time
system warning light will come on. is normal and the driver should
If you are towing a trailer and
See Brake System Warning Light on continue to apply the brake pedal
are parking on a hill, see Driving
page 5‑20. as the driving situation dictates.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑47. The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems Driver Information Center (DIC): The system may be heard or felt
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, while it is working; this is normal.
SERVICE STABILITRAK, the
StabiliTrak® System StabiliTrak light will come on
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak and stay and four chimes are
system which combines antilock heard. If these conditions are
brake, traction and stability control observed, turn the vehicle off, wait
systems and helps the driver 15 seconds, and then turn it back
maintain directional control of the on again to reset the system. If any
vehicle in most driving conditions. of these messages still appear on The traction control button is located
the Driver Information Center (DIC), on the instrument panel.
When you first start the vehicle the vehicle should be taken in for
and begin to drive away, the service. For more information on The traction control part of
system performs several diagnostic the DIC messages, see Driver StabiliTrak can be turned off by
checks to ensure there are no Information Center (DIC) (With DIC pressing and releasing the traction
problems. The system may be Buttons) on page 5‑25 or Driver control button.
heard or felt while it is working. Information Center (DIC) (Without
This is normal and does not Traction control can be turned
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30. on by pressing and releasing the
mean there is a problem with the
vehicle. The system should initialize traction control button and the
before the vehicle reaches 32 km/h appropriate TRACTION CONTROL
(20 mph). In some cases, it may ON message will be displayed, if not
take approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) automatically shut off for any other
of driving before the system reason.
initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
activate, one of the following instrument panel cluster when the
messages will be displayed on the system is both on and activated.
When the traction control system Traction Control Operation Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
is turned off, the appropriate is allowed to spin excessively
The traction control system is part
TRACTION CONTROL OFF while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
of the StabiliTrak system. Traction
message will be displayed on warning lights, and any relevant
control limits wheel spin by reducing
the DIC. The vehicle will still DIC messages are displayed, the
engine power to the wheels (engine
have brake-traction control when transfer case could be damaged.
speed management) and by
traction control is off, but will not The repairs would not be covered
applying the brakes as necessary.
be able to use the engine speed by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
management system. See “Traction The traction control system is engine power and do not spin
Control Operation” following for enabled automatically when the the wheel(s) excessively while
more information. vehicle is started. It will activate these lights and messages are
and the StabiliTrak light will flash displayed.
When the traction control system
if it senses that any of the wheels
has been turned off, system noises The traction control system may
are spinning or beginning to lose
may be heard and felt as a result of activate on dry or rough roads
traction while driving. If traction
the brake-traction control working. or under conditions such as
control is turned off, only the
It is recommended to leave the heavy acceleration while turning or
brake-traction control portion
system on for normal driving abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
of traction control will work.
conditions, but it may be necessary transmission. When this happens,
The engine speed management
to turn the system off if the vehicle a reduction in acceleration may be
will be disabled. In this mode,
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, noticed, or a noise or vibration may
engine power is not reduced
and you want to “rock” the vehicle be heard. This is normal.
automatically and the driven
to attempt to free it. It may also be wheels can spin more freely.
necessary to turn off the system This can cause the brake-traction
when driving in extreme off-road control to activate constantly.
conditions where high wheel spin
is required. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 9‑11.
If cruise control is being used when Cruise Control

the system activates, the StabiliTrak
light will flash and cruise control will With cruise control, a speed of
automatically disengage. Cruise about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more
control may be reengaged when can be maintained without keeping
road conditions allow. See Cruise your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
Control on page 9‑33. control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
StabiliTrak may also turn off
automatically if it determines that When the brakes are applied, the
a problem exists with the system. cruise control is disengaged.
If the problem does not clear itself
after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer for service.
{ WARNING
The cruise control buttons are
Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering
where you cannot drive safely at wheel.
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control on and off. The indicator
roads or in heavy traffic. comes on when cruise control is on.
Cruise control can be dangerous + RES (Resume/Accelerate):
on slippery roads. On such roads, Press briefly to make the vehicle
fast changes in tire traction can resume to a previously set speed,
cause excessive wheel slip, and or press and hold to accelerate.
you could lose control. Do not use
SET– : Press to set the speed and
cruise control on slippery roads.
activate cruise control or to make
the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using
cruise control without erasing the If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control
set speed from memory. desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is
Setting Cruise Control are applied, the cruise control is already activated,
disengaged without erasing the . Press and hold the SET– button
If the cruise button is on when not in set speed from memory.
use, it could get bumped and go into on the steering wheel until the
cruise when not desired. Keep the Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h lower speed desired is reached,
cruise control switch off when cruise (25 mph) or greater, press the then release it.
is not being used. +RES button on the steering wheel. . To slow down in small amounts,
The vehicle returns to the previously press the SET– button briefly.
The cruise control light on the set speed and stays there.
instrument panel cluster comes on Each time this is done, the
after the cruise control has been Increasing Speed While Using vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
set to the desired speed. Cruise Control (1 mph) slower.
If the cruise control system is Passing Another Vehicle While
1. Press the I button to turn the
already activated, Using Cruise Control
cruise control system on.
. Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to
2. Get up to the speed desired.
on the steering wheel until the increase vehicle speed. When
3. Press and release the SET– desired speed is reached, then you take your foot off the pedal,
button located on the steering release it. the vehicle will slow down to the
wheel. . previously set cruise speed.
To increase vehicle speed in
4. Take your foot off the small increments, press the Using Cruise Control on Hills
accelerator. +RES button briefly. Each time
How well the cruise control
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. will work on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and
the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, Object Detection

you might have to step on the { WARNING
accelerator pedal to maintain Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
the vehicle speed. When going
Assist (URPA) system does not
downhill, you might have to brake Ultrasonic Parking Assist replace driver vision. It cannot
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. When the For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect:
brakes are applied the cruise Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the
control is disengaged. it operates at speeds less than
bumper, underneath the
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the
Ending Cruise Control vehicle, or too close or far
driver with parking and avoiding
from the vehicle.
There are three ways to end cruise objects while in R (Reverse).
control: The sensors on the rear bumper are . Children, pedestrians,
used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets.
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the If you do not use proper care
. Press the [ button. vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing, vehicle
off the ground.
. To turn off the cruise control, damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
press T on the steering wheel.
check behind the vehicle before
Erasing Speed Memory backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing the vehicle's mirrors.
the T button or if the ignition is
turned off.
How the System Works When the System Does Not

. The park assist sensors are
Seem to Work Properly covered by frost or ice. Frost or
URPA comes on automatically ice can form around and behind
when the shift lever is moved into If the URPA system does not the sensors and may not always
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds activate due to a temporary be seen; this can occur after
to indicate the system is working. condition, the message PARK washing the vehicle in cold
URPA operates only at speeds less ASSIST OFF or PARK ASST weather. The message may
than 8 km/h (5 mph). BLOCKED SEE OWNERS not clear until the frost or ice
MANUAL will be displayed has melted.
An obstacle is indicated by audible on the DIC.
beeps. The interval between the . A trailer was attached to the
beeps becomes shorter as the SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this vehicle, or a bicycle or an
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. message occurs, take the vehicle object was hanging out of the
When the distance is less than to your dealer to repair the system. liftgate during the last drive
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are PARK ASSIST OFF: This message cycle. Once the attached object
continuous. occurs if the driver disables the is removed, URPA will return
system. to normal operation.
To be detected, objects must be at
least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
. A tow bar is attached to the
and below liftgate level. Objects OWNERS MANUAL: This vehicle.
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from message can occur under the . The vehicle's bumper is
the rear bumper. This distance may following conditions: damaged. Take the vehicle to
be less during warmer or humid your dealer to repair the system.
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
weather.
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear . Other conditions may affect
The system can be disabled through bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, system performance, such as
the Driver Information Center (DIC). ice and slush. For cleaning vibrations from a jackhammer or
See “Park Assist” under Vehicle instructions, see Exterior Care the compression of air brakes on
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 10‑90. a very large truck.
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles Without Navigation
Camera (RVC) System
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only The rear vision camera system is
Camera system. Read this entire looking at the RVC screen, or use designed to help the driver when
section before using it. the screen during longer, higher backing up by displaying a view
speed backing maneuvers or of the area behind the vehicle.
where there could be cross-traffic. When the key is in the ON/RUN
{ WARNING Your judged distances using the position and the driver shifts the
screen will differ from actual vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
distances. image automatically appears on
system does not replace driver the inside rear view mirror. Once
vision. RVC does not: If you do not use proper care the driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
. Detect objects that are before backing up, you could the video image automatically
outside the camera's field hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, disappears from the inside rear
of view, below the bumper, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in view mirror.
or underneath the vehicle. vehicle damage, injury, or death.
. Detect children, pedestrians, Even though the vehicle has
bicyclists, or pets. the RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
(Continued) checking behind and around the
vehicle.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera Vehicles With Navigation 3. Select the Rear Camera Options
System Off or On System screen button. The Rear Camera
To turn off the rear vision camera Options screen displays.
The rear vision camera system is
system, press and hold z, located designed to help the driver when
on the inside rearview mirror, until backing up by displaying a view
the left indicator light turns off. of the area behind the vehicle.
The rear vision camera display When the driver shifts the vehicle
is now disabled. into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
To turn the rear vision camera
navigation screen. Once the driver
system on again, press and
shifts out of R (Reverse), the
hold z until the left indicator light navigation screen will go back to
illuminates. The rear vision camera the last screen that had been
system display is now enabled and displayed, after a delay.
the display will appear in the mirror
normally. Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off 4. Select the Video screen button.
To turn the rear vision camera When the Video screen button
system on or off: is highlighted the RVC system
1. Shift into P (Park). is on.
2. Press the MENU button to enter

the configure menu options,
then press the MENU hard key
to select Display or touch the
Display screen button.
The delay that is received after ] (Brightness) : Touch the The symbols appear when an object
shifting out of R (Reverse) is + (plus) or – (minus) screen has been detected by the URPA
approximately 10 seconds. buttons to increase or decrease system. The symbol may cover the
The delay can be cancelled by the brightness of the screen. object when viewing the navigation
performing one of the following: screen.
_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus)
. Pressing a hard key on the or – (minus) screen buttons to To turn the symbols on or off:
navigation system. increase or decrease the contrast 1. Make sure that URPA has not
. Shifting in to P (Park). of the screen. been disabled.
. Reach a vehicle speed of Symbols 2. Shift into P (Park).
5 mph (8 km/h). The navigation system may have 3. Press the MENU hard key
There is a message on the rear a feature that lets the driver view to enter the configure menu
vision camera screen that states symbols on the navigation screen options, then press the MENU
“Check Surroundings for Safety”. while using the rear vision camera. hard key repeatedly until Display
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist is selected or touch the Display
Adjusting the Brightness and (URPA) system must not be screen button.
Contrast of the Screen disabled to use the caution symbols.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options
To adjust the brightness and If URPA has been disabled and
screen button. The Rear Camera
contrast of the screen, press the the symbols have been turned on,
Options screen will display.
MENU button while the rear vision the Rear Parking Assist Symbols
camera image is on the display. Unavailable error message may 5. Touch the Symbols screen
Any adjustments made will only display. See Ultrasonic Parking button. The screen button will
affect the rear vision camera screen. Assist on page 9‑35. be highlighted when on.
Rear Vision Camera Error The area displayed by the camera

Messages is limited and does not display
Service Rear Vision Camera objects that are close to either
System: This message can display corner or under the bumper.
when the system is not receiving The area displayed can vary
information it requires from other depending on vehicle orientation
vehicle systems. or road conditions. The distance
of the image that appears on the
If any other problem occurs or if a screen differs from the actual
problem persists, see your dealer. distance.
Rear Vision Camera Location The following illustration shows
the field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the A. View displayed by the camera.

license plate. B. Corner of the rear bumper.
When the System Does Not

. The back of the vehicle is in . A fast flash may indicate that
Seem To Work Properly an accident, the position and the display has been on for
mounting angle of the camera the maximum allowable time
The rear vision camera system can change or the camera can during a reverse cycle, or the
might not work properly or display be affected. Be sure to have display has reached an Over
a clear image if: the camera and its position and Temperature limit.
. The RVC is turned off. mounting angle checked at your The fast flash conditions
See “Turning the Rear Camera dealer. are used to protect the video
System On or Off” earlier in this . There are extreme temperature device from high temperature
section. changes. conditions. Once conditions
. It is dark. The rear vision camera system return to normal the device will
display in the rearview mirror reset and the green indicator
. The sun or the beam of will stop flashing.
headlights is shining directly may turn off or not appear as
into the camera lens. expected due to one of the following During any of these fault conditions,
conditions. If this occurs the left the display will be blank and the
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else indicator light on the mirror will indicator will continue to flash as
builds up on the camera lens. flash. long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
Clean the lens, rinse it with or until the conditions return to
. A slow flash may indicate a
water, and wipe it with a soft normal.
cloth. loss of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse Pressing and holding z when the
cycle. left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
Fuel Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel (U.S. and Canada Only)
is an important part of the proper At a minimum, gasoline should
maintenance of this vehicle. To help meet ASTM specification
keep the engine clean and maintain D 4814 in the United States
optimum vehicle performance, we or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in
recommend the use of gasoline Canada. Some gasolines contain
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent an octane-enhancing additive called
Gasoline. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Look for the TOP TIER label on the tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets against the use of gasolines
enhanced detergency standards containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel on page 9‑43 for additional
of marketers providing TOP TIER information.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
www.toptiergas.com. higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. If heavy knocking is
heard when using gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuel
Requirements Countries injectors and intake valves clean
If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any and avoid problems due to dirty
California Emissions Standards, other fuel not recommended in the injectors or valves, look for gasoline
it is designed to operate on fuels previous text on fuel. Costly repairs that is advertised as TOP TIER
that meet California specifications. caused by use of improper fuel Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
See the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle TOP TIER label on the fuel pump
label. If this fuel is not available in warranty. to ensure gasoline meets enhanced
states adopting California Emissions detergency standards developed
To check the fuel availability, ask
Standards, the vehicle will operate by the auto companies. A list of
an auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting marketers providing TOP TIER
company that does business in the
federal specifications, but emission Detergent Gasoline can be found
country where you will be driving.
control system performance might at www.toptiergas.com.
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the Fuel Additives For customers who do not use
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States are now System Treatment PLUS, added
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to required to contain additives that to the fuel tank at every engine oil
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. help prevent engine and fuel system change, can help clean deposits
If it is determined that the condition deposits from forming, allowing the from fuel injectors and intake
is caused by the type of fuel used, emission control system to work valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
repairs might not be covered by the properly. In most cases, nothing PLUS is the only gasoline additive
vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the recommended by General Motors.
fuel. However, some gasolines It is available at your dealer.
contain only the minimum amount
of additive required to meet U.S.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, Some gasolines that are Filling the Tank
such as ethers and ethanol, not reformulated for low
and reformulated gasolines emissions can contain an
might be available in your area. octane-enhancing additive { WARNING
We recommend that you use these called methylcyclopentadienyl Fuel vapor burns violently and a
gasolines, if they comply with the manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
specifications described earlier. ask the attendant where you buy
To help avoid injuries to you and
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and gasoline whether the fuel contains
other fuels containing more than MMT. We recommend against others, read and follow all the
10% ethanol must not be used in the use of such gasolines. Fuels instructions on the fuel pump
vehicles that were not designed containing MMT can reduce island. Turn off the engine when
for those fuels. spark plug life and affect emission refueling. Do not smoke near
control system performance. fuel or when refueling the vehicle.
Notice: This vehicle was not Do not use cellular phones. Keep
designed for fuel that contains The malfunction indicator lamp
might turn on. If this occurs, sparks, flames, and smoking
methanol. Do not use fuel
return to your dealer for service. materials away from fuel. Do not
containing methanol. It can
leave the fuel pump unattended
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic when refueling the vehicle. This is
and rubber parts. That damage against the law in some places.
would not be covered under the Do not re-enter the vehicle while
vehicle warranty. pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located This would allow fuel to

behind a hinged fuel door on the { WARNING evaporate into the atmosphere.
driver side of the vehicle. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Fuel can spray out on you page 5‑18.
To open the fuel door, push the if you open the fuel cap too
rearward center edge in and release quickly. If you spill fuel and then
and it will open. something ignites it, you could { WARNING
be badly burned. This spray can If a fire starts while you are
happen if the tank is nearly full, refueling, do not remove the
and is more likely in hot weather. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait by shutting off the pump or by
for any hiss noise to stop. Then notifying the station attendant.
unscrew the cap all the way. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is

top off or overfill the tank and wait needed, be sure to get the right
a few seconds after you have type of cap from your dealer.
finished pumping before removing The wrong type of fuel cap might
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted not fit properly, might cause the
surfaces as soon as possible. malfunction indicator lamp to
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
See Exterior Care on page 10‑90. light, and could damage the
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is When replacing the fuel cap, fuel tank and emissions system.
released too soon, it will spring back turn it clockwise until it clicks. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
to the right. Make sure the cap is fully installed. on page 5‑18.
The diagnostic system can
While refueling, hang the tethered
determine if the fuel cap has been
fuel cap from the hook on the
left off or improperly installed.
fuel door.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Information
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is has been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
and the vehicle damaged if this See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
you and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving
. Dispense fuel only into while towing a trailer, see
approved containers. “Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment
the ground. to tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled handling, acceleration, braking,

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) durability and fuel economy.
page 10‑87. For information on With the added weight, the engine,
towing the vehicle behind another well — or even at all. The driver transmission, wheel assemblies and
vehicle such as a motor home, see and passengers could be tires are forced to work harder and
Recreational Vehicle Towing on seriously injured. The vehicle may under greater loads. The trailer also
page 10‑87. also be damaged; the resulting adds wind resistance, increasing
repairs would not be covered by the pulling requirements. For safe
Driving Characteristics the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer trailering, correctly use the proper
only if all the steps in this section trailering equipment.
and Towing Tips
have been followed. Ask your The following information has
dealer for advice and information
{ WARNING about towing a trailer with the
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
The driver can lose control when vehicle. passengers. Read this section
pulling a trailer if the correct carefully before pulling a trailer.
equipment is not used or the The vehicle can tow a trailer when
vehicle is not driven properly. equipped with the proper trailer
For example, if the trailer is too towing equipment. For trailering
heavy, the brakes may not work capacity, see Trailer Towing on
(Continued) page 9‑52. Trailering changes
Pulling a Trailer
. The vehicle can tow in Driving with a Trailer
D (Drive). Use a lower gear if
Here are some important points: the transmission shifts too often. Towing a trailer requires experience.
. There are many laws, including See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in Get familiar with handling and
speed limit restrictions that apply this section. braking with the added trailer
to trailering. Check for legal weight. The vehicle is now longer
. Obey speed limit restrictions and not as responsive as the
requirements. when towing a trailer. vehicle is by itself.
. Consider using sway control. . The vehicle is designed Check all trailer hitch parts
See Towing Equipment on primarily as a passenger and
page 9‑54. and attachments, safety chains,
load carrying vehicle. If a trailer electrical connectors, lamps, tires
. Do not tow a trailer at all during is towed, the vehicle will require and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
the first 800 km (500 miles) more frequent maintenance due has electric brakes, start the vehicle
the new vehicle is driven. to the additional load. and trailer moving and then apply
The engine, axle or other the trailer brake controller by hand
parts could be damaged. to be sure the brakes are working.
. During the first 800 km During the trip, check regularly to be
(500 miles) that a trailer is sure that the load is secure, and the
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h lamps and trailer brakes are working
(50 mph) and do not make starts properly.
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
Towing with a Stability Control

. Increase the charging system Tow/Haul is designed to be most
System voltage to assist in recharging effective when the vehicle and
a battery installed in a trailer. trailer combined weight is at least
When towing, the sound of the 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
stability control system might be Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
heard. The system is reacting to the See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52.
vehicle movement caused by the Tow/Haul is most useful when
trailer, which mainly occurs during pulling a heavy trailer or a large
cornering. This is normal when or heavy load under the following
towing heavier trailers. driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode Press this button located on the . Travelling through rolling terrain.
console to turn on and turn off the
Tow/Haul assists when pulling a Tow/Haul mode. See Tow/Haul
. Travelling in stop and go traffic.
heavy trailer or a large or heavy Mode on page 9‑28.
load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul
. Travelling in busy parking lots
mode is to: The Tow/Haul light on the where improved low speed
instrument panel comes on to control of the vehicle is desired.
. Reduce the frequency and indicate that Tow/Haul mode Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
improve the predictability of has been selected.
transmission shifts. when lightly loaded or with no trailer
Tow/Haul may be turned off by will not cause damage but there is
. Provide the same solid shift feel pressing the button again, at no benefit. Such a selection when
as when the vehicle is unloaded. which time the indicator light on unloaded may result in unpleasant
. Improve control of vehicle speed the instrument panel will turn off. engine and transmission driving
while requiring less throttle pedal The vehicle will automatically turn characteristics and reduced fuel
activity. off Tow/Haul every time it is started. economy.
Following Distance Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on

the instrument panel flash for turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the
burned out. Check occasionally to
driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
This can help to avoid situations the vehicle. The vehicle could
working.
that require heavy braking and be damaged. Avoid making very
sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. Driving on Grades
Passing When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a
wider turns than normal so the lower gear before starting down
More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders, a long or steep downgrade. If the
when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down,
rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in the brakes might have to be used
farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden so much that they would get hot and
before returning to the lane. maneuvers. no longer work well. See “Automatic
Backing Up Engine Grade Braking” within Tow/
Turn Signals When Towing a Haul Mode on page 9‑28.
Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer
wheel with one hand. To move the The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
The turn signal indicators on the Use a lower gear if the transmission
trailer to the left, move that hand instrument panel flash whenever
to the left. To move the trailer to shifts too often.
signaling a turn or lane change.
the right, move your hand to the Properly hooked up, the trailer
right. Always back up slowly and, lamps also flash, telling other
if possible, have someone drivers the vehicle is turning,
guide you. changing lanes or stopping.
When towing at high altitude on Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in
steep uphill grades, engine coolant place, release the brake pedal
will boil at a lower temperature than
at normal altitudes. If the engine is
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
turned off immediately after towing Parking the vehicle on a hill apply the parking brake and shift
at high altitude on steep uphill with the trailer attached can be into P (Park).
grades, the vehicle may show dangerous. If something goes
signs similar to engine overheating. 5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move.
To avoid this, let the engine run People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill
while parked, preferably on level
the vehicle and the trailer can be
ground, with the transmission in 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
damaged. When possible, always
P (Park) for a few minutes before while you:
turning the engine off. If the park the rig on a flat surface.
. Start the engine.
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑19. If parking the rig on a hill:
. Shift into a gear.
On a long uphill grade, shift down 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
. Release the parking brake.
and reduce the vehicle speed to not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce the wheels into the curb if facing
the possibility of the engine and the downhill or into traffic if facing 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
transmission overheating. uphill. clear of the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up

under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated

Towing assuming only the driver is in
Three important considerations the tow vehicle and it has all the
The vehicle needs service more have to do with weight: required trailering equipment.
often when pulling a trailer. See this The weight of additional optional
. The weight of the trailer
manual's Maintenance Schedule equipment, passengers and cargo in
or Index for more information. . The weight of the trailer tongue the tow vehicle must be subtracted
Things that are especially important . The total weight on the vehicle's from the maximum trailer weight.
in trailer operation are automatic tires
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle Use the following chart to determine
lubricant, belts, cooling system and Weight of the Trailer how much the vehicle can weigh,
brake system. Inspect these before based upon the vehicle model and
How heavy can a trailer safely be? options.
and during the trip.
Speed, altitude, road grades,
Check periodically to see that all
outside temperature, special
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
equipment, and the amount of
Engine Cooling When Trailer tongue weight the vehicle can carry
Towing must be considered. See “Weight
of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
The cooling system may temporarily section for more information.
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑19.
Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)
All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our Weight of the Trailer Tongue equipment, passengers or cargo in
trailering information or advice. the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
See Customer Assistance Offices weight the vehicle can carry, which
an important weight to measure
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 will also reduce the trailer weight the
because it affects the total gross
or Customer Assistance Offices vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for more the tongue load must be added
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
information. to the GVW because the vehicle
the curb weight of the vehicle,
will be carrying that weight, too.
any cargo carried in it, and the
See Vehicle Load Limits on
people who will be riding in the
page 9‑12.
vehicle. If there are a lot of options,
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Towing Equipment

Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating). The effect of Hitches
additional weight may reduce the It is important to have the correct
trailering capacity more than the hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
total of the additional weight. trucks going by and rough roads are
It is important that the vehicle a few reasons why the right hitch is
does not exceed any of its needed.
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, . The rear bumper on the vehicle
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue is not intended for hitches.
Weight. The only way to be sure it is Do not attach rental hitches
not exceeding any of these ratings or other bumper-type hitches
If a weight-carrying hitch or a is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. to it. Use only a frame-mounted
weight-distributing hitch is being hitch that does not attach to the
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
used, the trailer tongue (A) should bumper.
weigh 10‐15 percent of the total Tires
loaded trailer weight (B). Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
. Will any holes be made in the
upper limit for cold tires. These body of the vehicle when the
After loading the trailer, weigh trailer hitch is installed? If there
the trailer and then the tongue, numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle are, then be sure to seal the
separately, to see if the weights are holes when the hitch is removed.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Load Limits on page 9‑12 for more
information. Do not go over the If the holes are not sealed,
might be made by moving some dirt, water, and deadly carbon
items around in the trailer. GVW limit for the vehicle, or the
GAWR, including the weight of the monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
Trailering may be limited by the trailer tongue. If using a weight may get into the vehicle. See
vehicle's ability to carry tongue distributing hitch, do not go over the Engine Exhaust on page 9‑24.
weight. Tongue weight cannot rear axle limit before applying the
cause the vehicle to exceed the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness

Weight Carrying Hitches
Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue The trailer wiring harness, with a
of the trailer to help prevent the seven-pin connector, is located at
tongue from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied
becomes separated from the hitch. to the vehicle's frame. The harness
Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a
the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty
chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains
A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits:
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
have its own brake system that
A. Body-to-Ground Distance is adequate for the weight of the
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
B. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal
the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps
When using a weight-distributing so they are installed, adjusted and
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so maintained properly.
. Black: Ground
that the distance (A) remains the
Because the vehicle has antilock
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
*The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and
in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions
but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an
Add-Ons
They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller
dealer or a qualified service center. are included with the vehicle as Add-On Electrical
If the back-up lamp circuit is not part of the trailer wiring package. Equipment
functional, contact your dealer. The instrument panel contains
blunt cut wires behind the steering Notice: Do not add anything
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is electrical to the vehicle unless
being charged, press the Tow/Haul column for the electric trailer brake
controller. The harness contains you check with your dealer first.
mode switch located on the center Some electrical equipment can
console near the climate controls. the following wires:
damage the vehicle and the
This will boost the vehicle system . Red/Black: Power Supply damage would not be covered
voltage and properly charge the . White: Brake Switch Signal by the vehicle's warranty. Some
battery. If the trailer is too light add-on electrical equipment can
for Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Gray: Illumination keep other components from
headlamps (Non‐HID only) as a . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal working as they should.
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
. Black: Ground Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
The electric trailer brake controller
vehicle is not operating.
should be installed by your dealer
or a qualified service center. The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑45 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑46.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Overheated Engine Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Protection High Intensity Discharge
General Information Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31
California Proposition Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-31
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
California Perchlorate Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Electrical System
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 High Voltage Devices and
Accessories and All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27 Electrical System
Vehicle Checks Automatic Transmission Shift Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Lock Control Function Fuses and Circuit
Doing Your Own
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Engine Compartment
Park Brake and P (Park) Instrument Panel Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Wiper Blade Wheels and Tires
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Automatic Transmission Windshield Replacement . . . 10-29
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Headlamp Aiming Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Tire Terminology and
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Tire Sealant and General Information

Tire Pressure Monitor Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Storing the Tire Sealant and For service and parts needs,
Tire Pressure Monitor Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 visit your dealer. You will receive
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-80 and supported service people.
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-82 Genuine GM parts have one of
When It Is Time for New these marks:
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Jump Starting
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Different Size Tires and Towing
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Uniform Tire Quality Recreational Vehicle
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag to the vehicle can affect vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, performance and safety, including
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in such things as airbags, braking,
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, stability, ride and handling,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control,
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these
perchlorate. accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks

resulting from the installation or use WARNING (Continued)
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper
not covered under the terms of the Service Work nuts, bolts, and other
vehicle warranty and may affect fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
{ WARNING easily confused. If the wrong
You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts
GM Accessories are designed to
vehicle could be damaged if you can later break or fall off.
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt.
dealer can accessorize the vehicle without knowing enough about it.
using genuine GM Accessories. . Be sure you have sufficient If doing some of your own
When you go to your GM dealer knowledge, experience, service work, use the proper
and ask for GM Accessories, the proper replacement service manual. It tells you much
you will know that GM-trained parts, and tools before more about how to service the
and supported service technicians attempting any vehicle vehicle than this manual can.
will perform the work using genuine maintenance task.
GM Accessories.
(Continued)
Also, see Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑46.
Vehicle Care 10-5
To order the proper service manual, Hood 3. After you have partially
see Service Publications Ordering lifted the hood, gas struts
Information on page 13‑15. To open the hood, do the following: will automatically take over
This vehicle has an airbag system. to lift and hold the hood in
Before attempting to do your own the fully open position.
service work, see Servicing the Before closing the hood, be sure all
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on filler caps are on properly.
page 3‑45. Pull the hood down to close.
Keep a record with all parts receipts Lower the hood until the lifting
and list the mileage and the date 1. Pull the hood release handle pressure of the strut is reduced.
of any service work performed. with this symbol on it. It is Then allow the hood to fall and latch
See Maintenance Records on located under the instrument into place under its own weight.
page 11‑10. panel on the driver's side of Check to make sure the hood is
the vehicle. closed. If the hood does not fully
latch, gently push the hood down
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull at the front and center of the hood
up on the center of the hood, until it is completely latched.
and push the secondary hood
release to the right.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Radiator Pressure Cap. H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. Engine Cover

See Cooling System on I. Engine Oil Dipstick.
page 10‑15. See “Checking Engine Oil”
B. Engine Coolant Recovery under Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Cap. See Cooling System on J. Automatic Transmission Fluid
page 10‑15. Dipstick. See “Checking the
C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Fluid Level” under Automatic
See Jump Starting on Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑83. page 10‑13.
D. Engine Compartment Fuse K. Brake Master Cylinder
Block on page 10‑33. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. under Brakes on page 10‑24.
See Jump Starting on L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑83. page 10‑13. A. Oil Fill Cap
F. Power Steering Reservoir and M. Windshield Washer Fluid B. Engine Cover
Cap (under engine cover). Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove:
See Power Steering Fluid on Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑22. page 10‑23. 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When 2. Raise the engine cover (B) to
to Add Engine Oil” under release from the retainers.
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil

To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the
performance and long life, engine oil level at each fuel fill.
careful attention must be paid In order to get an accurate reading,
to engine oil. Following these the vehicle must be on level ground.
simple, but important steps will The engine oil dipstick handle
help protect your investment: is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
. Always use engine oil approved page 10‑6 for the location of
to the proper specification and If the oil is below the cross-hatched
the engine oil dipstick. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
of the proper viscosity grade.
See “Selecting the Right Engine Obtaining an accurate oil level 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended
Oil” in this section. reading is essential: oil and then recheck the level.
See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
. Check the engine oil level 1. If the engine has been running in this section for an explanation of
regularly and maintain the recently, turn off the engine and what kind of oil to use. For engine
proper oil level. See “Checking allow several minutes for the oil oil crankcase capacity, see
Engine Oil” and “When to Add to drain back into the oil pan. Capacities and Specifications on
Engine Oil” in this section. Checking the oil level too soon page 12‑2.
after engine shutoff will not
. Change the engine oil at the provide an accurate oil level
appropriate time. See Engine reading.
Oil Life System on page 10‑11.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
. Always dispose of engine oil it with a paper towel or cloth,
properly. See “What to Do with then push it back in all the way.
Used Oil” in this section. Remove it again, keeping the
tip down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Notice: Do not add too much Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Use only engine oil
oil. Oil levels above or below that is approved to the dexos
Selecting the right engine oil
the acceptable operating range specification or an equivalent
depends on both the proper oil
shown on the dipstick are harmful engine oil of the appropriate
specification and viscosity grade:
to the engine. If you find that viscosity grade. Engine
you have an oil level above the Specification oils approved to the dexos
operating range, i.e., the engine specification will show the
Use and ask for engine oils with
has so much oil that the oil level dexos symbol on the container.
the dexos™ certification mark.
gets above the cross-hatched Failure to use the recommended
Oils meeting the requirements of
area that shows the proper engine oil or equivalent can
the vehicle should have the dexos
operating range, the engine result in engine damage not
certification mark on the container.
could be damaged. You should covered by the vehicle warranty.
This certification mark indicates that
drain out the excess oil or limit If you are unsure whether the
the oil has been approved to the
driving of the vehicle and seek a oil is approved to the dexos
dexos specification.
service professional to remove specification, ask your service
the excess amount of oil. provider.
See Engine Compartment Overview Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
on page 10‑6 for the location of the dexos is unavailable: In the event
engine oil fill cap. that dexos‐approved engine oil is
Add enough oil to put the level not available at an oil change or
somewhere in the proper operating for maintaining proper oil level,
range. Push the dipstick all the way you may use substitute engine oil
This vehicle was filled at the factory displaying the API Starburst symbol
back in when through. with dexos‐approved engine oil. and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Use of oils that do not meet the Cold Temperature Operation: In an

dexos specification, however, may area of extreme cold, where the
result in reduced performance under temperature falls below −29°C
certain circumstances. (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil
should be used. An oil of this
Viscosity Grade viscosity grade will provide
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity easier cold starting for the engine
grade for the vehicle. Do not at extremely low temperatures.
use other viscosity oils such as When selecting an oil of the
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50. appropriate viscosity grade,
be sure to always select an oil that
meets the required specification,
dexos. See “Specification” earlier
in this section for more information.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Oil Additives/Engine What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
Oil Flushes Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
Do not add anything to the oil. elements that can be unhealthy for
The recommended oils with the your skin and could even cause This vehicle has a computer system
dexos specification and displaying cancer. Do not let used oil stay on that indicates when to change the
the dexos certification mark are all your skin for very long. Clean your engine oil and filter. This is based
that is needed for good performance skin and nails with soap and water, on engine revolutions and engine
and engine protection. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or temperature, and not on mileage.
properly dispose of clothing or rags Based on driving conditions, the
Engine oil system flushes are not mileage at which an oil change is
containing used engine oil. See the
recommended and could cause indicated can vary considerably.
manufacturer's warnings about the
engine damage not covered by For the oil life system to work
use and disposal of oil products.
the vehicle warranty. properly, the system must be reset
Used oil can be a threat to the
every time the oil is changed.
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the When the system has calculated
oil from the filter before disposal. that oil life has been diminished,
Never dispose of oil by putting it it indicates that an oil change is
in the trash or pouring it on the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
ground, into sewers, or into streams OIL SOON message comes on.
or bodies of water. Recycle it by Change the oil as soon as possible
taking it to a place that collects within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
used oil.
10-12 Vehicle Care
It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
the best conditions, the oil life Life System If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
system might indicate that an oil SOON message comes back
change is not necessary for up to a Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the on when the vehicle is started,
year. The engine oil and filter must the engine oil life system has
be changed at least once a year system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the not been reset. Repeat the
and, at this time, the system must procedure.
be reset. Your dealer has trained system:
service people who will perform If the vehicle does not have Driver If the vehicle has Driver Information
this work and reset the system. Information Center (DIC) buttons: Center (DIC) buttons:
It is also important to check the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
oil regularly over the course of with the engine off.
with the engine off. The vehicle
an oil drain interval and keep it
must be in P (Park) to access 2. Press the vehicle information
at the proper level.
this display. Press the trip button until OIL LIFE
If the system is ever reset odometer reset stem until OIL REMAINING displays.
accidentally, the oil must be LIFE REMAINING displays.
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) 3. Press and hold the set/reset
2. Press and hold the trip odometer button until “100%” is displayed.
since the last oil change.
reset stem until OIL LIFE Three chimes sound and the
Remember to reset the oil life
REMAINING shows “100%.” CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
system whenever the oil is changed.
Three chimes sound and the message goes off.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message goes off. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not been reset. Repeat
the procedure.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Automatic Transmission The transmission fluid will not How to Inspect the Engine Air
reach the end of the dipstick unless Cleaner/Filter
Fluid the transmission is at operating
It is not necessary to check temperature. If you need to check To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
the transmission fluid level. the transmission fluid level, please remove the filter from the vehicle
A transmission fluid leak is the take the vehicle to your dealer. and lightly shake the filter (away
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak from vehicle) to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains covered
occurs, take the vehicle to the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter with dirt, a new filter is required.
dealer and have it repaired as
soon as possible. When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air
Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter, do the following:
Change the fluid at the intervals
listed in Scheduled Maintenance on Inspect the air cleaner/filter at 1. Remove the engine cover.
page 11‑2, and be sure to use the scheduled maintenance See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.
the transmission fluid listed in intervals and replace it at the first
Recommended Fluids and oil change after each 80 000 km
Lubricants on page 11‑7. (50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
Notice: Use of the incorrect
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
automatic transmission fluid
conditions, inspect the filter at each
may damage the vehicle, and the
engine oil change.
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use See Engine Compartment Overview
the automatic transmission fluid on page 10‑6 for the location of the
listed in Recommended Fluids engine air cleaner/filter.
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
A. Ventilation Tube
B. Sensor
10-14 Vehicle Care
2. Disconnect the cover fitting from 4. Loosen the outlet duct

the ventilation tube (A). clamp (A). { WARNING
3. Disconnect the wiring harness 5. Loosen the six housing Operating the engine with the air
connector from the sensor (B). cover (C) screws (B). cleaner/filter off can cause you
6. Remove the housing cover (C) or others to be burned. The air
with outlet duct. cleaner not only cleans the air;
it helps to stop flames if the
7. Remove the filter (D) and any
loose debris that may be found engine backfires. Use caution
in the base (E). when working on the engine
and do not drive with the air
8. Inspect or replace the filter (D). cleaner/filter off.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to
reinstall the housing cover Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
and reconnect the electrical off, dirt can easily get into the
connector to the sensor. engine, which could damage it.
10. Reinstall the engine cover. Always have the air cleaner/filter
A. Clamp See Engine Cover on in place when you are driving.
page 10‑7.
B. Screws
C. Housing Cover
D. Filter
E. Base
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine
working temperature. under the hood can start up coolant could require changing
even when the engine is not sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
running and can cause injury. or 24 months, whichever occurs
Keep hands, clothing, and tools first. Any repairs would not
away from any underhood be covered by the vehicle
electric fan. warranty. Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ WARNING Engine Coolant
Heater and radiator hoses, and The cooling system in the vehicle
other engine parts, can be very is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, coolant. The coolant is designed to
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank you can be burned. remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
B. Radiator Pressure Cap Do not run the engine if there
occurs first.
is a leak. If you run the engine, it
C. Engine Cooling Fans could lose all coolant. That could The following explains the cooling
(Out of View) cause an engine fire, and you system and how to check and add
could be burned. Get any leak coolant when it is low. If there is a
fixed before you drive the vehicle. problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19.
10-16 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors

drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
the vehicle's cooling system,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: Use only the proper mixture of
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down the engine coolant listed in this
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside manual for the cooling system.
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. See Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more
. Gives boiling protection up information.
The coolant warning system is to 129°C (265°F), engine
set for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Never dispose of engine coolant
With plain water or the wrong by putting it in the trash, pouring
mixture, the engine could get
. Protects against rust and it on the ground, or into sewers,
too hot but you would not get the corrosion. streams, or bodies of water.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. Have the coolant changed by an
could catch fire and you or authorized service center, familiar
. Helps keep the proper engine with legal requirements regarding
others could be burned. temperature.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, used coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
mixture is used, the engine could health.
coolant.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Vehicle Care 10-17
Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the

The vehicle must be on a level Recovery Tank
surface when checking the coolant
level. { WARNING
Check to see if coolant is visible in You can be burned if you spill
the coolant recovery tank. If the The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on hot engine parts.
coolant inside the coolant recovery this symbol on it. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
tank is boiling, do not do anything
When the engine is cold, the coolant and it will burn if the engine parts
else until it cools down. If coolant is
level should be at or above the are hot enough. Do not spill
visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add FULL COLD line marked on the coolant on a hot engine.
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable recovery tank.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the When the engine is hot, the Notice: This vehicle has a
coolant recovery tank, but be sure level could be higher than the specific coolant fill procedure.
the cooling system is cool before FULL COLD line. If the coolant is Failure to follow this procedure
this is done. See Cooling System on below the FULL COLD line when could cause the engine to
page 10‑15 for more information. the engine is hot, there could be a overheat and be severely
leak in the cooling system. damaged.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant If coolant is needed, add the proper
or take the vehicle to a dealer for DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
service. coolant recovery tank.
10-18 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the

Radiator WARNING (Continued)
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
{ WARNING cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
An electric engine cooling fan
have to turn the pressure cap.
under the hood can start up 2. Remove the radiator pressure
even when the engine is not cap when the cooling system,
running and can cause injury. If coolant is needed, add the proper including the upper radiator
Keep hands, clothing, and tools mixture directly to the radiator, but hose, is no longer hot.
away from any underhood be sure the cooling system is cool Turn the pressure cap slowly
electric fan. before this is done. counterclockwise about one
full turn.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that
to stop. A hiss means there is
{ WARNING still some pressure left in the
Steam and scalding liquids system.
from a hot cooling system can 3. Keep turning the pressure cap
blow out and burn you badly. slowly and remove it.
They are under pressure, and if 4. Fill the radiator to the base of
you turn the surge tank pressure the filler neck with the proper
cap — even a little — they can DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank 1. Detach fasteners and lift
(Continued) off the panel that covers the
radiator cap.
Vehicle Care 10-19
8. If the coolant level inside the Engine Overheating

radiator filler neck is low, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL The vehicle has several indicators
coolant mixture through the filler to warn of engine overheating.
neck until the level is back up to There is an engine coolant
the base of the filler neck. temperature gauge on the
9. Replace the pressure cap. instrument panel cluster.
Be sure to secure it tightly. See Engine Coolant Temperature
At any time during this Gauge on page 5‑14.
procedure if coolant begins The vehicle may also display
to flow out of the filler neck, an ENGINE OVERHEATED
reinstall the pressure cap. IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to Notice: If the pressure cap is not OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
the FULL COLD mark. tightly installed, coolant loss and message in the Driver Information
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant possible engine damage may Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
recovery tank but leave the occur. Be sure the cap is properly System Messages on page 5‑39.
radiator pressure cap off. and tightly secured. You may decide not to lift the hood
7. Start the engine and let it run when this warning appears, but
until the upper radiator hose instead get service help right away.
feels warm. Any time during See Roadside Assistance Program
this procedure, watch out for (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
the engine cooling fans. or Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If you do decide to lift the hood, If Steam Is Coming from the

make sure the vehicle is parked Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued)
on a level surface.
If you keep driving when the
Then check to see if the engine { WARNING vehicles engine is overheated,
cooling fans are running. If the the liquids in it can catch fire.
engine is overheating, both fans Steam from an overheated engine
You or others could be badly
should be running. If they are not, can burn you badly, even if you
burned. Stop the engine if it
do not continue to run the engine just open the hood. Stay away
overheats, and get out of the
and have the vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: Engine damage from hear steam coming from it.
running the engine without Turn it off and get everyone See Overheated Engine
coolant is not covered by the away from the vehicle until it Protection Operating Mode on
warranty. cools down. Wait until there is page 10‑22 for information on
no sign of steam or coolant driving to a safe place in an
Notice: If the engine catches fire emergency.
before you open the hood.
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged. (Continued)
The costly repairs would not be
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑22 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
Vehicle Care 10-21
If No Steam Is Coming from If the overheat warning is displayed Continue to drive the vehicle slow
the Engine Compartment with no sign of steam: for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
1. Turn the air conditioning off. vehicle distance from the car in front
If an engine overheat warning is of you. If the warning does not come
displayed but no steam can be seen 2. Turn the heater on to the highest back on, continue to drive normally.
or heard, the problem may not be temperature and to the highest
too serious. Sometimes the engine fan speed. Open the windows as If the warning continues, pull
can get a little too hot when the necessary. over, stop, and park the vehicle
vehicle: right away.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day N (Neutral), otherwise, shift If there is no sign of steam, idle
to the highest gear while the engine for three minutes while
. Stops after high-speed driving parked. If the warning is still
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
. Idles for long periods in traffic displayed, turn off the engine until it
If the temperature overheat gauge cools down. Also, see “Overheated
. Tows a trailer is no longer in the overheat zone Engine Protection Operating Mode”
or an overheat warning no longer next in this section.
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Overheated Engine Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Protection Fluid
Operating Mode To check the power steering fluid:
This emergency operating mode lets 1. Turn the key off and let the
the vehicle be driven to a safe place engine compartment cool down.
in an emergency situation. If an 2. Remove the engine cover.
overheated engine condition exists, See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.
an overheat protection mode which The power steering fluid reservoir is 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
alternates firing groups of cylinders located under the engine cover on reservoir clean.
helps prevent engine damage. In the passenger side of the vehicle.
this mode, there is a significant loss See Engine Compartment Overview 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
in power and engine performance. on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. dipstick with a clean rag.
The temperature gauge indicates an 5. Replace the cap and completely
overheat condition exists. Driving When to Check Power Steering tighten it.
extended distances and/or towing Fluid
a trailer in the overheat protection 6. Remove the cap again and look
It is not necessary to regularly at the fluid level on the dipstick.
mode should be avoided.
check power steering fluid unless
Notice: After driving in the you suspect there is a leak in the The fluid level should be
overheated engine protection system or you hear an unusual somewhere between MAX and
operating mode, to avoid engine noise. A fluid loss in this system MIN line on the dipstick in room
damage, allow the engine to cool could indicate a problem. Have the temperature. If the fluid is on or
before attempting any repair. system inspected and repaired. below MIN line, you should add
The engine oil will be severely fluid close to MAX Line.
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Vehicle Care 10-23
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid Notice:

To determine what kind of fluid to When the windshield washer fluid . When using concentrated
use, see Recommended Fluids and reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID washer fluid, follow the
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always LOW ADD FLUID message will be manufacturer's instructions
use the proper fluid. displayed on the Driver Information for adding water.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid . Do not mix water with
may damage the vehicle and the Messages on page 5‑46 for more ready-to-use washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by information. Water can cause the solution
the vehicle's warranty. Always to freeze and damage the
use the correct fluid listed in washer fluid tank and other
Recommended Fluids and parts of the washer system.
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
Washer Fluid . Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full when
What to Use Open the cap with the washer it is very cold. This allows
When adding windshield symbol on it. Add washer fluid for fluid expansion if
washer fluid, be sure to read the until the tank is full. See Engine freezing occurs, which
manufacturer's instructions before Compartment Overview on could damage the tank
use. If the vehicle will be operating page 10‑6 for reservoir location. if it is completely full.
in an area where the temperature . Do not use engine coolant
may fall below freezing, use a fluid (antifreeze) in the windshield
that has sufficient protection against washer. It can damage the
freezing. windshield washer system
and paint.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when
This vehicle has disc brakes. Every time the brakes are applied,
the brakes are first applied or
Disc brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
lightly applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
the brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in if the vehicle is to have really good
the proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with sign that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why

the brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added,
. The brake fluid level goes down it can spill on the engine and
because of normal brake lining burn, if the engine is hot enough.
wear. When new linings are You or others could be burned,
installed, the fluid level goes and the vehicle could be
back up. damaged. Add brake fluid only
The brake master cylinder reservoir . A fluid leak in the brake when work is done on the brake
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as hydraulic system can also cause hydraulic system.
indicated on the reservoir cap. a low fluid level. Have the brake
See Engine Compartment Overview hydraulic system fixed, since a
on page 10‑6 for the location of the leak means that sooner or later When the brake fluid falls to a low
reservoir. the brakes will not work well. level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 5‑20.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
10-26 Vehicle Care
What to Add Notice: Battery

Use only new DOT 3 brake . Using the wrong fluid Refer to the replacement number
fluid from a sealed container. can badly damage brake on the original battery label when a
See Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. new battery is needed.
Lubricants on page 11‑7. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area such as engine oil, in the { DANGER
around the cap before removing it. brake hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and
This helps keep dirt from entering damage brake hydraulic
related accessories contain lead
the reservoir. system parts so badly that
and lead compounds, chemicals
they will have to be replaced.
known to the State of California
Do not let someone put in
{ WARNING the wrong kind of fluid. to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
With the wrong kind of fluid in . If brake fluid is spilled on the
the brake hydraulic system, vehicle's painted surfaces,
the brakes might not work well. the paint finish can be
This could cause a crash. Always damaged. Be careful not
use the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive 2. Firmly apply both the parking

brake and the regular brake.
It is not necessary to check the
{ WARNING all–wheel drive lubricant levels.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑30.
A fluid leak is the only reason for
Batteries have acid that can burn Do not use the accelerator
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the
you and gas that can explode. pedal, and be ready to turn off
vehicle to the dealer as soon as
You can be badly hurt if you are possible. the engine immediately if it
not careful. See Jump Starting on starts.
page 10‑83 for tips on working
around a battery without
Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
getting hurt.
{ WARNING only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
Infrequent Usage: Remove the When you are doing this position, contact your dealer for
black, negative (−) cable from the inspection, the vehicle could service.
battery to keep the battery from move suddenly. If the vehicle
running down. moves, you or others could be
Extended Storage: Remove the injured.
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle 1. Before starting this check, be
charger. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
LOCK/OFF only when the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
2. Firmly apply the parking shift lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake,
brake. See Parking Brake on . The ignition key should come set the parking brake.
page 9‑30.
out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's
Be ready to apply the regular
Contact your dealer if service is holding ability: With the engine
brake immediately if the vehicle
required. running and the transmission in
begins to move.
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Vehicle Care 10-29

. To check the P (Park) Backglass Wiper Blade
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift To replace the backglass wiper
to P (Park). Then release the blade:
parking brake followed by the 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly
regular brake. away from the backglass.
Contact your dealer if service is 2. Press the button in the middle of The backglass wiper blade will
required. the wiper arm connector and pull not lock in a vertical position
the wiper blade away from the so care should be used when
Wiper Blade Replacement arm connector. pulling it away from the vehicle.
Windshield wiper blades should 3. Install the new wiper blade and 2. Rotate the wiper blade
be inspected for wear or cracking. make sure the wiper blade locks assembly, hold the wiper arm in
See Scheduled Maintenance on into place. position, and push the blade
page 11‑2 for more information. away from the wiper arm.
For the proper size and type see
Replacement blades come in Maintenance Replacement Parts on 3. Replace the wiper blade.
different types and are removed in page 11‑9. 4. Return the wiper arm and blade
different ways. To replace the wiper assembly to the rest position on
blade assembly: the glass.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
away from the windshield. Windshield Replacement
If the vehicle is equipped with the
Head‐Up display (HUD) system
and the windshield needs to be
replaced, get one that is designed
for HUD or the HUD image may
look out of focus.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge

Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment. page 10‑31. { WARNING
However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure The low beam high intensity
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system
be affected. Aim adjustment to your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage.
the low-beam headlamps may be
If you try to service any of the
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs system components, you could
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim). be seriously injured. Have your
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
If the headlamps need to be service them.
re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized
you take the vehicle to your dealer gas inside and can burst if you
for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or The up‐level vehicle has HID
others could be injured. Be sure headlamps. After an HID headlamp
to read and follow the instructions bulb has been replaced, the beam
on the bulb package. might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
Vehicle Care 10-31
License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket Electrical System

counterclockwise and pull the
To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight out of the socket.
1. Remove the two screws holding
High Voltage Devices and
4. Install the new bulb.
each of the license plate lamps Wiring
to the liftgate trim. 5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
{ WARNING
Replacement Bulbs Exposure to high voltage
can cause shock, burns, and
Bulb even death. The high voltage
Exterior Lamp
Number components in the vehicle can
License Plate Lamp 194LL only be serviced by technicians
with special training.
For replacement bulbs not listed High voltage components are
here, contact your dealer. identified by labels. Do not
remove, open, take apart,
or modify these components.
2. Turn and pull the license plate High voltage cable or wiring has
lamp forward through the lift gate orange covering. Do not probe,
trim opening. tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Electrical System borrowed. Choose some feature of Fuses and Circuit

the vehicle that is not needed to use
Overload and replace it as soon as possible.
Breakers
The vehicle has fuses and circuit The wiring circuits in your vehicle
breakers to protect against an Headlamp Wiring are protected from short circuits
electrical system overload. An electrical overload may cause by a combination of fuses, circuit
When the current electrical load the lamps to go on and off, or in breakers and fusible thermal links.
is too heavy, the circuit breaker some cases to remain off. Have This greatly reduces the chance of
opens and closes, protecting the the headlamp wiring checked right fires caused by electrical problems.
circuit until the current load returns away if the lamps go on and off or Look at the silver-colored band
to normal or the problem is fixed. remain off. inside the fuse. If the band is broken
This greatly reduces the chance of Windshield Wipers or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
circuit overload and fire caused by you replace a bad fuse with a new
electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to one of the identical size and rating.
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Fuses and circuit breakers protect wipers will stop until the motor cools Fuses of the same amperage
the following in the vehicle: and will then restart. can be temporarily borrowed from
. Headlamp Wiring another fuse location, if a fuse goes
Although the circuit is protected out. Replace the fuse as soon as
. Windshield Wiper Motor from electrical overload, overload you can.
due to heavy snow or ice may
. Power Windows and Other cause wiper linkage damage.
Power Accessories Always clear ice and heavy snow
Replace a bad fuse with a new one from the windshield before using
of the identical size and rating. the windshield wipers.
If there is a problem on the road If the overload is caused by an
and a fuse needs to be replaced, electrical problem and not snow
the same amperage fuse can be or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Engine Compartment To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located
in the engine compartment, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover for access to the

fuse/relay block.
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
Notice: Spilling liquid on any with all of the fuses, relays, and
electrical component on the features shown. Air Conditioning
A/C CLUTCH
vehicle may damage it. Always Clutch
keep the covers on any electrical Antilock Braking
component. ABS MTR System (ABS)
Motor
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Adaptive Forward FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Powertrain Control
AFS PCM IGN
Lighting System Module Ignition
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
AIRBAG Airbag System PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power PWR
Fuel System Power Outlet
FSCM OUTLET
AUX Auxiliary Control Module
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump REAR
HORN Horn Rear Camera
CAMERA
All-Wheel-Drive
AWD Heated Outside
System HTD MIR Rear Accessory
Rearview Mirror RR APO
Power Outlet
BATT 1 Battery 1
Heating,
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger
BATT 2 Battery 2 Ventilation and
HVAC BLWR
Air Conditioning Rear Climate
BATT 3 Battery 3 RR HVAC
Blower Control System
CIGAR
Cigar Lighter Left High-Beam Right High‐Beam
LIGHTER LT HI BEAM RT HI BEAM
Headlamp Headlamp
Engine Control
ECM Left Low‐Beam Right Low‐Beam
Module LT LO BEAM RT LO BEAM
Headlamp Headlamp
Engine Control
ECM 1 LT PRK Left Parking Lamp Right
Module 1 RT PRK
Parking Lamp
Trailer Left
EMISSION 1 Emission 1 LT TRLR
Stoplamp and Trailer Right
STOP/TRN RT TRLR
EMISSION 2 Emission 2 Turn Signal Stoplamp and
STOP/TRN
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils Turn Signal
ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils
Vehicle Care 10-35
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage

Regulated Voltage A/C PRK LAMP Park Lamp
RVC SNSR Air Conditioning
Control Sensor CMPRSR
Compressor Clutch PWR/TRN Powertrain
CLTCH
S/ROOF/
Sunroof Rear Window
SUNSHADE AUX Auxiliary RR DEFOG
Defogger
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
SERVICE Service Repair
Trailer Right
CRNK Switched Power RT TRLR
SPARE Spare Stoplamp and
STOP/TRN
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Turn Signal Lamp
Stop Lamps Stop Lamps
(China Only) (China Only) FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Stop Lamps Stop Lamps
(China Only) (China Only)
STRTR Starter FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3
TRLR Trailer Back-up
Transmission FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
TCM BCK/UP Lamps
Control Module
High‐Beam
HI BEAM WPR Windshield Wiper
TRANS Transmission Headlamps
Windshield Wiper
TRLR Trailer Back‐up High Intensity WPR HI
High Speed
BCK/UP Lamps HID/ Discharge (HID)
LO BEAM Low‐Beam
TRLR BRK Trailer Brake Instrument Panel Fuse
Headlamps
TRLR Trailer Parking
HORN Horn Block
PRK LAMP Lamps
IGN Ignition Main The instrument panel fuse block
TRLR PWR Trailer Power is located under the instrument
Trailer Left panel on the passenger side of the
Windshield LT TRLR
WPR/WSW Stoplamp and vehicle. Pull down on the cover to
Wiper/Washer STOP/TRN
Turn Signal Lamp access the fuse block.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbag Heating,
HVAC Ventilation and
AMP Amplifier
Air Conditioning
BCK/ Back‐up
INADV/ Inadvertent
UP/STOP Lamp/Stoplamp
PWR/LED Power LED
Body Control
BCM INFOTMNT Infotainment
Module
Driver Side Turn
CNSTR/ LT/TRN/SIG
Canister Vent Signal
VENT
Memory Seat
CTSY Courtesy MSM
Module
DR/LCK Door Locks
Power Mirrors,
PDM
Daytime Running Liftgate Release
DRL
Lamps
PWR MODE Power Mode
GMC HID Only
PWR/MIR Power Mirrors
(If Equipped)/
DRL 2
Rear Fog RDO Radio
Lamps-China Only
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
DSPLY Display
Passenger Side
RT/TRN/SIG
Front Windshield Turn Signal
Fuse Side FRT/WSW
Washer
SPARE Spare
The vehicle may not be equipped
HTD/ Heated/
with all of the fuses, relays, and STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel
COOL SEAT Cooling Seats
features shown. ILLUM Illumination
Vehicle Care 10-37
Relays Usage Relays Usage

LT/ Driver Side Power Daytime Running
PWR/SEAT Seat Relay DRL2 Lamps 2 Relay
(If Equipped)
RT/ Passenger Side
PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay Driver Side Unlock
LT/UNLCK
Relay
Power Windows
PWR/WNDW
Relay Daytime Running
DRL Lamps Relay
PWR/ Power Steering
(If Equipped)
COLUMN Column Relay
SPARE Spare
L/GATE Liftgate Relay
Front Windshield
LCK Power Lock Relay FRT/WSW
Washer Relay
Rear Window
REAR/WSW
Washer Relay
Power Unlock
UNLCK
Relay
Relay Side
10-38 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Replace any tires that have
same danger as overloaded been damaged by impacts
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash with potholes, curbs, etc.
high-quality tires made by could cause serious injury.
a leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to
. Improperly repaired tires
See the warranty manual maintain the recommended can cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
for information regarding pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when service center should repair,
the tire warranty and where replace, dismount, and mount
to get service. For additional the tires are cold.
the tires.
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured,
. Do not spin the tires in
or broken by a sudden excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at as snow, mud, ice, etc.
the recommended pressure. Excessive spinning may
. Poorly maintained and
cause the tires to explode.
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause
dangerous. a crash. If the tread is badly
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a (Continued)
result of too much flexing.
There could be a blowout and
a serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-39
Tire Sidewall Labeling aspect ratio, construction type, (D) Tire Identification
and service description. See the Number (TIN): The letters
Useful information about a “Tire Size” illustration later in this and numbers following the DOT
tire is molded into its sidewall. section for more detail. (Department of Transportation)
The examples below show a code are the Tire Identification
typical passenger vehicle tire (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria Number (TIN). The TIN shows
and a compact spare tire the manufacturer and plant
sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to code, tire size, and date the tire
GM's specific tire performance was manufactured. The TIN is
criteria have a TPC specification molded onto both sides of the
code molded onto the sidewall. tire, although only one side may
GM's TPC specifications meet have the date of manufacture.
or exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
guidelines. of cord and number of plies in
(C) DOT (Department the sidewall and under the tread.
of Transportation): (F) Uniform Tire Quality
The Department of Grading (UTQG): Tire
Transportation (DOT) code manufacturers are required
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example indicates that the tire is in to grade tires based on three
compliance with the U.S. performance factors: treadwear,
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is Department of Transportation traction, and temperature
a combination of letters and Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. resistance. For more information
numbers used to define a see Uniform Tire Quality
particular tire's width, height, Grading on page 10‑57.
10-40 Vehicle Care
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: The TIN shows the
Load Limit: Maximum load The compact spare tire or manufacturer and plant
that can be carried and the temporary use tire has a tread code, tire size, and date the
maximum pressure needed life of approximately 5 000 km tire was manufactured. The TIN
to support that load. (3,000 mi) and should not be is molded onto both sides of the
driven at speeds over 105 km/h tire, although only one side may
(65 mph). The compact spare have the date of manufacture.
tire is for emergency use when (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
a regular road tire has lost air Load Limit: Maximum load
and gone flat. If the vehicle that can be carried and the
has a compact spare tire, maximum pressure needed
see Compact Spare Tire on to support that load.
page 10‑82 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑61. (E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
(C) Tire Identification Number spare tire should be inflated
(TIN): The letters and numbers to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
Compact Spare Tire Example following the DOT (Department information on tire pressure and
of Transportation) code is the inflation see Tire Pressure on
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
Tire Identification Number (TIN). page 10‑45.
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-41
(F) Tire Size: A combination of Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
letters and numbers define a number indicates the tire section
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, Tire Size width in millimeters from
construction type, and service The following is an example sidewall to sidewall.
description. The letter T as the of a typical passenger vehicle (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
first character in the tire size tire size. number that indicates the tire
means the tire is for temporary height‐to‐width measurements.
use only. For example, if the tire size
(G) TPC Spec (Tire aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
Performance Criteria item C of the illustration, it would
Specification): Original mean that the tire's sidewall is
equipment tires designed to 60 percent as high as it is wide.
GM's specific tire performance (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: (D) Construction Code:
criteria have a TPC specification The United States version of A letter code is used to indicate
code molded onto the sidewall. a metric tire sizing system. the type of ply construction in
GM's TPC specifications meet The letter P as the first the tire. The letter R means
or exceed all federal safety character in the tire size radial ply construction; the
guidelines. means a passenger vehicle letter D means diagonal or
tire engineered to standards bias ply construction; and the
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim letter B means belted‐bias ply
Association. construction.
10-42 Vehicle Care
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional tire in which the plies are laid
(F) Service Description: These accessories. Some examples at alternate angles less than
characters represent the load of optional accessories are, 90 degrees to the centerline
index and speed rating of the automatic transmission, power of the tread.
tire. The load index represents steering, power brakes, power Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire windows, power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed conditioning. measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a Aspect Ratio: The relationship or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load. of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat
Belt: A rubber coated layer of from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and cords that is located between on page 10‑45.
Definitions the plies and the tread. Cords Curb Weight: The weight of a
Air Pressure: The amount may be made from steel or other motor vehicle with standard and
of air inside the tire pressing reinforcing materials. optional equipment including
outward on each square inch Bead: The tire bead contains the maximum capacity of fuel,
of the tire. Air pressure is steel wires wrapped by steel oil, and coolant, but without
expressed in psi (pounds per cords that hold the tire onto passengers and cargo.
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). the rim.
Vehicle Care 10-43
DOT Markings: A code Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle

molded into the sidewall of The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
a tire signifying that the tire that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
is in compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight:
Standards. The DOT code The number of occupants a
includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and vehicle is designed to seat
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).
designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. See Vehicle Load Limits on
identify the tire manufacturer, page 9‑12.
production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned
date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution :
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall:
on page 9‑12. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The side of an asymmetrical tire
The maximum air pressure to that has a particular side that
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle faces outward when mounted
Weight Rating for the front axle. which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is on a vehicle. The side of the
See Vehicle Load Limits on tire that contains a whitewall,
page 9‑12. molded onto the sidewall.
bears white lettering, or bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Maximum Load Rating: manufacturer, brand, and/or
Weight Rating for the rear axle. The load rating for a tire at the model name molding that is
See Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation higher or deeper than the same
page 9‑12. pressure for that tire. moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
10-44 Vehicle Care
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Rim: A metal support for a tire Treadwear Indicators:
A tire used on passenger cars and upon which the tire beads Narrow bands, sometimes
and some light duty trucks and are seated. called wear bars, that show
multipurpose vehicles. Sidewall: The portion of a tire across the tread of a tire when
Recommended Inflation between the tread and the bead. only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread
Pressure: Vehicle remains. See When It Is Time
Speed Rating: An for New Tires on page 10‑53.
manufacturer's recommended alphanumeric code assigned
tire inflation pressure as to a tire indicating the maximum UTQGS (Uniform Tire
shown on the tire placard. speed at which a tire can Quality Grading Standards):
See Tire Pressure on operate. A tire information system that
page 10‑45 and Vehicle provides consumers with
Load Limits on page 9‑12. Traction: The friction between ratings for a tire's traction,
the tire and the road surface. temperature, and treadwear.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic The amount of grip provided.
tire in which the ply cords that Ratings are determined
extend to the beads are laid at Tread: The portion of a tire by tire manufacturers using
90 degrees to the centerline of that comes into contact with government testing procedures.
the tread. the road. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑57.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Vehicle Capacity Weight: Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires

The number of designated that have too much air, can
seating positions multiplied by Tires need the correct amount result in:
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated of air pressure to operate
effectively. . Unusual wear.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12. Notice: Neither tire . Poor handling.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the underinflation nor . Rough ride.
Tire: Load on an individual tire overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or
. Needless damage from
due to curb weight, accessory road hazards.
weight, occupant weight, and tires that do not have
cargo weight. enough air, can result in: A vehicle-specific Tire and
. Tire overloading and Loading Information label
Vehicle Placard: A label is attached to the vehicle.
permanently attached to over-heating which could
lead to a blowout. This label shows the vehicle's
a vehicle showing the vehicle original equipment tires and the
capacity weight and the . Premature or correct inflation pressures for
original equipment tire size irregular wear. the tires when they are cold.
and recommended inflation . Poor handling. The recommended cold tire
pressure. See “Tire and Loading inflation pressure, shown on the
Information Label” under Vehicle . Reduced fuel economy. label, is the minimum amount of
Load Limits on page 9‑12. air pressure needed to support
the vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
10-46 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check If the cold tire inflation pressure
regarding how much weight Use a good quality pocket-type matches the recommended
the vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. pressure on the Tire and
example of the Tire and Loading You cannot tell if the tires are Loading Information label, no
Information label, see Vehicle properly inflated simply by further adjustment is necessary.
Load Limits on page 9‑12. looking at them. Radial tires may If the inflation pressure is low,
How you load the vehicle affects look properly inflated even when add air until you reach the
vehicle handling and ride they are underinflated. Check recommended amount.
comfort. Never load the vehicle the tire's inflation pressure when If you overfill the tire, release air
with more weight than it was the tires are cold. Cold means by pushing on the metal stem
designed to carry. the vehicle has been sitting for in the center of the tire valve.
When to Check at least three hours or driven Re‐check the tire pressure with
no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). the tire gauge.
Check the tires once a month or
more. Do not forget to check the Remove the valve cap from the Be sure to put the valve caps
compact spare tire, if the vehicle tire valve stem. Press the tire back on the valve stems.
has one. The compact spare gauge firmly onto the valve to They help prevent leaks by
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi). get a pressure measurement. keeping out dirt and moisture.
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑82.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
a receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation is illuminated, the system may
(if provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and not be able to detect or signal low
monthly when cold and inflated to tire tread life, and may affect the tire pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on ability. of reasons, including the installation
the vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you tire pressure, even if under‐inflation telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire has not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow
As an added safety feature, your
the TPMS to continue to function
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been properly.
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑48 for
additional information.
10-48 Vehicle Care
Federal Communications For additional information and

Commission (FCC) and details about the DIC operation
Industry Canada and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 5‑25 or Driver Information
page 13‑20 for information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
regarding Part 15 of the Federal on page 5‑30 and Tire Messages on
Communications Commission When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates page 5‑44.
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310. the low tire pressure warning light The low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster. may come on in cool weather when
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle is first started, and then
Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate turn off as the vehicle is driven.
Operation the tires to the recommended This could be an early indicator that
This vehicle may have a Tire pressure shown on the tire loading the air pressure is getting low and
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). information label. See Vehicle Load needs to be inflated to the proper
The TPMS is designed to warn Limits on page 9‑12. pressure.
the driver when a low tire pressure A message to check the pressure in A Tire and Loading Information
condition exists. TPMS sensors are a specific tire displays in the Driver label shows the size of the original
mounted onto each tire and wheel Information Center (DIC). The low equipment tires and the correct
assembly, excluding the spare tire tire pressure warning light and the inflation pressure for the tires when
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle DIC warning message come on at they are cold. See Vehicle Load
has one. The TPMS sensors each ignition cycle until the tires Limits on page 9‑12, for an example
monitor the air pressure in the are inflated to the correct inflation of the Tire and Loading Information
tires and transmits the tire pressure pressure. Using the DIC, tire label and its location. Also see Tire
readings to a receiver located in pressure levels can be viewed. Pressure on page 10‑45.
the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-49
The TPMS can warn about a TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching
low tire pressure condition but Message process was not done or
it does not replace normal tire not completed successfully
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly after rotating the tires.
on page 10‑51, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors The malfunction light and the
page 10‑52 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When DIC message should go off
page 10‑38. the system detects a malfunction, after successfully completing
the low tire warning light flashes for the sensor matching process.
Notice: Tire sealant materials about one minute and then stays See "TPMS Sensor Matching
are not all the same. on for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section
A non-approved tire sealant cycle. A DIC warning message also
could damage the TPMS sensors. displays. The malfunction light and
. One or more TPMS sensors
TPMS sensor damage caused by DIC warning message come on at are missing or damaged.
using an incorrect tire sealant each ignition cycle until the problem The malfunction light and
is not covered by the vehicle is corrected. Some of the conditions the DIC message should go
warranty. Always use only that can cause these to come off when the TPMS sensors
the GM-approved tire sealant on are: are installed and the sensor
available through your dealer matching process is performed
or included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer
replaced with the spare tire. for service.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits The spare tire does not have a
use a GM approved liquid tire TPMS sensor. The malfunction
sealant. Using non-approved tire light and DIC message should
sealants could damage the TPMS go off after the road tire is
sensors. See Tire Sealant and replaced and the sensor
Compressor Kit on page 10‑63 for matching process is performed
information regarding the inflator successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
kit materials and instructions. Matching Process" later in this
section.
10-50 Vehicle Care

. Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching There are two minutes to match
not match the original equipment Process the first tire/wheel position, and
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels five minutes overall to match all
other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
could prevent the TPMS from identification code. The identification longer, the matching process stops
functioning properly. See Buying code needs to be matched to a new and must be restarted.
New Tires on page 10‑54. tire/wheel position after rotating the
tires or replacing one or more of the The TPMS sensor matching
. Operating electronic devices or TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor process is:
being near facilities using radio matching process should also be
wave frequencies similar to the 1. Set the parking brake.
performed after replacing a spare
TPMS could cause the TPMS tire with a road tire containing the 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
sensors to malfunction. TPMS sensor. The malfunction the engine off.
If the TPMS is not functioning light and the DIC message should 3. Press the Remote Keyless
properly, it cannot detect or signal a go off at the next ignition cycle. Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK
low tire condition. See your dealer The sensors are matched to the and UNLOCK buttons at the
for service if the TPMS malfunction tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS same time for approximately
light and DIC message comes on relearn tool, in the following order: five seconds. The horn sounds
and stays on. driver side front tire, passenger side twice to signal the receiver
front tire, passenger side rear tire, is in relearn mode and TIRE
and driver side rear. See your LEARNING ACTIVE message
dealer for service or to purchase displays on the DIC screen.
a relearn tool.
Vehicle Care 10-51
4. Start with the driver side 8. Proceed to the driver side rear Replace the tire if:
front tire. tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds two
. The indicators at three or
5. Place the relearn tool against more places around the tire
the tire sidewall, near the valve times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been can be seen.
stem. Then press the button
to activate the TPMS sensor. matched to the driver side rear . There is cord or fabric
tire, and the TPMS sensor
A horn chirp confirms that the showing through the tire's
sensor identification code has matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING rubber.
been matched to this tire and
wheel position. ACTIVE message on the DIC . The tread or sidewall is
display screen goes off. cracked, cut, or snagged
6. Proceed to the passenger
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. deep enough to show cord
side front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. 10. Set all four tires to the or fabric.
7. Proceed to the passenger recommended air pressure . The tire has a bump, bulge,
side rear tire, and repeat the level as indicated on the Tire or split.
procedure in Step 5. and Loading Information label.
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
Tire Inspection or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
GM recommends that the tires, the size or location of the
including the spare tire, if the damage.
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Tire Rotation Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor

System. See Tire Pressure
Tires should be rotated every Monitor Operation on
12 000 km (7,500 miles). page 10‑48.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
The purpose of a regular tire See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
rotation is to achieve a uniform Capacities and Specifications on
wear for all tires on the vehicle. page 12‑2.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like
it did when the tires were new. { WARNING
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
The first rotation is the most Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
always use the correct rotation
important. See Scheduled parts to which it is fastened, can
pattern shown here.
Maintenance on page 11‑2. make wheel nuts become loose
If the vehicle has a compact after time. The wheel could come
Any time you notice unusual
spare tire, do not include it in off and cause an accident. When
wear, rotate the tires as soon
the tire rotation. changing a wheel, remove any
as possible and check wheel
After the tires have been rust or dirt from places where the
alignment. Also check for
rotated, adjust the front and rear wheel attaches to the vehicle.
damaged tires or wheels. In an emergency, use a cloth or
See When It Is Time for New inflation pressures as shown on
a paper towel to do this; but be
Tires on page 10‑53 and Wheel the Tire and Loading Information
sure to use a scraper or wire
Replacement on page 10‑59. label. See Tire Pressure on brush later, if needed, to get all
page 10‑45 and Vehicle Load the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire
Limits on page 9‑12. Goes Flat on page 10‑61.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Lightly coat the center of the When It Is Time for New the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
wheel hub with wheel bearing or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Tires Inspection on page 10‑51 and Tire
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion Factors such as maintenance, Rotation on page 10‑52 for more
temperatures, driving speeds, information.
or rust build-up. Do not get
vehicle loading, and road conditions The rubber in tires ages over time.
grease on the flat wheel affect the wear rate of the tires.
mounting surface or on the This also applies for the spare tire,
wheel nuts or bolts. if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple conditions
Make sure the spare tire, if including temperatures, loading
the vehicle has one, is stored conditions, and inflation pressure
securely. Push, pull, and then maintenance affect how fast aging
try to rotate or turn the tire. takes place. Tires will typically
If it moves, tighten the cable. need to be replaced due to wear
See Tire Changing on before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
page 10‑71.
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
Treadwear indicators are one way

to tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
10-54 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires GM's exclusive TPC Spec

Tires age when stored normally system considers over a
GM has developed and matched dozen critical specifications that
mounted on a parked vehicle. specific tires for the vehicle.
Park a vehicle that will be stored impact the overall performance
The original equipment tires of the vehicle, including brake
for at least a month in a cool, dry,
clean area away from direct sunlight installed on the vehicle, system performance, ride and
to slow aging. This area should be when it was new, were handling, traction control,
free of grease, gasoline, or other designed to meet General and tire pressure monitoring
substances that can deteriorate Motors Tire Performance performance. GM's TPC Spec
rubber. Criteria Specification (TPC number is molded onto the tire's
Parking for an extended period Spec) system rating. If you sidewall near the tire size. If the
can cause flat spots on the tires need replacement tires, GM tires have an all‐season tread
that may result in vibrations while strongly recommends that you design, the TPC Spec number
driving. When storing a vehicle for get tires with the same TPC will be followed by an MS
at least a month, remove the tires Spec rating. This way, the for mud and snow. See Tire
or raise the vehicle to reduce the vehicle will continue to have
weight from the tires. Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑39
tires that are designed to give for additional information.
the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Vehicle Care 10-55
GM recommends replacing
tires in sets of four. This is { WARNING { WARNING
because uniform tread depth Mixing tires could cause you Using bias-ply tires on the
on all tires will help keep the to lose control while driving. vehicle may cause the wheel
vehicle performing most like it If you mix tires of different rim flanges to develop cracks
did when the tires were new. sizes, brands, or types after many miles of driving.
Replacing less than a full set (radial and bias-belted tires), A tire and/or wheel could fail
of tires can affect the braking the vehicle may not handle suddenly and cause a crash.
and handling performance of properly, and you could have Use only radial-ply tires with
the vehicle. See Tire Inspection a crash. Using tires of different the wheels on the vehicle.
on page 10‑51 and Tire Rotation sizes, brands, or types may
on page 10‑52 for information also cause damage to the
on proper tire rotation. If you must replace the vehicle's
vehicle. Be sure to use the tires with those that do not
correct size, brand, and type have a TPC Spec number,
{ WARNING of tires on all wheels. It is all make sure they are the same
Tires could explode during
right to drive with the compact size, load range, speed rating,
improper service. Attempting to spare temporarily, as it was and construction type (radial
mount or dismount a tire could developed for use on the and bias‐belted tires) as the
cause injury or death. Only your vehicle. See Compact Spare vehicle's original tires.
dealer or authorized tire service Tire on page 10‑82.
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and WARNING (Continued)
pressure monitoring system Wheels
could give an inaccurate
If wheels or tires are installed that wheels are selected. This
low‐pressure warning if
are a different size than the original increases the chance of a crash
non‐TPC Spec rated tires
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle and serious injury. Only use GM
are installed on the vehicle. performance, including its braking, specific wheel and tire systems
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may ride and handling characteristics, developed for the vehicle, and
give a low‐pressure warning stability, and resistance to rollover have them properly installed by
that is higher or lower than the may be affected. If the vehicle has a GM certified technician.
proper warning level you would electronic systems such as antilock
get with TPC Spec rated tires. brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability See Buying New Tires on
See Tire Pressure Monitor
control, the performance of these page 10‑54 and Accessories
System on page 10‑47. and Modifications on page 10‑3
systems can also be affected.
The vehicle's original equipment for additional information.
tires are listed on the Tire and { WARNING
Loading Information label.
See Vehicle Load Limits on If different sized wheels are used,
page 9‑12 for more information there may not be an acceptable
about the Tire and Loading level of performance and safety if
Information label and its location tires not recommended for those
on the vehicle. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-57
Uniform Tire Quality Quality Grading (UTQG) Treadwear

Grading system does not apply to deep The treadwear grade is a
tread, winter-type snow tires, comparative rating based
Quality grades can be found space-saver, or temporary use
where applicable on the tire on the wear rate of the tire
spare tires, tires with nominal when tested under controlled
sidewall between tread shoulder rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
and maximum section width. conditions on a specified
(25 to 30 cm), or to some government test course.
For example: limited-production tires. For example, a tire graded
Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on 150 would wear one and a
Temperature A General Motors passenger half (1½) times as well on
The following information relates cars and light trucks may vary the government course as a
to the system developed by the with respect to these grades, tire graded 100. The relative
United States National Highway they must also conform to performance of tires depends
Traffic Safety Administration federal safety requirements and upon the actual conditions of
(NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire their use, however, and may
by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) depart significantly from the
temperature performance. standards. norm due to variations in
This applies only to vehicles All Passenger Car Tires Must driving habits, service practices
sold in the United States. Conform to Federal Safety and differences in road
The grades are molded on the Requirements In Addition characteristics and climate.
sidewalls of most passenger To These Grades.
car tires. The Uniform Tire
10-58 Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C passenger car tires must meet

The traction grades, from The temperature grades under the Federal Motor Safety
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, are A (the highest), B, and C, Standard No. 109. Grades B
and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance and A represent higher levels of
the tire's ability to stop on to the generation of heat and performance on the laboratory
wet pavement as measured its ability to dissipate heat test wheel than the minimum
under controlled conditions when tested under controlled required by law. Warning: The
on specified government conditions on a specified indoor temperature grade for this tire
test surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained is established for a tire that
concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause is properly inflated and not
have poor traction performance. the material of the tire to overloaded. Excessive speed,
Warning: The traction grade degenerate and reduce tire life, underinflation, or excessive
assigned to this tire is based and excessive temperature loading, either separately or in
on straight-ahead braking can lead to sudden tire failure. combination, can cause heat
traction tests, and does not The grade C corresponds to a buildup and possible tire failure.
include acceleration, cornering, level of performance which all
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement

Balance
{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
The tires and wheels were cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement
aligned and balanced at the corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
factory to provide the longest tire loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
life and best overall performance. wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling
Adjustments to wheel alignment and If the wheel leaks air, replace it. of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
tire balancing will not be necessary Some aluminum wheels can be and cause loss of control, causing
on a regular basis. However, check repaired. See your dealer if any a crash. Always use the correct
the alignment if there is unusual tire of these conditions exist. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
one side or the other. If the vehicle wheel that is needed.
vibrates when driving on a smooth
Each new wheel should have Notice: The wrong wheel can
road, the tires and wheels might
the same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with
need to be rebalanced. See your bearing life, brake cooling,
diameter, width, offset, and be
dealer for proper diagnosis.
mounted the same way as the speedometer or odometer
one it replaces. calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
Replace wheels, wheel bolts,
clearance, and tire or tire chain
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
clearance to the body and
System (TPMS) sensors with new
chassis.
GM original equipment parts.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
10-60 Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING { WARNING Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
Replacing a wheel with a used Do not use tire chains. There is recommends it for use on the
one is dangerous. How it has not enough clearance. Tire chains vehicle and tire size combination
been used or how far it has been used on a vehicle without the and road conditions. Follow that
driven may be unknown. It could proper amount of clearance can manufacturer's instructions.
fail suddenly and cause a crash. cause damage to the brakes, To help avoid damage to the
When replacing wheels, use a suspension or other vehicle parts. vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
new GM original equipment The area damaged by the tire or remove the device if it is
wheel. chains could cause you to lose contacting the vehicle, and do not
control of the vehicle and you or spin the vehicle's wheels. If you
others may be injured in a crash. do find traction devices that will
(Continued) fit, install them on the front tires.
Vehicle Care 10-61
If a Tire Goes Flat AA rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout, may require the same correction
especially if the tires are maintained as used in a skid. Stop pressing Lifting a vehicle and getting
properly. See Tires. If air goes out of the accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or
a tire, it is much more likely to leak straighten the vehicle. It may be repairs is dangerous without the
out slowly. But if there is ever a very bumpy and noisy. Gently appropriate safety equipment and
blowout, here are a few tips about brake to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with
what to expect and what to do: if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire changing a flat tire. If it is used for
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle { WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
toward that side. Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal and grip Driving on a flat tire will cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only
maintain lane position, and then Re-inflating a tire after it has use it for changing a flat tire.
gently brake to a stop, well off the been driven on while severely
road, if possible. underinflated or flat may cause If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
a blowout and a serious crash. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire to a level place, well off the road,
that has been driven on while if possible. Turn on the hazard
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon
as possible.
10-62 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
Changing a tire can be 4. Do not allow passengers to of wheel blocks (A).
dangerous. The vehicle can remain in the vehicle.
slip off the jack and roll over 5. Place wheel blocks on
or fall causing injury or death. both sides of the tire at the
Find a level place to change the opposite corner of the tire
tire. To help prevent the vehicle being changed.
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly. This vehicle may come with a jack
2. Put an automatic and spare tire or a tire sealant
transmission shift lever in and compressor kit. To use the
P (Park), or shift a manual jacking equipment to change A. Wheel Block
transmission to 1 (First) or a spare tire safely, follow the
R (Reverse). instructions below. Then see Tire B. Flat Tire
Changing on page 10‑71. To use The following information explains
3. Turn off the engine and do the tire sealant and compressor kit,
not restart while the vehicle how to repair or change a tire.
see Tire Sealant and Compressor
is raised. Kit on page 10‑63.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-63
Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and

Compressor Kit
{ WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Overinflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not
{ WARNING the tire to rupture and you
or others could be injured.
be a place to store a tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Be sure to read and follow the The tire sealant and compressor
area with poor ventilation is tire sealant and compressor kit can be used to temporarily seal
dangerous. Engine exhaust may instructions and inflate the tire punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust tread area of the tire. It can also be
to its recommended pressure.
used to inflate an underinflated tire.
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) Do not exceed the recommended
which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure. If the tire has been separated from
It can cause unconsciousness the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
and even death. Never run the or has a large puncture, the tire is
engine in an enclosed area too severely damaged for the tire
that has no fresh air ventilation. { WARNING sealant and compressor kit to be
For more information, see Engine effective. See Roadside Assistance
Storing the tire sealant and Program (U.S. and Canada) on
Exhaust on page 9‑24. compressor kit or other page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
equipment in the passenger Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
compartment of the vehicle could
Read and follow all of the tire
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
sealant and compressor kit
collision, loose equipment could instructions.
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in
its original location.
10-64 Vehicle Care
The kit includes: A. Selector Switch Replacement sealant canisters

(Sealant/Air or Air Only) are available at your local dealer.
B. On/Off Button See “Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister” following.
C. Pressure Gauge
There is only enough sealant to
D. Pressure Deflation Button seal one tire. After usage, the
(If equipped) sealant canister and sealant/air
E. Tire Sealant Canister hose assembly must be replaced.
See “Removal and Installation of
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) the Sealant Canister” following.
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
Using the Tire Sealant
H. Power Plug and Compressor Kit to
Tire Sealant Temporarily Seal and
Inflate a Punctured Tire
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to Follow the directions closely for
the sealant canister. correct sealant usage.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Vehicle Care 10-65
When using the tire sealant 3. Place the kit on the ground.
and compressor kit during cold Make sure the tire valve stem is
temperatures, warm the kit in a positioned close to the ground
heated environment for five minutes. so the hose will reach it.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster. 4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire counterclockwise.
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
warning flashers. See Hazard onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. clockwise until it is tight.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
page 10‑61 for other important accessory power outlet in the
safety warnings. vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
Do not remove any objects that See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
have penetrated the tire.
If the vehicle has an accessory
1. Remove the tire sealant and power outlet, do not use the
compressor kit from its storage cigarette lighter.
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on If the vehicle only has a cigarette
page 10‑70. lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) Do not pinch the power plug
and the power plug (H). cord in the door or window.
10-66 Vehicle Care
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle 10. Inflate the tire to the tire. Remove the power plug
must be running while using the recommended inflation from the accessory power
air compressor. pressure using the pressure outlet and unscrew the inflating
8. Turn the selector switch (A) gauge (C). The recommended hose from the tire valve. See
counterclockwise to the inflation pressure can be Roadside Assistance Program
Sealant + Air position. found on the Tire and Loading (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
Information label. See Tire or Roadside Assistance Program
9. Press the on/off button (B) Pressure on page 10‑45. (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on. The pressure gauge (C) may 11. Press the on/off button (B)
read higher than the actual tire to turn the tire sealant and
The compressor will inject pressure while the compressor compressor kit off.
sealant and air into the tire. is on. Turn the compressor off The tire is not sealed and
The pressure gauge (C) will to get an accurate pressure will continue to leak air until
initially show a high pressure reading. The compressor may the vehicle is driven and the
while the compressor pushes the be turned on/off until the sealant is distributed in the tire;
sealant into the tire. Once the correct pressure is reached. therefore, Steps 12 through 18
sealant is completely dispersed Notice: If the recommended must be done immediately after
into the tire, the pressure will pressure cannot be reached Step 11.
quickly drop and start to rise after approximately 25 minutes,
again as the tire inflates with Be careful while handling the
the vehicle should not be driven tire sealant and compressor
air only. farther. The tire is too severely kit as it could be warm after
damaged and the tire sealant and usage.
compressor kit cannot inflate the
Vehicle Care 10-67
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from 19. Stop at a safe location and
the accessory power outlet in check the tire pressure.
the vehicle. Refer to Steps 1 through 11
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) under “Using the Tire Sealant
counterclockwise to remove it and Compressor Kit without
from the tire valve stem. Sealant to Inflate a Tire
16. If the flat tire was able to (Not Punctured).”
14. Replace the tire valve
inflate to the recommended If the tire pressure has fallen
stem cap.
inflation pressure, remove the more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
15. Replace the sealant/air maximum speed label from the below the recommended
hose (F), and the power sealant canister (E) and place inflation pressure, stop driving
plug (H) back in their original it in a highly visible location. the vehicle. The tire is too
location. The label is a reminder not to severely damaged and the
exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) until tire sealant cannot seal the
the damaged tire is repaired or tire. See Roadside Assistance
replaced. Program (U.S. and Canada) on
17. Return the equipment to its page 13‑8 or Roadside
original storage location in the Assistance Program (Mexico)
vehicle. on page 13‑10.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle If the tire pressure has not
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the dropped more than 68 kPa
sealant in the tire. (10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
10-68 Vehicle Care
20. Wipe off any sealant from the If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
wheel, tire, and vehicle. and wheel damage by driving slowly
21. Dispose of the used sealant to a level place. Turn on the hazard
canister (E) and sealant/air warning flashers. See Hazard
hose (F) assembly at a local Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
dealer or in accordance with See If a Tire Goes Flat on
local state codes and practices. page 10‑61 for other important
22. Replace it with a new canister safety warnings.
available from your dealer. 1. Remove the tire sealant and
23. After temporarily sealing compressor kit from its storage
a tire using the tire sealant location. See Storing the Tire
and compressor kit, take the Sealant and Compressor Kit on
vehicle to an authorized dealer page 10‑70.
within a 161 km (100 mi) of 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
driving to have the tire repaired and the power plug (H).
or replaced. 3. Place the kit on the ground.
Using the Tire Sealant and Make sure the tire valve stem is
Compressor Kit without positioned close to the ground
Sealant to Inflate a Tire so the hose will reach it.
(Not Punctured) 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
To use the air compressor to inflate from the flat tire by turning it
a tire with air only and not sealant: counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
Vehicle Care 10-69
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the 11. Press the on/off button (B)
accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation to turn the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure compressor kit off.
other accessory power outlets. gauge (C). The recommended Be careful while handling the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. inflation pressure can be tire sealant and compressor
If the vehicle has an accessory found on the Tire and Loading kit as it could be warm after
power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire usage.
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑45.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (C) may the accessory power outlet in
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire the vehicle.
pressure while the compressor
Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off 13. Disconnect the air only
cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. hose (G) from the tire
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The compressor may be turned valve stem by turning it
must be running while using the on/off until the correct pressure counterclockwise, and replace
air compressor. is reached. the tire valve stem cap.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) If you inflate the tire higher 14. Replace the air only hose (G)
clockwise to the Air Only than the recommended and the power plug (H) and
position. pressure you can adjust cord back in their original
the excess pressure by locations.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to pressing the pressure deflation
turn the compressor on. button (D), if equipped, until
The compressor will inflate the the proper pressure reading is
tire with air only. reached. This option is only
functional when using the air
only hose (G).
10-70 Vehicle Care
15. Place the equipment in the Removal and Installation of the Storing the Tire Sealant
original storage location in the Sealant Canister
vehicle.
and Compressor Kit
To remove the sealant canister: The tire sealant and compressor
1. Unwrap the sealant hose. kit is located in the storage
2. Press the canister release compartment on the driver side,
button. at the rear of the vehicle.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
The tire sealant and compressor kit

has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc. 1. Press down on the latch tab and
pull the cover off to access the
storage compartment.
Vehicle Care 10-71
2. Press the two tabs on the quick 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the
release buckle to release the bottom facing toward you.
tire sealant and compressor kit 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
strap. first.
3. Remove the sealant and
compressor kit from its tray.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Tire Changing
Removing Tools
A. Tool Bag
The tools needed to remove the
spare tire are located in the storage B. Wing Bolt
compartment on the driver side, C. Jack
at the rear of the vehicle. 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by
1. Open the jack storage turning it counterclockwise.
The tools you will be using include
compartment by pulling on 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the the jack (A) and lug wrench (B).
the latch tab, located toward holding bracket and remove the
the rear of the vehicle, and tool bag (A).
pulling the cover off.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Removing the Spare Tire C. Storage Compartment Cap 4. Turn the lug wrench (B)
D. Hoist Shaft counterclockwise to lower the
The compact spare tire is located
spare tire (E) to the ground.
under the vehicle, in front of the rear E. Compact Spare Tire Continue turning the wrench
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
F. Retainer until the spare tire can be pulled
on page 10‑82 for more information
out from under the vehicle.
about the compact spare. 1. Open the storage compartment
door of the convenience
center (A) that is nearest the
liftgate and remove the cap (C)
on the bottom of the storage
compartment.
2. Open the carpet cutout that is
located through the hole of the
storage compartment (C).
3. Attach the lug wrench (B) into
the hoist shaft (D).
A. Rear Convenience Center

B. Lug Wrench
Vehicle Care 10-73
To continue changing the flat tire, If it is visible, first try to tighten

see “Removing the Flat Tire and the cable by turning the lug
Installing the Spare Tire” later in wrench clockwise until you hear
this section. two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot over‐tighten the
cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the
wrench counterclockwise three
or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered,
tighten the cable all the way and
then loosen it at least two times.
5. Tilt the retainer (F) and slip it
through the wheel opening to If the spare tire did lower to the
remove the spare tire (E) from ground, continue with Step 5
the cable. under “Removing the Spare
Tire (Vehicles with the Rear
6. Turn the wrench (B) clockwise Convenience Center)” listed
to raise the cable back up after If the spare tire will not lower, the
secondary latch could be engaged. previously.
removing the spare tire.
Do the following to check the cable: 5. If you still cannot lower the
Do not store a full‐size or a spare tire to the ground, see
flat road tire under the vehicle. 1. Check under the vehicle to see if Secondary Latch System on
See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire the cable is visible. page 10‑80.
and Tools” later in this section.
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary
Latch System on page 10‑80.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑61 for more
information.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, 4. To identify the appropriate
loosen the plastic nut caps with jacking location, find the
the wheel wrench. They will triangle (A) about 12 inches
not come off. Then, using the (30.5 cm) from the front tire
flat end of the wheel wrench, or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)
pry along the edge of the cover from the rear tire.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
until it comes off. Be careful; the
not remove them — using the
edges may be sharp. Do not try
lug wrench. For wheels with a
to remove the cover with your
wheel lock key, use the wheel
bare hands.
lock key between the lock nut
Store the wheel cover securely and lug wrench. The key is
in the rear of the vehicle until supplied in the front passenger
you have the flat tire repaired door pocket.
or replaced.
Notice: If this vehicle has wheel
If the vehicle has aluminum locks and an impact wrench is
wheels, remove the wheel nut used to remove the wheel nuts,
caps using the wheel wrench. the lock nut or wheel lock key
could be damaged. Do not use
an impact wrench to remove the The triangle is located near each
wheel nuts if this vehicle has wheel on the vehicle's exterior.
wheel locks.
Vehicle Care 10-75
Notice: If a jack is used to raise

the vehicle without positioning { WARNING
it correctly, the vehicle could
be damaged. When raising the Raising the vehicle with the
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact jack improperly positioned can
with the rear axle control arms. damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
5. Attach the lug wrench to the avoid personal injury and vehicle
jack, and turn the wrench damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
clockwise to raise the jack
head into the proper location
head 3 inches (7.6 cm).
before raising the vehicle.
6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put
the compact spare tire near you.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the 9. Remove the plastic spare tire
lug wrench clockwise in the jack. heat shield by pulling the rubber
{ WARNING Raise the vehicle far enough latch. Store the plastic spare tire
off the ground so that there is heat shield. See “Storing a Flat
Getting under a vehicle when it
enough room for the spare tire or Spare Tire and Tools” later in
is jacked up is dangerous. If the
to fit under the wheel well. this section for more information.
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
Never get under a vehicle when the flat tire.
it is supported only by a jack.
10-76 Vehicle Care
10. Remove any rust or dirt from

{ WARNING the wheel bolts, mounting WARNING (Continued)
surfaces, and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the to the proper torque specification
parts to which it is fastened, can 11. Place the spare tire on the
after replacing. Follow the torque
make wheel nuts become loose wheel mounting surface.
specification supplied by the
after time. The wheel could come 12. Put the nuts on by hand by aftermarket manufacturer when
off and cause an accident. When turning them clockwise until using accessory locking wheel
changing a wheel, remove any the wheel is held against the nuts. See Capacities and
rust or dirt from places where the mounting surface. Make sure Specifications on page 12‑2
wheel attaches to the vehicle. the rounded end is toward the for original equipment wheel
In an emergency, use a cloth or wheel.
nut torque specifications.
a paper towel to do this; but be 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching
sure to use a scraper or wire the lug wrench to the jack
brush later, if needed, to get all Notice: Improperly tightened
and turning the wrench
the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire wheel nuts can lead to brake
counterclockwise. Lower
Goes Flat on page 10‑61. pulsation and rotor damage.
the jack completely.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts
{ WARNING in the proper sequence and to
{ WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or
the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
Never use oil or grease on bolts incorrectly tightened can cause on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
or nuts because the nuts might the wheels to become loose or torque specification.
come loose. The vehicle's wheel come off. The wheel nuts should
could fall off, causing a crash. be tightened with a torque wrench
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-77
Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING
{ WARNING Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
The underbody-mounted spare
compartment of the vehicle could
tire needs to be stored with
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
the valve stem pointing down.
collision, loose equipment could
If the spare tire is stored with
strike someone. Store all these
the valve stem pointing upwards,
in the proper place.
the secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could
loosen and suddenly fall from the To store the spare tire:
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly vehicle. If this happened when 1. Lay the compact spare tire near
in a crisscross sequence, as the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the
shown. tire might contact a person or valve stem down.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit another vehicle, causing injury
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
on the vehicle's compact spare. and damage to itself. Be sure the
heat shield on the compact
If you try to put a wheel cover on underbody-mounted spare tire spare tire.
the compact spare, the cover or is stored with the valve stem
the spare could be damaged. pointing down.
10-78 Vehicle Care
3. Slide the cable retainer through 3. Put the flat tire in the rear
the center of the wheel and start storage area with the valve stem
to raise the compact spare tire. pointing toward the rear of the
Make sure the retainer is fully vehicle.
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
4. When the compact spare tire is
almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when
checking the air pressure 6. Make sure the tire is stored
in the compact spare tire. securely. Push, pull (A), and then
5. Raise the tire fully against try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
the underside of the vehicle. moves, use the lug wrench to
Continue turning the lug wrench tighten the cable.
until you feel more than two 4. Pull the cable (A) through the
Storing the Flat Tire door striker (E), the center of the
clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and 1. Remove the cable package from wheel (D), and the plastic spare
the cable is tight. The spare tire the jack storage area. tire heat shield (C), as shown.
hoist cannot be overtightened. 2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Storing the Tools
5. Hook the cable onto the outside 8. Make sure the metal tube is
portion of the liftgate hinges (B). centered at the striker. Push
the tube toward the front of A. Tool Bag
6. Hook the other end of the cable
onto the outside portion of the the vehicle. B. Wing Bolt
liftgate hinge on the other side 9. Close the liftgate and make sure C. Jack
of the vehicle. it is latched properly.
Put back all tools as they
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it were stored in the jack storage
is secure. compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
1. Ensure that the bottom of the
jack is facing toward you.
2. Turn the jack (C) on its side
and place down on the holding
bracket.
10-80 Vehicle Care
3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the
turning clockwise. secondary latch:
This vehicle has an underbody
4. To replace the cover, line up the mounted tire hoist assembly that
tab at the front of the cover with has a secondary latch system. { WARNING
the notch in the cover opening. It is designed to stop the compact
Push the cover in place and Someone standing too close
spare tire from suddenly falling off during the procedure could be
make sure that the rear clips are the vehicle if the cable holding the
in the slots and push the cover injured by the jack. If the spare
spare tire is damaged. For the
closed. tire does not slide off the jack
secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem completely, make sure no one is
Store the center cap or the plastic
pointing down. See Tire Changing behind you or on either side of
bolt‐on wheel covers until a full
on page 10‑71 for instructions on you as you pull the jack out from
size tire is put back on the vehicle.
When you replace the compact storing the spare tire correctly. under the spare.
spare with a full‐size tire, reinstall
the bolt‐on wheel covers or the
center cap. Hand‐tighten them
{ WARNING 1. If the cable is not visible, start
this procedure at Step 3.
over the wheel nuts, using the Before beginning this procedure
lug wrench. read all the instructions. Failure
to read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
Vehicle Care 10-81
5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise

to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the
spare tire stops moving upward
and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the
secondary latch has released
and the spare tire is balancing
on the jack.
All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicle shown 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from

2. Turn the lug wrench the jack and carefully remove
counterclockwise until the jack. Use one hand to push
approximately 6 inches against the spare tire while
(15 cm) of cable is exposed. firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the
3. Attach the lug wrench to the other hand.
jack and raise the jack at least
10 turns. 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it
through the wheel opening
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, when the spare tire has been
ahead of the rear bumper. completely lowered.
Position the center lift point of 7. Lower the jack by turning the
the jack under the center of the 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise
lug wrench counterclockwise. to raise the cable back up if the
spare tire. Keep lowering the jack until the cable is hanging.
spare tire slides off the jack.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Have the hoist shaft assembly After installing the compact Do not use the compact spare on
inspected as soon as you can. spare on the vehicle, stop as other vehicles.
You will not be able to store a spare soon as possible and make sure And do not mix the compact spare
tire using the hoist assembly until it the spare tire is correctly inflated. tire or wheel with other wheels or
has been repaired or replaced. The compact spare is made to tires. They will not fit. Keep the
perform well at speeds up to spare tire and its wheel together.
Compact Spare Tire 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up
to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system
can finish your trip and have the will be automatically disabled
{ WARNING full-size tire repaired or replaced when you use the compact spare.
at your convenience. Of course, To restore the AWD and prevent
Driving with more than one
it is best to replace the spare with excessive wear on the clutch in
compact spare tire at a time
a full-size tire as soon as possible. your AWD, replace the compact
could result in loss of braking spare tire with a full-size tire as
The spare tire will last longer and be
and handling. This could lead soon as possible.
in good shape in case it is needed
to a crash and you or others
again. Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
could be injured. Use only one
compact spare tire at a time. Notice: When the compact compact spare. Using them can
spare is installed, do not take damage the vehicle and can
the vehicle through an automatic damage the chains too. Do not
The compact spare tire, if the car wash with guide rails. The use tire chains on the compact
vehicle has one, was fully inflated compact spare can get caught on spare.
when the vehicle was new, however, the rails which can damage the
it can lose air after a time. Check tire, wheel and other parts of the
the inflation pressure regularly. vehicle.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Vehicle Care 10-83
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
For more information about the to the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. not touching each other. If they
page 10‑26. are, it could cause a ground
Trying to start the vehicle by
If the vehicle's battery has run pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want.
down, you may want to use another work, and it could damage the You would not be able to start
vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle. your vehicle, and the bad
start your vehicle. Be sure to use grounding could damage
1. Check the other vehicle. It must the electrical systems.
the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12‐volt battery with a
negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of the
{ WARNING
Notice: Only use a vehicle
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
Batteries can hurt you. They can that has a 12-volt system with involved in the jump start
be dangerous because: a negative ground for jump procedure. Put an automatic
starting. If the other vehicle does transmission in P (Park) or
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a a manual transmission in
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles Neutral before setting the
. They contain gas that can can be damaged. parking brake. If one of the
explode or ignite. vehicles is a four-wheel-drive
. They contain enough vehicle, be sure the transfer
electricity to burn you. case is not in Neutral.
If you do not follow these steps

exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the radio or other

accessories are left on during { WARNING { WARNING
the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs Using a match near a battery Fans or other moving engine
would not be covered by the can cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
warranty. Always turn off the People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving
radio and other accessories and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running.
when jump starting the vehicle. Use a flashlight if you need
more light. 5. Check that the jumper cables
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary Be sure the batteries have do not have loose or missing
accessories plugged into the enough water. You do not need insulation. If they do, you could
cigarette lighter or the accessory to add water to the ACDelco® get a shock. The vehicles could
power outlets. Turn off the radio battery (or batteries) installed in be damaged too.
and all lamps that are not your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables,
needed. This will avoid sparks has filler caps, be sure the right here are some basic things you
and help save both batteries. amount of fluid is there. If it is low, should know. Positive (+) will go
And it could save the radio! add water to take care of that to positive (+) or to a remote
4. Open the hoods and locate the first. If you do not, explosive positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
positive (+) and negative (−) gas could be present. has one. Negative (−) will go to a
terminal locations on the heavy, unpainted metal engine
Battery fluid contains acid that part or to a remote negative (−)
other vehicle. Your vehicle
can burn you. Do not get it on terminal if the vehicle has one.
has a remote positive (+) and
you. If you accidentally get it in
a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. See Engine your eyes or on your skin, flush
Compartment Overview on the place with water and get
page 10‑6 for more information medical help immediately.
on the terminal locations.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end

negative (−) or you will get a touch metal. Connect it to
short that would damage the the positive (+) terminal of the
battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote
too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the
negative (−) cable to the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal on the 8. Now connect the black 9. Connect the other end of the
dead battery because this negative (−) cable to the negative (−) cable at least
can cause sparks. negative (−) terminal of the 18 inches (45 cm) away from
good battery. Use a remote the dead battery, but not near
negative (−) terminal if the engine parts that move.
vehicle has one. The electrical connection is just
Do not let the other end touch as good there, and the chance
anything until the next step. of sparks getting back to the
The other end of the negative (−) battery is much less.
cable does not go to the dead Your vehicle has a remote
battery. It goes to a heavy, negative (−) terminal for this
unpainted metal engine part, purpose.
or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
10-86 Vehicle Care
10. Now start the vehicle with To disconnect the jumper cables
the good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following:
engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black
11. Try to start the vehicle that negative (−) cable from the
had the dead battery. If it will vehicle that had the dead
not start after a few tries, it battery.
probably needs service. 2. Disconnect the black
Notice: If the jumper cables negative (−) cable from the
are connected or removed in vehicle with the good battery.
the wrong order, electrical 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
shorting may occur and damage cable from the vehicle with the
the vehicle. The repairs would good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always connect and A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
remove the jumper cables in the Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle.
correct order, making sure that Terminal
the cables do not touch each B. Good Battery or Remote
other or other metal. Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-87

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, means towing the vehicle behind . Is the proper towing equipment
the disabled vehicle should be another vehicle – such as behind going to be used? See your
towed with all four wheels off a motorhome. The two most dealer or trailering professional
the ground. Care must be taken common types of recreational for additional advice and
with vehicles that have low vehicle towing are known as dinghy equipment recommendations.
ground clearance and/or special towing and dolly towing. Dinghy
towing is towing the vehicle with
. Is the vehicle ready to be
equipment. Always flatbed on a
all four wheels on the ground. towed? Just as preparing the
car carrier.
Dolly towing is towing the vehicle vehicle for a long trip, make
Consult your dealer or a sure the vehicle is prepared
with two wheels on the ground and
professional towing service if the to be towed.
two wheels up on a device known
disabled vehicle must be towed.
as a dolly.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 Here are some important things to
or Roadside Assistance Program consider before recreational vehicle
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. towing:
. What is the towing capacity
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes, of the towing vehicle?
such as behind a motor home, see Be sure to read the tow
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this vehicle manufacturer's
section. recommendations.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, 6. To prevent the battery from
the vehicle should be run at the draining while the vehicle is
beginning of each day and at each being towed, remove the 15 amp
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. ECM fuse and the 50 amp
This will ensure proper lubrication of BATT1 fuse from the underhood
transmission components. Re-install fuse block and store in a
the fuse to start the vehicle. safe location. See Engine
To tow the vehicle from the front Compartment Fuse Block on
with all four wheels on the ground: page 10‑33.
1. Position the vehicle to be 7. Release the parking brake.

towed, shift the transmission to Notice: If the vehicle is
P (Park), and turn the ignition towed without performing
to LOCK/OFF. each of the steps listed under
2. Secure the vehicle to the towing “Dinghy Towing,” the automatic
If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, it transmission could be damaged.
can be dinghy towed from the front. vehicle.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
These vehicles may also be towed 3. Set the parking brake. dinghy towing procedure prior to
by putting the front wheels on a 4. Turn the ignition to and after towing the vehicle.
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in ACC/ACCESSORY.
this section. Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph)
5. Shift the transmission to is exceeded while towing the
If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, it N (Neutral). vehicle, it could be damaged.
can be dinghy towed from the front. Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
These vehicles can also be towed while towing the vehicle.
by placing them on a platform
trailer with all four wheels off of the
ground. These vehicles cannot be
towed using a dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing Dolly Towing

1. Set the parking brake. (All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles) (Front-Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles Only)
2. Reinstall the fuses in the
underhood fuse block.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park), turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the
key from the ignition.
4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
towing vehicle.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle
with the front drive wheels on
the ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing
with two different tire sizes on the All-wheel‐drive vehicles must not
front of the vehicle can cause be towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehicle
severe damage to the ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on
transmission. vehicles, they should be placed on the ground:
a platform trailer with all four wheels
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
10-90 Vehicle Care
5. Remove the key from the Appearance Care

ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Exterior Care
7. Release the parking brake.
Cleaning Exterior
Towing the Vehicle From Lamps/Lenses
the Rear Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from Finish Care
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing
the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be
the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. products can be obtained from your
dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-91
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Foreign materials such as calcium Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat chloride and other salts, ice melting Parts
gives more depth and gloss to the agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, Bright metal parts should be
colored basecoat. Always use bird droppings, chemicals from cleaned regularly to keep their
waxes and polishes that are industrial chimneys, etc., can luster. Wash with water or use
non-abrasive and made for a damage the vehicle's finish if they chrome polish on chrome or
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. remain on painted surfaces. Wash stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Notice: Machine compounding the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive Use special care with aluminum
or aggressive polishing on a trim. To avoid damaging protective
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish cleaners that are marked safe
for painted surfaces to remove trim, never use auto or chrome
may damage it. Use only polish, steam, or caustic soap
non-abrasive waxes and polishes foreign matter.
to clean aluminum. A coating
that are made for a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are of wax, rubbed to high polish,
clearcoat paint finish on the subject to aging, weather, and is recommended for all bright
vehicle. chemical fallout that can take their metal parts.
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Washing the Vehicle should not be used on plastic Notice: Conveyor systems on
parts, do not use it on the vehicle some automatic car washes could
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
or damage may occur and it damage the vehicle. There may
keep it clean by washing it often.
would not be covered by the not be enough clearance for the
Do not wash the vehicle in warranty. undercarriage. Check with the car
direct sunlight and use a car wash manager before using the
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing soap. automatic car wash.
washing and after, to remove
Notice: Do not use cleaning all cleaning agents completely. Weatherstrips
agents that are petroleum based If they are allowed to dry on the
or that contain acid or abrasives, surface, they could stain. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
as they can damage the paint, make them last longer, seal better,
Dry the finish with a soft, clean and not stick or squeak. Apply
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
chamois or an all-cotton towel silicone grease with a clean cloth.
Approved cleaning products
to avoid surface scratches and During very cold, damp weather
can be obtained from your
water spotting. frequent application may be
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct High pressure car washes could required. See Recommended Fluids
product usage, necessary safety cause water to enter the vehicle. and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
precautions, and appropriate Avoid using high pressure washes
disposal of any vehicle care closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
product. Certain cleaners contain surface of the vehicle. Use of
chemicals that can damage the power washers exceeding
emblems or nameplates on the 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can
vehicle. Check the cleaning result in damage or removal
product label. If it states that it of paint and decals.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum The repairs would not be covered Windshield and Wiper Blades
or Chrome by the vehicle warranty. Use only
Clean the outside of the windshield
approved cleaners on aluminum
The vehicle may have either with glass cleaner.
or chrome-plated wheels.
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Clean the rubber blades using
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
Keep the wheels clean using a a lint‐free cloth or paper towel
has aluminum or chrome-plated
soft, clean cloth with mild soap and soaked with windshield washer
wheels through an automatic car
water. Rinse with clean water. After fluid or a mild detergent. Wash
wash that uses silicone carbide
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, the windshield thoroughly when
tire cleaning brushes, as this
clean towel. A wax may then be cleaning the blades. Bugs, road
could cause damage. The repairs
applied. grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle
would not be covered by the
wash/wax treatments may cause
Notice: Chrome wheels and vehicle warranty.
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper
other chrome trim may be Notice: Driving the vehicle blades if they are worn or damaged.
damaged if the vehicle is not through an automatic car wash
washed after driving on roads Wipers can be damaged by:
that has silicone carbide tire
that have been sprayed with cleaning brushes, could damage . Extreme dusty conditions
magnesium, calcium or sodium the aluminum or chrome-plated
chloride. These chlorides are
. Sand and salt
wheels. The repairs would not be
used on roads for conditions covered by the vehicle warranty. . Heat and sun
such as ice and dust. Always Never drive a vehicle that has .
wash the chrome with soap and Snow and ice, without proper
aluminum or chrome-plated removal
water after exposure. wheels through an automatic
Notice: Do not use strong soaps, car wash that uses silicone
chemicals, abrasive polishes, carbide tire cleaning brushes.
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Tires Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these

materials from the underbody
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
with plain water. Clean any areas
clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be
where mud and debris can collect.
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
Dirt packed in close areas of the
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
frame should be loosened before
vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense.
being flushed. Your dealer or an
finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system
a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials can do this.
any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be Chemical Paint Spotting
corrected in your dealer's body Some weather and atmospheric
Sheet Metal Damage and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical
If the vehicle is damaged and fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
requires sheet metal repair or
Underbody Maintenance
upon and attack painted surfaces
replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow on the vehicle. This damage can
repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
material to parts repaired or on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular
replaced to restore corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint
protection. develop on the underbody parts surface.
Original manufacturer replacement such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
parts will provide the corrosion and exhaust system even though
protection while maintaining the they have corrosion protection.
vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-95

. Never use a stiff brush. It can
Interior Care intended. Apply the cleaner directly
cause damage.
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
The interior will continue to look over-spray. Remove any accidental . Never apply heavy pressure or
its best if it is cleaned often. over-spray from other surfaces rub aggressively with a cleaning
Dust and dirt can accumulate on immediately. cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
the upholstery and cause damage
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners damage the interior and does
to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
when cleaning glass surfaces on not improve the effectiveness
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
the vehicle, could scratch the of soil removal.
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly. glass and/or cause damage to . Avoid laundry detergents
the rear window defogger. When or dishwashing soaps with
Lighter colored interiors may cleaning the glass on the vehicle, degreasers. Using too much
require more frequent cleaning. use only a soft cloth and glass soap will leave a residue that
Newspapers and garments that cleaner. leaves streaks and attracts
can transfer color to home
Cleaners can contain solvents that dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
furnishings can also transfer
can become concentrated in the 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
color to the interior.
interior. Before using cleaners, water is a good guide. Use only
Remove dust from small buttons read and adhere to all safety mild, neutral-pH soaps.
and knobs with a small brush with instructions on the label. While . Do not heavily saturate the
soft bristles. cleaning the interior, maintain upholstery while cleaning.
Your dealer has products for adequate ventilation by opening
the doors and windows.
. Cleaners that contain solvents
cleaning the interior. When
can damage the interior.
cleaning the interior, only use Do not clean the interior using the
cleaners specifically designed following cleaners or techniques:
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
. Never use a knife or any other
result from using cleaners on sharp object to remove a soil
surfaces for which they were not from any interior surface.
10-96 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the Leather

soil and gently rub toward the
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft Leather, and lighter colored leather
center. Continue cleaning, using
brush attachment to remove dust in particular, will need more frequent
a clean area of the cloth each
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum cleaning to prevent the buildup of
time it becomes soiled.
with rotating brushes in the nozzle dust, dirt, and colors transferred
may only be used on floor carpet 4. Continue to gently rub the from other items so that these do
and carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area. not become permanent stains.
always try to remove them first with 5. If the soil is not completely To remove dust, a soft cloth
plain water or club soda. Before removed, use a mild soap dampened with water can be used.
cleaning, gently remove as much of solution and repeat the cleaning If a more thorough cleaning is
the soil as possible using one of the process with plain water. necessary, a soft cloth dampened
following techniques: with a mild soap solution can
If any of the soil remains, a
. For liquids: gently blot the commercial fabric cleaner or spot be used. Your dealer has a GM
remaining soil with a paper lifter may be necessary. Test a approved leather cleaner available
towel. Allow the soil to absorb small hidden area for colorfastness that provides superior cleaning
into the paper towel until no before using a commercial performance when used regularly
more can be removed. upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. on finished automotive leathers.
. For solid dry soils: remove as If the locally cleaned area gives Allow the leather to dry naturally.
much as possible and then any impression that a ring formation
vacuum. may result, clean the entire surface.
To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
carpet after the cleaning process.
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-97
Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may
or spot removers, or shoe polish Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument
on leather. Many commercial leather panel. The increase in gloss may
cleaners and coatings that are To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the
sold to preserve and protect leather dampened with water can be windshield and even make it difficult
may permanently change the used. If a more thorough cleaning to see through the windshield under
appearance and feel of the leather is necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions.
and are not recommended. Do not dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove Notice: Air fresheners contain
use silicone or wax-based products, solvents that may cause damage
or those containing organic solvents dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. to plastics and painted surfaces.
to clean the interior because they Follow the manufacturer’s
can alter the appearance by Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve instructions when using air
increasing the gloss in a fresheners in the vehicle. If air
non-uniform manner. and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the freshener comes in contact with
appearance and feel of the interior paint or a plastic surface, blot
and are not recommended. Do not immediately with a soft cloth.
use silicone or wax-based products, Damage caused by using air
or those containing organic solvents fresheners would not be covered
to clean the interior because they by the vehicle warranty.
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
10-98 Vehicle Care
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. or is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
In a crash, they might not be able pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
to provide adequate protection. Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
soap and lukewarm water. and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Button Retainer 3. Make sure the floor mat is 3. Center the slot in the floor mat
properly secured and verify that grommet with the knob on the
Floor mats with a button-type
it does not interfere with the floor and set into position.
retainer.
accelerator or brake pedal. 4. Turn the knob until it is
Knob Retainer perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in
Floor mats with a knob retainer. place.
5. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mat
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
unlock and remove. Removing and Replacing the
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining Floor Mat
up the floor mat openings over 1. Turn the knob until it is aligned
the carpet retainers and with the slot in the floor mat
snapping into position. grommet.
2. Pull up on the floor mat.
10-100 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 keep this vehicle in good the vehicle in good condition, see
working condition. Damage your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance caused by failure to follow
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 scheduled maintenance might
vehicles that:
not be covered by the vehicle
Recommended Fluids, warranty. . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and As the vehicle owner, you are
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 responsible for the scheduled
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement maintenance in this section.
on page 9‑12.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 We recommend having your
. Are driven on reasonable road
dealer perform these services.
Maintenance Records Proper vehicle maintenance helps surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10 to keep the vehicle in good working limits.
condition, improves fuel economy, . Use the recommended fuel.
and reduces vehicle emissions for See Recommended Fuel on
better air quality. page 9‑42.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work
listed in Recommended Fluids Maintenance
and Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
can be dangerous. Some jobs Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
can cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑9. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE
the work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation OIL SOON message displays,
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. service is required for the vehicle
Tires should be rotated every as soon as possible, within the next
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
At your dealer, you can be Rotation on page 10‑52. the best conditions, the engine oil
certain that you will receive the life system might not indicate the
highest level of service available. need for vehicle service for more
Your dealer has specially trained than a year. The engine oil and filter
service technicians, uses genuine must be changed at least once a
replacement parts, as well as, year and the oil life system must
up‐to‐date tools and equipment be reset. Your dealer has trained
to ensure fast and accurate service technicians who will perform
diagnostics. this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield washer fluid level . Rotate tires if necessary.
accidentally, service the vehicle check. See Washer Fluid on See Tire Rotation on
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since page 10‑23. page 10‑52.
the last service. Reset the oil life . Windshield wiper blade . Fluids visual leak check
system whenever the oil is changed. inspection for wear, cracking, (or every 12 months, whichever
See Engine Oil Life System on or contamination and occurs first). A leak in any
page 10‑11. windshield and wiper blade system must be repaired and
cleaning, if contaminated. See the fluid level checked.
Every Engine Oil Change
Exterior Care on page 10‑90. . Engine air cleaner filter
. Change engine oil and Worn or damaged wiper blade inspection. See Engine Air
filter. Reset oil life system. replacement. See Wiper Blade Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑8 Replacement on page 10‑29.
and Engine Oil Life System on . Brake system inspection
. Tire inflation pressures (or every 12 months, whichever
page 10‑11. An Emission Control
check. See Tire Pressure on occurs first).
Service.
page 10‑45.
. Engine coolant level check. . Steering and suspension
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire inspection. Visual inspection
See Engine Coolant on
Inspection on page 10‑51. for damaged, loose, or missing
page 10‑15.
. parts or signs of wear.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.

. Body hinges and latches, key Additional Required Services Once a Month
lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
. Tire inflation check. See Tire
pivots, spring anchor and Pressure on page 10‑45.
. Rotate tires. Tires should
release pawl, hood and door be rotated every 12 000 km/
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire
hinges, rear folding seats, 7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation Inspection on page 10‑51.
and liftgate hinges lubrication. on page 10‑52. . Sunroof track and seal
See Recommended Fluids
At Each Fuel Stop inspection, if equipped.
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
See Sunroof on page 2‑22.
More frequent lubrication may . Engine oil level check.
be required when the vehicle See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. Once a Year
is exposed to a corrosive
. Engine coolant level check.
. See Starter Switch Check on
environment. Applying silicone
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑27.
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last page 10‑15. . See Automatic Transmission
longer, seal better, and not . Windshield washer fluid level Shift Lock Control Function
stick or squeak. check. See Washer Fluid on Check on page 10‑28.
. Restraint system component page 10‑23. . See Ignition Transmission Lock
check. See Safety System Check on page 10‑28.
Check on page 3‑31. . See Park Brake and P (Park)
. Fuel system inspection for Mechanism Check on
damage or leaks. page 10‑28.
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check for First Engine Oil Change After
. All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
damage, high effort, or binding. Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe
Replace if needed. service) for vehicles mainly
. Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing
. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant replacement. See Engine Air
and Compressor Kit, check a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑13. or delivery service. During any
the sealant expiration date
printed on the instruction label
. Automatic transmission fluid maintenance, if a power washer
of the kit. See Tire Sealant and change (severe service) is used to clean mud and dirt
Compressor Kit on page 10‑63. for vehicles mainly driven from the underbody, care should
in heavy city traffic in hot be taken to not directly spray
. Underbody flushing service. weather, in hilly or mountainous the transfer case output seals.
. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass terrain, when frequently towing High pressure water can
Support Gas Strut Service: a trailer, or used for taxi, overcome the seals and
Visually inspect gas strut, police, or delivery service. contaminate the transfer case
if equipped, for signs of wear, See Automatic Transmission fluid. Contaminated fluid will
cracks, or other damage. Fluid on page 10‑13. decrease the life of the transfer
Check the hold open ability case and should be replaced.
of the gas strut. Contact your
dealer if service is required.

. Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After First Engine Oil Change After
inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid . Engine cooling system drain,
Check that the purge valve, change (normal service). flush, and refill (or every five
if the vehicle has one, works See Automatic Transmission years, whichever occurs first).
properly. Replace as needed. Fluid on page 10‑13. See Cooling System on
An Emission Control Service. . Spark plug replacement and page 10‑15. An Emission
The U.S. Environmental spark plug wires inspection. Control Service.
Protection Agency or the An Emission Control Service. . Engine drive belts inspection
California Air Resources for fraying, excessive cracks,
. All‐wheel drive only:
Board has determined that or obvious damage (or every
Transfer case fluid change
the failure to perform this 10 years, whichever occurs
(normal service). During any
maintenance item will not first). Replace, if needed.
maintenance, if a power washer
nullify the emission warranty
is used to clean mud and dirt
or limit recall liability prior to
from the underbody, care should
the completion of the vehicle's
be taken to not directly spray
useful life. We, however,
the transfer case output seals.
urge that all recommended
High pressure water can
maintenance services be
overcome the seals and
performed at the indicated
contaminate the transfer case
intervals and the maintenance
fluid. Contaminated fluid will
be recorded.
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
®
Automatic Transmission DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Carrier Assembly — Differential
SAE 75W‐90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer
Case (Power Transfer Unit)
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Folding Seat in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C
Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20958479 CF179C
Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107
Wiper Blades
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 —
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 15276259 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Capacities
Application Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt
Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑13 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing

12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-13 Procedure
Customer Information Service Publications (U.S. and Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Your satisfaction and goodwill
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects are important to the dealer and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction to GMC. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 concern with a member of
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18 dealership management. Normally,
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 concerns can be quickly resolved at
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19 that level. If the matter has already
Roadside Assistance Radio Frequency been reviewed with the sales,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19 service, or parts manager, contact
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency the owner of the dealership or the
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 general manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting GMC, remember case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, that your concern will likely be 40 days. If you do not agree with
it appears your concern cannot resolved at a dealer's facility. the decision given in your case,
be resolved by the dealership That is why we suggest following you may reject it and proceed with
without further help, in the U.S., Step One first. any other venue for relief available
call 1-800-462-8782. In Canada, STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
call General Motors of Canada Both General Motors and the You may contact the BBB Auto
Customer Communication at dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
1-800-263-3777 (English) or sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them
1-800-263-7854 (French). with the new vehicle. However, at the following address:
We encourage you to call the if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
toll-free number in order to give after following the procedure Council of Better Business
your inquiry prompt attention. outlined in Steps One and Two, Bureaus, Inc.
Have the following information you can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
available to give the Customer Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
Assistance representative: to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
. Vehicle Identification The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Number (VIN). This is available out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
from the vehicle registration or by the Council of Better Business
title, or the plate at the top left Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in
of the instrument panel and disputes regarding vehicle repairs or all 50 states and the District of
visible through the windshield. the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
. Dealership name and location. factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal
. Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to the right to change eligibility
present mileage. filling out a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue
program is free of charge and your its participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor
do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or
procedure outlined in Steps One call the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-3777 (English),
of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
for the review of the facts involved 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
by an impartial third party arbiter, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
and may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
is designed so that the entire The inquiry should be accompanied
dispute settlement process, from by the Vehicle Identification
the time you file your complaint Number (VIN).
to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is
informal, quick, and free of charge.
Customer Assistance STEP TWO

. Brand
Procedure If you are not satisfied, please
. Vehicle Identification
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are contact the general manager or the Number (VIN)
very important to your dealer and dealership owner to ask for their . Mileage
General Motors. help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
. Delivery date
Normally, any problem with the right people at General Motors for . Description of the problem
transaction, sale, or usage of the support, if needed.
vehicle must be handled by your . Dealership name
dealer sales or service departments. STEP THREE . Dealership address
However, we recognize that If your case is not resolved in a
despite the good intentions of all See Customer Assistance Offices
reasonable amount of time by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5
parties involved, sometimes a dealer, please call the General
misunderstanding may occur. or Customer Assistance Offices
Motors Customer Assistance (Mexico) on page 13‑6 for more
If you have a problem that has not Center (CAC) and provide the information.
been satisfactorily handled through following information:
the normal means, we suggest the . Name
following steps:
. Address
STEP ONE . Phone number
Explain your case to the dealer .
service agent, service manager, Model year
dealer sales agent, or sales
manager, depending on your case.
Make sure that they have
all necessary information.
They are interested in your
continual satisfaction.
Customer Assistance From Puerto Rico: All Overseas Locations

Offices (U.S. and Canada) 1-800-496-9992 (English) Please contact the local
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) General Motors Business Unit.
GMC encourages customers to call
the toll-free number for assistance. From U.S. Virgin Islands: Mexico, Central America and
However, if a customer wishes to 1-800-496-9994 Caribbean Islands/Countries
write or e-mail GMC, the letter (Except Puerto Rico and
should be addressed to: Canada
U.S. Virgin Islands)
United States General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, General Motors de Mexico,
GMC Customer Assistance Center S. de R.L. de C.V.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
P.O. Box 33172 Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Detroit, MI 48232-5172 Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
www.gmc.ca Col. Granada
www.GMC.com C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782) 1-800-263-3777 (English)
01-800-466-0801
1-800-462-8583 (For Text 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: Telephone Devices (TTYs))
1-800-462-8782 Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Customer Assistance United States and Canada Customer Assistance for

Offices (Mexico) 1-866-466-8191 Text Telephone (TTY)
To contact the Customer Assistance Costa Rica Users (U.S. and Canada)
Center (CAC), use the phone To assist customers who are
numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-1005
deaf, hard of hearing, or speech
Customer assistance is available Guatemala impaired and who use Text
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-800-999-5252
equipment available at its Customer
08:00 to 15:00 hours. Panama Assistance Center. Any TTY user
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 00-800-052-0001 can communicate with GMC by
Assistance Center (CAC) should be dialing: 1-800-462-8583. TTY users
sent to: cac.gmc@gm.com. Dominican Republic in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Mexico 1-888-751-5301
From Mexico City El Salvador
5329-0812 800-6273
From Other Mexico Locations Honduras
01-800-466-0812 800-0122-6101
Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable
GMC — www.gmc.com tools and services you will have
GMC Owner Center (U.S.) access to:
www.gmcownercenter.com GMC Merchandise —
www.gmccollection.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
Information and services information on vehicles and
customized for your specific Help Center — www.gmc.com/ current offers in your area.
vehicle — all in one convenient helpcenter . My Dealers: Save details such
place. . FAQ (Frequently Asked as address and phone number
. Digital owner manual, warranty Questions) for each of your preferred GM
information, and more. . Contact Us dealers.
. Storage for online service and . My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
maintenance records. links to parts and service
My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in
. GMC dealer locator for service password-protected section values, or schedule a service
nationwide. of www.gm.ca where you can appointment by adding the
. Exclusive privileges and offers. save information on GM vehicles, vehicles you own to your
. Recall notices for your specific get personalized offers, and driveway profile.
vehicle. use handy tools and forms . My Preferences: Manage your
with greater ease.
. OnStar and GM Cardmember profile and use tools and forms
Services Earnings summaries. with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
GM Mobility For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance

offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
Reimbursement Program call the GM Mobility Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
(U.S. and Canada) have the following information
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
ready:
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935. . Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program. . Telephone number of your
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) location
for details. TTY users call . Location of the vehicle
1-800-263-3830.
This program is available to
. Model, year, color, and license
qualified applicants for cost Roadside Assistance plate number of the vehicle
reimbursement of eligible Program (U.S. and . Odometer reading, Vehicle
aftermarket adaptive equipment Identification Number (VIN),
required for the vehicle, such as Canada) and delivery date of the vehicle
hand controls or a wheelchair/ For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, . Description of the problem
scooter lift for the vehicle. call 1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text
Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Coverage Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's

responsibility for the repair or
Services are provided up to . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
replacement of the tire if it is
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles), Delivery of enough fuel for the
not covered by the warranty.
whichever comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
In the U.S., anyone driving the service station.
jump start a dead battery.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock‐Out Service: Service to
person driving the vehicle without unlock the vehicle if you are . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock maps of North America when
covered. may be available if you have requested either with the
Roadside Assistance is not a OnStar®. For security reasons, most direct route or the most
the driver must present scenic route. Additional travel
part of the New Vehicle Limited
identification before this information is also available.
Warranty. GMC and General Motors
service is given. Allow three weeks for delivery.
of Canada Limited reserve the right
to make any changes or discontinue . Emergency Tow From a Public . Trip Interruption Benefits
the Roadside Assistance program Road or Highway: Tow to the and Assistance: If your
at any time without notification. nearest GMC dealer for warranty trip is interrupted due to
service, or if the vehicle was a warranty failure, incidental
GMC and General Motors of
in a crash and cannot be driven. expenses may be reimbursed
Canada Limited reserve the right
Assistance is also given when during the 5 years/(160 000 km)
to limit services or payment to an
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, 100,000 miles Powertrain
owner or driver if they decide the
mud, or snow. warranty period. Items
claims are made too often, or the
. considered are hotel, meals,
same type of claim is made many Flat Tire Change: Service to
and rental car.
times. change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and

. Trip Interruption Benefits
Services Not Included in
and Assistance: Must be
Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance Program (Mexico)
over 250 kilometres from
. Impound towing caused by where your trip was started Roadside Assistance is available
violation of any laws. to qualify. General Motors 24 hours a day, 365 days of
. Legal fines. of Canada Limited requires the year.
pre-authorization, original
. Mounting, dismounting, detailed receipts, and a copy For detailed information about
or changing of snow tires, of the repair orders. Once Roadside Assistance, please
chains, or other traction devices. authorization has been received, see the brochure provided with
. Towing or services for vehicles the Roadside Assistance advisor your new vehicle or visit our
driven on a non-public road or will help to make arrangements website at: www.gmc.com.mx.
highway. and explain how to receive Navigate the site and click on
payment. “Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mail
Services Specific to correspondence should be
. Alternative Service: If sent to: asistencia.gmc@gm.com.
Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
assistance cannot be provided
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by
is approximately $5 Canadian. Assistance advisor may phone, use the following numbers:
Diesel fuel delivery may be give permission to get local Mexico
restricted. Propane and other emergency road service.
fuels are not provided through You will receive payment, up to 01-800-466-0801
this service. $100, after sending the original United States
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8902
registration is required.
covered, however any cost for Canada
. Trip Routing Service: Limit of parts and labor for repairs not
six requests per year. covered by the warranty are 1-800-268-6800
the owner responsibility.
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally
(U.S. and Canada) Canada) be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable
When the vehicle requires To enhance your ownership to wait, GM helps to minimize
warranty service, contact the dealer experience, we and our participating inconvenience by providing several
and request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy transportation options. Depending
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer on the circumstances, the dealer
and advising the service consultant support program for vehicles can offer one of the following:
of your transportation needs, the with the Bumper-to-Bumper
dealer can help minimize your (Base Warranty Coverage period Shuttle Service
inconvenience. in Canada), extended powertrain, Shuttle service is the preferred
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled and/or hybrid‐specific warranties means of offering Courtesy
into the service department in both the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide
immediately, keep driving it until Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your
it can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes
safety related. If it is, please call warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
the dealership, let them know this, within reasonable time and distance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of the dealer's area.
and ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited
If the dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Warranty and Owner
urged to do so as early in the Assistance Information” furnished
work day as possible to allow with each new vehicle provides
for the same day-repair. detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program

Reimbursement The dealer may arrange to provide Information
If the vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle All program options, such as shuttle
warranty repairs, and public or reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
transportation is used instead that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact the
of the dealer's shuttle service, for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information
the expense must be supported Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
by original receipts and can only and must be supported by original Transportation arrangements
be up to the maximum amount receipts. This requires that you sign will be administered by appropriate
allowed by GM for shuttle service. and complete a rental agreement dealer personnel.
In addition, for U.S. customers, and meet state/provincial, local,
should you arrange transportation and rental vehicle provider General Motors reserves the
through a friend or relative, limited requirements. Requirements vary right to unilaterally modify,
reimbursement for reasonable and may include minimum age change, or discontinue Courtesy
fuel expenses may be available. requirements, insurance coverage, Transportation at any time and
Claim amounts should reflect credit card, etc. You are responsible to resolve all questions of claim
actual costs and be supported by for fuel usage charges and may eligibility pursuant to the terms
original receipts. See the dealer for also be responsible for taxes, levies, and conditions described herein
information regarding the allowance usage fees, excessive mileage, at its sole discretion.
amounts for reimbursement of fuel or rental usage beyond the
or other transportation costs. completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment As a result, these parts may fit
parts may also be used for repair. poorly, exhibit premature durability/
(U.S. and Canada) These parts are typically removed corrosion problems, and may not
If the vehicle is involved in a from vehicles that were total losses perform properly in subsequent
collision and it is damaged, in prior crashes. In most cases, collisions. Aftermarket parts are
have the damage repaired by the parts being recycled are from not covered by the GM New Vehicle
a qualified technician using the undamaged sections of the vehicle. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
proper equipment and quality A recycled original equipment GM failure related to such parts is not
replacement parts. Poorly performed part may be an acceptable choice covered by that warranty.
collision repairs diminish the to maintain the vehicle's originally
vehicle resale value, and safety designed appearance and safety Repair Facility
performance can be compromised performance; however, the history GM also recommends that you
in subsequent collisions. of these parts is not known. Such choose a collision repair facility that
parts are not covered by the GM meets your needs before you ever
Collision Parts New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and need collision repairs. The dealer
Genuine GM Collision parts are any related failures are not covered may have a collision repair center
new parts made with the same by that warranty. with GM-trained technicians and
materials and construction methods Aftermarket collision parts are also state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
as the parts with which the vehicle available. These are made by able to recommend a collision
was originally built. Genuine GM companies other than GM and may repair center that has GM-trained
Collision parts are the best choice to not have been tested for the vehicle. technicians and comparable
ensure that the vehicle's designed equipment.
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Insuring The Vehicle If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information:
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and
Protect your investment in the GM
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
vehicle with comprehensive and
Genuine GM Original Equipment
collision insurance coverage. . Driver license number.
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
There are significant differences
Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Owner name, address, and
in the quality of coverage afforded
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
by various insurance policy terms.
you may be charged at the end of
Many insurance policies provide . Vehicle license plate number.
the lease for poor quality repairs.
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification
insurance companies will not emergency services for help.
Number (VIN).
specify aftermarket collision parts. Do not leave the scene of a crash
until all matters have been taken . Insurance company and policy
When purchasing insurance, we
care of. Move the vehicle only if its number.
recommend that you ensure that
the vehicle will be repaired with position puts you in danger, or you . General description of the
GM original equipment collision are instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle.
parts. If such insurance coverage officer.
Choose a reputable repair facility
is not available from your current Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts.
insurance carrier, consider switching to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
to another insurance carrier. in the crash. section.
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see
Roadside Assistance Program What Will You See After an Airbag
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 Inflates? on page 3‑39.
or Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Managing the Vehicle Damage initially value the repair using Service Publications
Repair Process aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist
Ordering Information
In the event that the vehicle requires on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
damage repairs, GM recommends Service Manuals
if the vehicle is leased, you may
that you take an active role in its be obligated to have the vehicle Service Manuals have the diagnosis
repair. If you have a pre-determined repaired with Genuine GM parts, and repair information on the
repair facility of choice, take the even if your insurance coverage engines, transmission, axle,
vehicle there, or have it towed does not pay the full cost. suspension, brakes, electrical,
there. Specify to the facility that any steering, body, etc.
required replacement collision parts If another party's insurance
be original equipment parts, either company is paying for the repairs, Service Bulletins
new Genuine GM parts or recycled you are not obligated to accept Service Bulletins give additional
original GM parts. Remember, a repair valuation based on that technical service information
recycled parts will not be covered insurance company's collision needed to knowledgeably service
by the GM vehicle warranty. policy repair limits, as you have General Motors cars and trucks.
no contractual limits with that Each bulletin contains instructions
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, company. In such cases, you can
but you must live with the repair. to assist in the diagnosis and
have control of the repair and parts service of the vehicle.
Depending on your policy limits, choices as long as the cost stays
your insurance company may within reasonable limits.
Owner Information Current and Past Models Reporting Safety

Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and Defects
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
information about the vehicle. Reporting Safety Defects
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE: to the United States
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
Maintenance Schedule for all Government
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
models.
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or
Booklet.
Or write to: death, you should immediately
RETAIL SELL PRICE: inform the National Highway
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
shipping fees. P.O. Box 07130 Traffic Safety Administration
Detroit, MI 48207 (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Without Portfolio: Owner General Motors.
Manual only. Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring If NHTSA receives similar
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
obligation. Allow ample time for complaints, it may open an
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
delivery. investigation, and if it finds that
All listed prices are quoted in a safety defect exists in a group
U.S. funds. Make checks payable of vehicles, it may order a recall
in U.S. funds. and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian to General Motors
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
To contact NHTSA, you may believe that the vehicle has a safety this, please notify General Motors.
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-GMC-8782
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General (1-800-462-8782), or write:
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
http://www.safercar.gov; or GMC Customer Assistance Center
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
write to: P.O. Box 33172
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5172
Administrator, NHTSA Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. 2780 Sheffield Road
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Washington, D.C. 20590 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(French), or write:
You can also obtain other General Motors of Canada Limited
information about motor Customer Communication Centre,
vehicle safety from Mail Code: CA1-163-005
http://www.safercar.gov. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
This GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how
a vehicle's systems performed. data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, the vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as
control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data
and deploy airbags in a crash, and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: routinely acquired during a
if so equipped, to provide antilock crash investigation.
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help the dealer technician special equipment is required, and
service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal. information if they have access
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, to the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
GM will not access this data or OnStar® Radio Frequency

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with Identification (RFID)
if the vehicle is leased, with the an active OnStar system, that RFID technology is used in some
consent of the lessee; in response system may also record data in vehicles for functions such as tire
to an official request by police or crash or near crash‐like situations. pressure monitoring and ignition
similar government office; as part The OnStar Terms and Conditions system security, as well as in
of GM's defense of litigation provides information on data connection with conveniences
through the discovery process; or, collection and use and is available such as key fobs for remote door
as required by law. Data that GM in the OnStar glove box kit, locking/unlocking and starting, and
collects or receives may also be at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or in-vehicle transmitters for garage
used for GM research needs or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or door openers. RFID technology in
may be made available to others for by pressing the Q button and GM vehicles does not use or record
research purposes, where a need is speaking to an advisor. personal information or link with
shown and the data is not tied to a any other GM system containing
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Navigation System personal information.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any
of these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Adding Equipment to the Assistance Program,
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Audio Controller,
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Adjustments
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Alarm System MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-30
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-28 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Antenna Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Anti-Theft Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Appearance Care Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
What Will You See After
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-35
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cargo

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
High Intensity Discharge Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29 C CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
California Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-20
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Charging
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Perchlorate Materials System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Check
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Ignition
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Capacities and Child Restraints
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Infants and Young
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Carbon Monoxide Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Lower Anchors and
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-57
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65, 3-67
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
INDEX i-3
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 D

Cleaning Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-13
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Danger, Warnings, and
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95 Courtesy Transportation
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cover
Daytime Running
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lamps/Automatic
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-13 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-6
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Compressor Kit, Tire Text Telephone (TTY)
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Door
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Information
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Service Publications
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Coolant Customer Satisfaction
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Drive Systems
Engine Temperature
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-28
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
i-4 INDEX
Driver Information E Engine (cont.)

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25, 5-30 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Electrical Equipment,
Driving Cooling System Messages . . .5-39
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Characteristics and Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Electrical System
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Engine Compartment
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Fuses and Circuit
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Overheated Protection
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Instrument Panel Fuse
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Engine
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Check and Service Engine
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Engine Oil
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Driving for Better Fuel Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Dual Automatic Climate Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Coolant Temperature
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
DVD Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18
Coolant Temperature
Rear Seat Entertainment Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
INDEX i-5
F Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 G
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Features Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Filling a Portable Fuel
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Filter, Gasoline
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-43
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Gauges
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3 Engine Coolant
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Requirements, California . . . . .9-43
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Fuel Economy
Fluid Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Fuses
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Warning Lights and
Engine Compartment
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 General Information
Fuses and Circuit
Fog Lamps Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Instrument Panel Fuse
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Front Fog Lamps Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Front Seats Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-9
i-6 INDEX
H Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Infants and Young Children,

Heater Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
High Voltage Devices and Instrument Panel
Head Up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Headlamps
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Daytime Running
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 J
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Lamps/Automatic
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 K
High Intensity Discharge Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-41
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Keyless Entry
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24 I Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Front Ignition Transmission Lock
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
INDEX i-7
L Lighting Lights (cont.)

Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39
Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lamps
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-22
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lights Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Locks
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Antilock Brake System Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
LATCH System
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Replacing Parts After a
Engine Coolant Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tethers for Children
Liftgate
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
i-8 INDEX
M Messages (cont.) Mirrors (cont.)

Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Maintenance
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Maintenance Schedule
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Recommended Fluids and
Object Detection System . . . . .5-42 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Monitor System, Tire
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-30
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 N
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Navigation
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-43
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Vehicle Data Recording
Battery Voltage and
Mirrors and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Automatic Dimming New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-39
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
INDEX i-9
O P Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Object Detection System Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Power
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Park
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Off-Road Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Oil Parking
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Brake and P (Park)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-48 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Passenger Airbag Status
Privacy
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Radio Frequency
Operation, Infotainment Passenger Compartment Air
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Program
Outlets Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-41
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Perchlorate Materials
Proposition 65 Warning,
Overheated Engine Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Protection Personalization
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
i-10 INDEX
R Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-37 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-48

Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 Replacing LATCH System
Radio Frequency
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Replacing Safety Belt
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 System Parts After a
Radios
Recommended Fluids and Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Reporting Safety Defects
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Records General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Recreational Vehicle Restraints
Rear Audio
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Reimbursement Program, Retained Accessory
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
Remote Keyless Entry Ride Control Systems
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roads
Rear Seat Entertainment
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Replacement Parts Roadside Assistance
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-48
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
INDEX i-11
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Service

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Accessories and
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Running the Vehicle While Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Seats Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10
S Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance, General
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-9 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6 Publications Ordering
How to Wear Safety Belts Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-32 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-80 Shift Lock Control Function
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-30 Securing Child Check, Automatic
Safety Defects Reporting Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65, 3-67 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17 Security Shifting
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
i-12 INDEX
Signals, Turn and Storage Areas (cont.) T

Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Spare Tire Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15
Specifications and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-22 Storing the Tire Sealant
Tires
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 System
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48
Storage Areas
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3
INDEX i-13
Tires (cont.) Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 U

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-35
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47 Towing
Uniform Tire Quality
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-47
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Sealant and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-55
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Sealant and Compressor Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-87
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-80 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Terminology and Transmission V
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Vehicle
Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Wheel Alignment and Tire Transportation Program, Identification
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59 Turn and Lane-Change Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
When It Is Time for New Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
i-14 INDEX
Vehicle Care Wheels

Storing the Tire Sealant Alignment and Tire
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-70 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Vehicle Identification Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Service Parts Identification When It Is Time for New
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-55
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Voltage Devices, and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Windshield
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
W Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Warning Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Wipers
Warning Lights, Gauges, Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Wiring, High Voltage
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-46

2011 GMC Acadia Owners PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2011 GMC Acadia Owners PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart + : Fuses

In Brief Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9

Initial Drive Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks

Power Liftgate Windows Seat Adjustment

On vehicles with power windows,

A. Seat Adjustment Control

Heated and Ventilated Head Restraint

Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

Refer to the following sections for

Exterior Lighting AUTO : Automatic operation of the Windshield Wiper/Washer

Windshield Washer Climate Controls

or Rear Climate Control System

Vehicle Features © ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the system BAND: Press to choose between

Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise Storage Compartments

Power Outlets Performance and

Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

With Remote Start and Power

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

Any lost or stolen transmitters 3. Insert the new battery, positive

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

This feature will not operate if the Lockout Protection

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Resetting the Power Foldaway Heated Mirrors Park Tilt Mirrors

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows Power Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the

2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23

2-24 Keys, Doors and Windows